CONTROLS for Your BMW X7 4 Door First Generation (2019-2025)

Dashboard  
CONTROLS  
Dashboard  
available, or may become available in the fu-  
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.  
Vehicle features and options  
Additional information:  
This chapter describes model-specific equip-  
ment, systems, and functions that are currently  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
In the vicinity of the steering wheel  
1
Roller sunblinds, rear side win-  
dows 97  
Unlocking  
Locking  
2
3
Safety switch for the windows and  
roller sunblinds 98  
6
Seating comfort features  
Power windows 95  
4
5
Exterior mirror adjustment button 119  
Central locking system 90  
30  
Dashboard  
CONTROLS  
Front passenger seat functionality  
107  
Interrupt speed control systems.  
Adjusting the speed 224  
Memory function 121  
Massage function 104  
12 Instrument cluster 145  
13 Steering wheel buttons, right  
Displaying menu bar in instru-  
7
Operating the second seat row  
111  
ment cluster 145  
Volume, see Owner's Manual for  
Navigation, Entertainment and  
Communication 6  
8
9
Opening and closing cargo area  
81  
Voice activation system 53  
Turn signal lever  
Turn signal 166  
Selecting menu contents in instru-  
ment cluster 145  
High-beam headlights, head-  
light flasher 166  
Changing the station/track, see  
Owner's Manual for Navigation,  
Entertainment, Communication 6  
Automatic High Beam Assistant  
167  
Telephone, see Owner's Manual  
for Navigation, Entertainment and  
Communication 6  
Trip data 160  
G-Meter 162  
Knurled wheel for selecting con-  
figuration menus for instrument  
cluster and Head-up display 145  
10 Shift paddles  
11 Steering wheel buttons, left  
Using infotainment selection lists  
in the instrument cluster 155  
Turn speed control systems on/off  
224  
14 Wiper lever  
Select speed control system 224  
Wipers 174  
Store speed 224  
Rain sensor 175  
Resume speed control systems  
with the stored setting.  
Cleaning the windshield 176  
Rear wiper in Canadian models  
176  
31  
Dashboard  
CONTROLS  
Rear wiper 176  
Exterior lighting menu 47  
Clean the rear window 176  
Horn, entire surface  
Driving lights automatic 169  
Low-beam headlights 169  
Adaptive lighting functions 172  
Exterior lighting off 169  
15  
16  
Adjusting the steering wheel 121  
19  
Unlocking the hood 379  
17 Fold-out compartment 313  
18 Lights  
In the vicinity of the center console  
1
Control display 48  
Ventilation 295  
Defrost function 293  
2
3
Hazard warning system 395  
Rear window defroster 293  
Climate control 286  
32  
Dashboard  
CONTROLS  
Radio/multimedia, see Owner's Manual for  
Navigation, Entertainment, and Communi-  
cation 6  
8
Driving Experience Control 138  
SPORT drive mode  
COMFORT drive mode  
ECO PRO drive mode  
Hill Descent Control 219  
Adjusting the volume  
Station/title forward  
Station/title back  
9
Turning drive-ready state on/off  
130  
4
5
6
Button for glove compartment 312  
Controller with buttons 50  
Two-axle ride level control 279  
10  
Auto Start/Stop function 131  
Parking assistance systems 249  
Dynamic Stability Control 216  
xOffroad package 282  
7
Parking brake 140  
Automatic Hold 142  
11 Selector lever 133  
33  
Dashboard  
CONTROLS  
In the vicinity of the headliner  
1
Emergency Call, SOS 398  
Glass sunroof 99  
5
6
Depending on the vehicle equip-  
ment: opening the rear sun pro-  
tection 99  
2
3
4
Depending on the vehicle equip-  
ment: closing the rear sun protec-  
tion 99  
Indicator light, front passenger  
airbag 180  
Interior lights 172  
Reading lights 173  
34  
Sensors of the vehicle  
CONTROLS  
Sensors of the vehicle  
Vehicle features and options Cameras  
This chapter describes model-specific equip-  
Front camera  
ment, systems, and functions that are currently  
available, or may become available in the fu-  
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.  
Additional information:  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
Overview  
Depending on the equipment, the following  
cameras and sensors are installed in the vehi-  
cle:  
The front camera is located in the radiator  
grille.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Front camera.  
Camera behind the windshield  
Camera behind the windshield.  
Top view cameras.  
Rearview camera.  
Front radar sensor.  
Radar sensors, side, front.  
Radar sensors, side, rear.  
Ultrasonic sensors in the front/rear bump-  
ers.  
▷
Ultrasonic sensors, side.  
The camera behind the windshield is located  
near the interior mirror.  
35  
Sensors of the vehicle  
CONTROLS  
▷
When the camera field of view is covered,  
for instance by a fogged up windshield or  
labels.  
Top view cameras  
▷
▷
▷
▷
If the camera lens is dirty or damaged.  
With exterior mirrors folded in.  
With open doors or open cargo area.  
When driving toward bright lights or strong  
reflections, e.g., setting sun.  
▷
▷
When it is dark outside.  
The camera has overheated due to exces-  
sive temperatures and temporarily turned  
off.  
One exterior mirror camera is located at the  
bottom of each exterior mirror housing.  
▷
During calibration of the camera immedi-  
ately after vehicle delivery.  
Rearview camera  
If applicable, a Check Control message will be  
displayed when the system limits are reached.  
Radar sensors  
Safety information  
Warning  
The rearview camera is located in the handle  
strip on the rear of the vehicle.  
The vehicle radar sensors and thus also the  
driver assistance systems can be impaired by  
external influences, e.g., interference. There  
is a risk of accident, injury, or property dam-  
age. Watch the surrounding traffic situation  
closely, be ready to take over steering and  
braking at any time, and actively intervene  
where appropriate.  
Functional requirement of the  
cameras  
The areas of the cameras are clean and clear.  
Additional information:  
▷
▷
Washing the vehicle, refer to page 404.  
Vehicle care, refer to page 405.  
System limits of the cameras  
The cameras may not work properly, e.g.,  
show something that is incorrect, in the follow-  
ing situations:  
▷
▷
In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.  
On steep hills, in steep depressions or in  
tight curves.  
36  
Sensors of the vehicle  
CONTROLS  
Front radar sensor  
Functional requirement of the radar  
sensors  
The areas of the radar sensors are clean and  
clear.  
Additional information:  
▷
▷
Washing the vehicle, refer to page 404.  
Vehicle care, refer to page 405.  
System limits of the radar sensors  
The function of the radar sensors may be re-  
stricted or not available, for instance in the fol-  
lowing situations:  
The front radar sensor is located in the front  
bumper.  
▷
▷
▷
In case of dirty sensors.  
Radar sensors, side, front  
In case of iced-up sensors.  
If sensors are covered such as by labels,  
films or a license-plate carrier.  
▷
▷
▷
If the sensor is not aligned correctly, for in-  
stance due to parking damage.  
If the radiation range of the sensors is cov-  
ered, e.g., by protruding cargo.  
When the field of view of the sensors is cov-  
ered, e.g., by garage walls, hedges, snow  
hills, vehicles or trailers.  
The radar sensors are located on the side of  
the front bumper.  
▷
▷
After improper paint work on the vehicle in  
the area of the sensors.  
On steep hilltops or in sharp dips in the  
road.  
Radar sensors, side, rear  
If applicable, a Check Control message will be  
displayed when the system limits are reached.  
The radar sensors are located on the side of  
the rear bumper.  
37  
Sensors of the vehicle  
CONTROLS  
Functional requirement of the  
ultrasonic sensors  
Ultrasonic sensors  
The areas of the ultrasonic sensors are clean  
and clear.  
Ultrasonic sensors, front  
Additional information:  
▷
▷
Washing the vehicle, refer to page 404.  
Vehicle care, refer to page 405.  
System limits of the ultrasonic  
sensors  
The detection of objects with ultrasonic meas-  
urements can run into physical limits, e.g., in  
the following situations:  
The ultrasonic sensors of the parking assis-  
tance systems are located in the front bumper.  
▷
▷
▷
If the sensors are dirty or covered, e.g., by  
stickers.  
Ultrasonic sensors, rear  
If the sensor is not aligned correctly, for in-  
stance due to parking damage.  
After improper paint work on the vehicle in  
the area of the sensors.  
▷
▷
For small children and animals.  
For persons with certain clothing, for in-  
stance jacket.  
▷
▷
With obstacles and persons at the edge of  
the lane.  
In case of external interference with the  
ultrasonics, for instance from passing ve-  
hicles, loud machines or other ultrasonic  
sources.  
The ultrasonic sensors of the parking assis-  
tance systems are located in the rear bumper.  
Ultrasonic sensors, side  
▷
▷
Under certain weather conditions, e.g., high  
moisture, wet conditions, snowfall, cold, ex-  
treme heat, or strong wind.  
With tow bars and trailer hitches of other  
vehicles.  
▷
▷
▷
With thin or wedge-shaped objects.  
With moving objects.  
With elevated, protruding objects such as  
ledges.  
▷
With objects with corners, edges, and  
smooth surfaces.  
The ultrasonic sensors for the parking assis-  
tance systems are located on the sides of the  
front and rear bumpers.  
38  
Sensors of the vehicle  
CONTROLS  
▷
In the case of objects with fine surfaces or  
structures, e.g., wire mesh fences.  
▷
▷
For objects with porous surfaces.  
With small and low objects, for instance  
boxes.  
▷
▷
Low objects already displayed, for instance  
curbs, can be outside of the detection  
ranges of the sensors.  
With soft obstacles or obstacles covered in  
foam material.  
▷
▷
▷
With plants and bushes.  
In automatic car washes.  
In the event of uneven floors, e.g. speed  
bumps.  
▷
▷
If there are large amounts of exhaust gas.  
Cargo that extends beyond the perimeter of  
the vehicle is not taken into account by the  
ultrasonic sensors.  
▷
When the trailer hitch cover is not on  
straight.  
If applicable, a Check Control message will be  
displayed when the system limits are reached.  
39  
Operating state of the vehicle  
CONTROLS  
Operating state of the vehicle  
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured  
against rolling away, follow the following:  
Vehicle features and options  
▷
▷
Set the parking brake.  
This chapter describes model-specific equip-  
ment, systems, and functions that are currently  
available, or may become available in the fu-  
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.  
On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,  
turn the front wheels in the direction of  
the curb.  
Additional information:  
▷
On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,  
also secure the vehicle, for instance with  
a wheel chock.  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
General information  
Warning  
Depending on the situation, the vehicle is in  
one of the three states:  
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle  
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger  
themselves and traffic, for example, due to  
the following actions:  
▷
▷
▷
Idle state.  
Standby state.  
Drive-ready state.  
▷
▷
▷
Establishing standby.  
Releasing the parking brake.  
Opening and closing the doors or win-  
dows.  
Idle state  
▷
▷
Engaging selector lever position N.  
Using vehicle equipment.  
Principle  
When the vehicle is in idle state, it is switched  
off.  
There is a risk of accident, injury, and prop-  
erty damage. Do not leave children or ani-  
mals unattended in the vehicle. Take the ve-  
hicle key with you when exiting and lock the  
vehicle.  
General information  
The vehicle is in idle state prior to opening  
from the outside and after exiting and locking.  
Establishing the sleep mode  
automatically  
Safety information  
The sleep mode is established automatically  
such as in the following situations:  
Warning  
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and  
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident,  
injury, or property damage. Before leaving  
the vehicle, secure the vehicle against rolling  
away.  
40  
Operating state of the vehicle  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
▷
After several minutes, if no operation takes  
place on the vehicle.  
General information  
When the vehicle is shut down for longer than  
three months, some special measures are nec-  
essary. For more information, contact an au-  
thorized service center or another qualified  
service center or repair shop.  
If the charge state of the vehicle battery is  
low.  
Depending on the configuration via iDrive:  
one or both front doors will be opened after  
driving when exiting the vehicle.  
Activating deep sleep mode  
In some situations, the idle state is not set au-  
tomatically, for instance during a phone call or  
when the low-beam headlights are switched  
on.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "System settings"  
4. "Deep sleep mode"  
5. Select the desired setting.  
Establishing idle state when  
opening the front doors  
After a trip, the sleep mode can be established  
by opening the front doors. For this purpose,  
all passengers must exit the vehicle.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Doors and windows"  
4. "Lock/unlock"  
5. "Turn off after opening door"  
Press the button on the trunk to access the  
vehicle while in deep sleep mode. Deep sleep  
mode remains on in this case.  
Establishing the sleep mode  
manually  
To establish idle state in the vehicle after com-  
pletion of trip:  
Deactivating deep sleep mode  
▷
Turn off the function on the control display.  
Press and hold the volume but-  
ton on the radio until the OFF in-  
dicator on the instrument cluster  
disappears.  
▷
Driving with the vehicle.  
Standby state  
Principle  
Deep sleep mode  
When standby state is switched on, most func-  
tions can be used while the vehicle is station-  
ary. Desired settings can be adjusted.  
Principle  
Deep sleep mode is activated to prevent the  
vehicle battery from discharging when the ve-  
hicle is stationary for several weeks.  
General information  
The vehicle is in the standby state after the  
front doors are opened from the outside.  
In deep sleep mode, the vehicle functions are  
limited to the essentials.  
41  
Operating state of the vehicle  
CONTROLS  
Manually setting to standby  
Safety information  
General information  
Standby can be switched back on after the ve-  
hicle is automatically set to idle state.  
DANGER  
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventilation is  
insufficient, harmful exhaust gases can pene-  
trate the vehicle. The exhaust gases contain  
pollutants which are colorless and odorless.  
In enclosed areas, exhaust gases can also  
accumulate outside of the vehicle. There is a  
danger to life. Keep the exhaust pipe free and  
ensure sufficient ventilation.  
Using the volume button on the radio  
Press the volume button on the  
radio. The control display and  
the instrument cluster illuminate.  
Using the Start/Stop button  
Warning  
Press the Start/Stop button. The  
control display and the instru-  
ment cluster illuminate.  
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and  
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident,  
injury, or property damage. Before leaving  
the vehicle, secure the vehicle against rolling  
away.  
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured  
against rolling away, follow the following:  
Display in the instrument cluster  
▷
▷
Set the parking brake.  
OFF is displayed in the instru-  
ment cluster. Drive-ready state  
is turned off and standby state  
turned on.  
On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,  
turn the front wheels in the direction of  
the curb.  
▷
On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,  
also secure the vehicle, for instance with  
a wheel chock.  
Drive-ready state  
Principle  
NOTICE  
Turning on drive-ready state corresponds to  
starting the engine.  
Repeatedly attempting to start the engine or  
repeatedly starting the vehicle in rapid suc-  
cession can cause the starter to overheat.  
This also results in unburned or inadequately  
burned fuel, and can cause the catalytic con-  
verter to overheat. There is a risk of property  
damage. Avoid repeated starting of the vehi-  
cle, particularly repeated starting in rapid suc-  
cession.  
General information  
Some vehicle functions can only be used with  
the drive-ready state switched on.  
42  
Operating state of the vehicle  
CONTROLS  
Turning on the drive-ready state  
General information  
Drive-ready state is turned on  
using the Start/Stop button.  
Turning on the drive-ready state  
1. Depress the brake pedal.  
2. Press the Start/Stop button.  
The ignition is activated automatically for a  
brief time and is stopped as soon as the en-  
gine starts.  
Most of the indicator lights and warning lights  
on the instrument cluster illuminate for differ-  
ent lengths of time.  
Gasoline engine  
Depending on the motorization, the full drive  
power may not be available for approximately  
30 seconds after starting the engine. In this  
case, the vehicle will not accelerate as usual.  
Additional information:  
Power gauge, refer to page 156.  
Display in the instrument cluster  
The activated drive-ready state is indicated  
in the instrument cluster, depending on the  
equipment, by the display of information re-  
quired for driving or the READY display.  
Turning off drive-ready state  
1. Engage selector lever position P with the  
vehicle stopped.  
2. Set the parking brake.  
3. Press the Start/Stop button.  
The engine is switched off. The vehicle  
switches into standby state.  
43  
BMW iDrive  
CONTROLS  
BMW iDrive  
Safety information  
Vehicle features and options  
This chapter describes model-specific equip-  
ment, systems, and functions that are currently  
available, or may become available in the fu-  
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.  
Warning  
Operating the integrated information systems  
and communication devices while driving can  
distract from surrounding traffic. It is possible  
to lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk  
of accident, injury, or property damage. Only  
use the systems or devices when the traffic  
situation allows. As warranted, stop and use  
the systems and devices while the vehicle is  
stationary.  
Additional information:  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
Display and operating  
concept  
Principle  
Main menu  
BMW iDrive is the vehicle’s display and oper-  
ating concept and includes a wide range of  
functions.  
General information  
The main menu is divided into different areas.  
General information  
Overview  
Depending on vehicle equipment, the functions  
can be operated as follows:  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Via the control display.  
Via the Controller.  
Via the touchpad.  
Via the BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant.  
Via the gesture control.  
Via the operating elements on the steering  
wheel.  
1
Widgets  
Additional information:  
2
3
4
5
Status information  
Configuration bar for main display  
Temperature setting  
Menu bar  
Instrument cluster, refer to page 145.  
44  
BMW iDrive  
CONTROLS  
Android Auto© menu  
Menu bar  
Depending on national-market version with  
associated function: Access to Android Auto.  
Android Auto enables the secure use of certain  
functions of a compatible Android smartphone  
via iDrive.  
Apps menu  
Access to apps and vehicle functions. A  
filter can be selected. If necessary, change the  
filter to see the apps you want.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
"All apps": All apps and functions are dis-  
played.  
Widgets  
Widgets show real-time information and dy-  
namic content such as current media or paired  
smartphones. The widgets also serve as but-  
tons and allow jumping to the relevant menu.  
"Infotainment": Only infotainment apps are  
displayed.  
"Vehicle": Only vehicle adjustment func-  
tions are displayed.  
"Recently used": The most recently used  
apps are displayed.  
Main display  
The main display shows real-time information  
and dynamic content such as the navigation  
map. This display also contains buttons and  
lets you jump to the desired menu.  
Media menu  
Access to entertainment system functions,  
e.g., radio stations or external device pairing.  
Status information  
Communication menu  
Access to telephone and message function  
as well as pairing and management of mobile  
devices, e.g., smartphones.  
General information  
The status field can be found in the upper area  
of the control display. Status information is dis-  
played in the form of icons. Depending on the  
equipment and national-market version, differ-  
ent icons are available.  
Navigation menu  
Access to navigation system, destination  
entry, and traffic information. Configurable  
map views and other functions such as points  
of interest.  
Telephone status information  
Icon  
Meaning  
Climate menu  
Active call.  
The Climate menu provides access to all  
climate control functions.  
Signal strength.  
SIM card missing.  
Apple CarPlay© menu  
Depending on national-market version with  
associated function: Access to Apple CarPlay.  
Apple CarPlay enables the secure use of cer-  
tain functions of a compatible Apple iPhone via  
iDrive.  
Entertainment status information  
Icon Meaning  
USB audio.  
Bluetooth audio.  
Smartphone audio.  
45  
BMW iDrive  
CONTROLS  
Input and display  
Icon Meaning  
Connected Music with Spotify.  
Letters and numbers  
Time shift.  
Wi-Fi.  
Letters and numbers can be entered using the  
controller, touchpad, control display, or voice  
control, depending on vehicle equipment.  
Apple CarPlay.  
Android Auto.  
Icon  
Function  
Change between capital and  
lower-case letters.  
Satellite radio is switched on.  
Enter a blank space.  
Switching between languages.  
Use voice control.  
Status information messages  
Icon Meaning  
Number of notifications.  
Check Control message.  
Suppress private information.  
Do not disturb.  
Confirm entry.  
Shift the input area to the left  
or right.  
Entry comparison  
Message.  
When entering data from a database such as  
contacts, the selection is gradually narrowed  
down for each character entered, with charac-  
ters being added as necessary.  
Additional information:  
Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertain-  
ment, and Communication, refer to page 6.  
Activating/deactivating the functions  
Some menu items are preceded by an icon.  
Selecting the menu item enables or disables  
the function.  
Other status information  
Icon Meaning  
Sound output active.  
Icon  
Meaning  
Sound output deactivated.  
Activation word active.  
BMW ID or driver profile.  
Destination guidance active.  
Go to quick access.  
Function is activated.  
Function is deactivated.  
Enabling/disabling audible feedback  
For some functions, audio confirmation is  
given, e.g., sounds are emitted when operating  
the control display.  
Wireless charging active.  
Park Distance Control: sound active.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
Park Distance Control: sound deacti-  
vated.  
3. "System settings"  
46  
BMW iDrive  
CONTROLS  
4. "Sound"  
Shortcuts can only be created with an active  
BMW ID or a driver profile.  
5. Select the desired setting.  
Executing a function  
1. Swipe from top to bottom on the control  
display.  
Quick access  
The quick link provides access to shortcuts,  
certain settings, and app recommendations.  
2. Tap the desired shortcut.  
Input  
Operation  
The function will work immediately. This  
means for instance that the connection is es-  
tablished when a phone number is selected.  
Show  
Swipe from top to bottom on the  
quick link. control display.  
Slide the controller up.  
Tap the icon on the status  
bar.  
Swipe from the bottom up on the  
quick link. control display.  
Slide the controller down.  
Deleting shortcuts  
1. Swipe from top to bottom on the control  
display.  
Hide  
2. Press and hold the desired shortcut.  
3. "Delete shortcut"  
Activating/deactivating pop-ups  
For some functions, pop-ups are displayed  
automatically on the control display. Some of  
these pop-ups can be activated or deactivated.  
Direct access  
General information  
The vehicle has buttons that can be used to  
access menus for the respective function di-  
rectly on the control display. Then continue the  
operation via iDrive.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "System settings"  
4. "Pop-ups"  
Overview  
5. Select the desired setting.  
Button Function  
Shortcuts  
Go to the Exterior Lighting menu be-  
tween the steering wheel and driv-  
er’s door.  
General information  
The iDrive functions can be stored on the  
shortcuts and called up directly, for instance  
radio stations, navigation destinations, phone  
numbers and menu entries.  
BMW Curved Display  
Principle  
Storing a function  
The BMW Curved Display is a single-screen  
display in the instrument panel that is curved  
towards the driver. The BMW Curved Display  
comprises the instrument cluster on the driv-  
er's side and the control display.  
1. Select the desired function.  
2. Press and hold the desired function.  
3. "Add to shortcuts"  
47  
BMW iDrive  
CONTROLS  
General information  
Follow instructions for cleaning the BMW  
Curved Display in the Care chapter.  
Warning  
Objects in the area in front of a display can  
slip and damage the display. There is a risk  
of injury or risk of damage to property. Do not  
place objects in the area in front of a display.  
Additional information:  
Caring for special components, refer to  
page 407.  
Overview  
Overview  
1
Instrument cluster 145  
Control display 48  
Control display.  
2
Switching the control display on/off  
automatically  
The control display is turned on automatically  
when the vehicle is unlocked or as soon as the  
control display is needed for operation.  
Control display  
Principle  
In certain situations, the control display is  
switched off automatically, for instance if no  
operation is performed on the vehicle for sev-  
eral minutes.  
The iDrive functions are displayed on the con-  
trol display.  
Safety information  
Switching the control display on/off  
manually  
1. Swipe from top to bottom on the control  
display.  
Warning  
When driving, loose items or devices con-  
nected to the vehicle with a cable, i.e., mobile  
phones, may be thrown around the vehicle,  
e.g., in the event of an accident or when brak-  
ing or performing evasive maneuvers. There  
is a risk of injury and risk of property damage.  
Secure loose objects or devices that are con-  
nected to the vehicle via a cable.  
2. "Screen off"  
Tap the control display to turn it on again.  
Setting the brightness  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Displays"  
48  
BMW iDrive  
CONTROLS  
4. "Control display"  
Buttons on the Controller  
5. "Brightness at night"  
6. Make the desired setting.  
Button Function  
Call up the main menu.  
Depending on the light conditions, the bright-  
ness control may not be clearly visible.  
Call up the Media/Radio menu.  
System limits  
In the case of very high temperatures on the  
control display, for instance due to intense so-  
lar radiation, the brightness may be reduced  
down to complete deactivation. Once the  
temperature is reduced, for instance through  
shade or air conditioning system, the normal  
functions are restored.  
Go to Phone menu.  
Call up the navigation map.  
Call up the destination input menu  
for navigation.  
Controller  
Go to previous menu.  
Principle  
The Controller can be used to select menu  
items and enter the settings. The buttons can  
be used to open the menus directly.  
Call up the Options menu.  
Overview  
Operation  
▷
Rotate the Controller to switch between  
menu options, for example.  
Controller  
▷
Press the Controller to select a menu  
option, for example.  
49  
BMW iDrive  
CONTROLS  
3. Tilt the Controller to the right.  
4. Select the desired main display.  
Selecting a widget  
1. Use the Controller to select widgets.  
2. If necessary, turn the Controller until the de-  
sired widget is selected.  
3. Press the Controller.  
▷
Slide the Controller in four directions to  
switch between menus, for example.  
Switching between menus  
A new display opens after a menu item is se-  
lected.  
▷
Slide the Controller to the left.  
The current menu closes and the previous  
menu is displayed.  
▷
Press the button.  
The current menu closes and the previous  
menu is displayed.  
Operating via the Controller  
Calling up the context menu  
Depending on the menu item, a context menu  
with additional options can be displayed.  
Opening the main menu  
Press the button.  
1. Select the desired menu item using the  
Controller.  
2. Press and hold the Controller.  
The main menu is displayed.  
The menu consists of various areas, for in-  
stance:  
Selecting menu items  
1. Turn the Controller until the desired menu  
item is highlighted.  
▷
"General help": Go to the Integrated Own-  
er's Manual.  
▷
"Add to shortcuts": define menu item as  
shortcut.  
2. Press the Controller.  
Adjusting the main display  
The main display can be adjusted in the main  
menu.  
Entering letters and numbers  
Input  
1. Turn the Controller: select letters or num-  
bers.  
1.  
Press the button.  
2.  
: confirm entry.  
2. If necessary, tilt the Controller to select the  
main display.  
Additional information:  
50  
BMW iDrive  
CONTROLS  
Setting the system language, refer to  
page 55.  
Entering letters and numbers  
▷
Enter characters as they are displayed on  
the control display.  
Deleting an entry  
▷
Always enter associated characters such as  
accents or periods so that the letter can be  
clearly recognized.  
Icon Function  
Press Controller: delete a letter or num-  
ber.  
▷
The set language determines what input  
is possible. Where necessary, enter special  
characters via the Controller.  
Hold the Controller down: delete all let-  
ters or numbers.  
Additional information:  
Setting the system language, refer to  
page 55.  
Using alphabetical lists  
For alphabetical lists with more than 30 en-  
tries, the letters for which an entry exists can  
be displayed in a text box.  
Entering special characters  
Function  
Operation  
1. Turn the Controller to the left or right  
quickly.  
Delete a charac- Swipe to the left on the  
ter.  
touchpad.  
2. Select the first letter of the desired entry.  
Enter a blank  
space.  
Swipe to the right in the  
center of the touchpad.  
The first entry of the selected letter is dis-  
played in the list.  
Enter a hyphen. Swipe to the right in the  
upper area of the touch-  
pad.  
Operation via touchpad  
Enter an under- Swipe to the right in the  
General information  
Depending on vehicle equipment, some iDrive  
functions can be operated with the controller  
touchpad.  
score.  
lower area of the touch-  
pad.  
Using the map  
The map in the navigation system can be  
moved via the touchpad.  
The touchpad is located on the Controller.  
Touch the touchpad with your fingers. Do not  
use any objects.  
Tap the map on the control display and then  
continue operation using the touchpad.  
Selecting functions  
1.  
Apps menu  
Function  
Operation  
2. "Vehicle"  
Move map.  
Swipe in the appropriate di-  
rection.  
3. "System settings"  
4. "Touchpad"  
Display menu. Tap once.  
5. Select the desired setting.  
51  
BMW iDrive  
CONTROLS  
Using alphabetical lists  
Alphabetical lists with more than 30 entries  
permit a direct jump to letters for which an en-  
try exists.  
Calling up the context menu  
Depending on the menu item, a context menu  
with additional options can be displayed.  
Press and hold the desired menu item.  
Enter the first letter on the touchpad.  
The menu consists of various areas, for in-  
stance:  
The first entry of the entered letter is displayed  
in the list.  
▷
"General help": Go to the Integrated Own-  
er's Manual.  
▷
"Add to shortcuts": define menu item as  
shortcut.  
Operation via control display  
General information  
Depending on the equipment version, the con-  
trol display is equipped with a touchscreen.  
Entering letters and numbers  
Input  
You can tap on menu items and widgets.  
Touch the control display with your fingers. Do  
not use any objects.  
1. If necessary, tap the  
display.  
icon or control  
2. Enter desired letters and numbers.  
Opening the main menu  
Tap on the icon.  
Deleting an entry  
Icon Function  
The main menu is displayed.  
Tap icon: delete a letter or a number.  
Adjusting the main display  
The main display can be adjusted in the main  
menu.  
Press and hold the icon: delete all let-  
ters or numbers.  
1.  
Tap on the icon.  
Using the map  
The navigation map can be moved on the con-  
trol display.  
2. Swipe the configuration bar on the right  
side of the screen to the left.  
3. Select the desired main display.  
Function  
Operation  
Sorting apps  
To resort the app icons, press and hold the de-  
sired icon and move it to the desired location.  
Move map.  
Swipe in the appropriate  
direction.  
Enlarge/shrink  
map.  
Drag in or out with the fin-  
gers.  
Switching between menus  
A new display opens after a menu item is se-  
lected.  
Display menu.  
Tap once.  
Select the arrow symbol.  
The current menu closes and the previous  
menu is displayed.  
52  
BMW iDrive  
CONTROLS  
For the full range of functions, you must acti-  
vate, configure, or purchase the following func-  
tions:  
Using alphabetical lists  
For alphabetical lists with more than 30 en-  
tries, the letters for which an entry exists can  
be displayed in a text box.  
▷
Online speech processing, refer to  
page 56.  
1. Tap the letter in front of the list.  
A letter box is displayed.  
▷
For all settings under  
Data protection, refer to page 67.  
Activation word, refer to page 54.  
BMW ID or a driver profile.  
2. Tap the first letter of the desired entry.  
▷
▷
▷
The first entry of the selected letter is dis-  
played in the list.  
Relevant ConnectedDrive services from the  
ConnectedDrive Store.  
BMW Intelligent Personal  
Assistant  
▷
Suggestions, refer to page 56.  
Activating the voice control system  
Principle  
General information  
There are various methods for activating the  
voice control feature:  
The BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant is a  
personal assistant that enables natural voice  
operation of various vehicle functions. The  
Personal Assistant makes it easier to operate  
the vehicle by providing proactive suggestions  
and automating habits.  
▷
▷
Press the button on the steering  
wheel briefly.  
The microphone on the driver's side is ac-  
tive.  
General information  
▷
BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant is avail-  
able depending on national-market version.  
Speaking the activation word.  
The microphones on the driver's or front  
passenger's side are active with the follow-  
ing voice control, depending on where the  
activation word was spoken.  
▷
The system includes special microphones  
on the driver side and the front passenger  
side.  
▷
▷
Say the commands and numbers fluently  
as well as with normal volume, emphasis,  
and speed.  
Then say the command. The activation word  
and the command can be spoken without  
pause in one sentence.  
›...‹ identifies commands that can be spo-  
ken.  
Microphone button on steering wheel  
Functional requirements  
1.  
Press button briefly.  
▷
A language that is supported by the Per-  
sonal Assistant must be set via iDrive.  
2. Say the command.  
Setting the system language, refer to  
page 55.  
▷
Always say commands in the configured  
system language.  
53  
BMW iDrive  
CONTROLS  
Activation word from third-party providers  
Activation word  
Depending on the national-market version,  
some third-party providers provide digital voice  
assistants such as Siri or Amazon Alexa.  
General information  
Saying the activation word will start the Per-  
sonal Assistant. The Personal Assistant lis-  
tens.  
To use Siri, the smartphone must be con-  
nected via Apple CarPlay.  
Supported voice assistants can be used with a  
connected smartphone in the vehicle.  
Preset activation word  
›Hello BMW‹: The default activation word can  
be activated and deactivated.  
The activation word from connected third-  
party providers can be used in addition to your  
preset or personal activation word from BMW.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
1.  
Apps menu  
3. "System settings"  
4. "Voice control"  
5. "Personal Assistant (BMW)"  
6. "Wake word"  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "System settings"  
4. "Voice control"  
5. "Additional speech assistants"  
6. Select the desired setting.  
7. ""Hello BMW""  
Personal activation word  
Canceling voice control  
In addition to the preset activation word, a  
personal activation word can be set up with  
an active BMW ID or a driver profile. The per-  
sonal activation word can also be changed or  
deleted.  
▷
Press the button on the steering  
wheel again.  
▷
▷
▷
›Cancel‹  
The activation word should consist of multiple  
syllables to ensure good recognition.  
Slide the Controller to the right or left.  
Press the Controller.  
›Hello‹: The additional phrase is not necessary  
for the activation word and does not need to  
be spoken.  
Possible commands  
General information  
1.  
Apps menu  
Commands can be used to give instructions  
or ask questions, with the Personal Assistant  
providing assistance.  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "System settings"  
4. "Voice control"  
5. "Personal Assistant (BMW)"  
6. "Wake word"  
For example, you can call contacts, navigate  
to an address, apply settings, or ask questions  
about a vehicle function. Most vehicle functions  
can be operated via voice commands, e.g., the  
Automatic Parking Assistant.  
7. "Personal wake word"  
8. "Set"  
Most content on the control display can be  
spoken as commands, e.g., menu items or list  
entries.  
9. "Start recording"  
54  
BMW iDrive  
CONTROLS  
have to follow the order of the menu items  
when speaking them out loud.  
Help for voice control  
▷
›Voice commands‹: have possible example  
commands suggested.  
1. Activate the voice control system.  
2. ›Media‹  
▷
›General information on voice control‹: have  
information on the operating principle of the  
voice control announced.  
3. ›Presets‹  
The stored stations are displayed on the  
control display.  
▷
▷
›Help‹: have tips and example commands  
for voice control announced.  
Additional example commands for the cur-  
rent context are displayed in the widget of  
the BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant.  
Owner's Manual via voice operation  
You can ask simple questions about vehicle  
functions and the operation of the vehicle.  
The voice activation system and the feed-  
back it provides do not replace the printed  
or Integrated Owner's Manual. The function  
is available depending on the national-market  
version. The speech recognition and quality of  
the feedback may vary.  
Sample commands  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
›Call John Smith‹  
›Drive me to JFK airport‹  
›Play a classical music station‹  
›Is my tire pressure still OK?‹  
›Activate the climate control‹  
›Increase the ACC distance‹  
›Sport mode‹  
Example command: ›How can the passenger  
airbag be deactivated?‹  
The Personal Assistant returns feedback.  
When stationary, the section of the integrated  
Owner's Manual is displayed on the control  
display.  
Additional example commands can be dis-  
played on the control display.  
1.  
Apps menu  
Settings  
2. "All apps"  
3. "Personal Assistant"  
4. "Help"  
Setting the system language  
1.  
Apps menu  
5. "Example commands"  
2. "Vehicle"  
Sample commands for the current context are  
displayed in the BMW Intelligent Personal As-  
sistant widget.  
3. "System settings"  
4. "Language"  
5. Select the desired setting.  
Additional information:  
Adjust widgets, refer to page 52.  
Setting the response length  
You can set the Personal Assistant to use  
standard dialog or a short version. In case of  
the short version, the announcements by the  
Personal Assistant are played back in an ab-  
breviated version.  
Menu items  
The Personal Assistant can bring up menu  
items directly. Say the menu items as they are  
displayed on the control display. You do not  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
55  
BMW iDrive  
CONTROLS  
3. "System settings"  
4. "Voice control"  
4. "Voice control"  
5. "Personal Assistant (BMW)"  
6. Select the desired setting.  
5. "Personal Assistant (BMW)"  
6. "Response length"  
Online speech processing  
7. Select the desired setting.  
Online speech processing improves the quality  
of the speech recognition and search results  
for points of interest. To use the functions,  
data is transmitted to a service provider via an  
encrypted connection and stored locally there.  
An active ConnectedDrive contract is required  
for online voice processing. ConnectedDrive is  
available depending on the national-market  
version. Online speech processing is not avail-  
able in all languages.  
Speaking during voice output  
It is possible to answer during inquiries of the  
Personal Assistant. The function can be dis-  
abled if requests are often canceled uninten-  
tionally, for instance due to background noise  
or conversations in the vehicle.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
1.  
Apps menu  
3. "System settings"  
2. "Vehicle"  
4. "Voice control"  
3. "System settings"  
4. "Voice control"  
5. "Personal Assistant (BMW)"  
6. "Speaking during voice output"  
5. "Personal Assistant (BMW)"  
6. "Online speech processing"  
Suggestions  
General information  
Configuring the visualization  
How the Personal Assistant is visualized can  
be set.  
The Personal Assistant provides helpful, indi-  
vidual suggestions.  
Activating/deactivating suggestions  
1.  
Apps menu  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "System settings"  
4. "Voice control"  
3. "System settings"  
4. "Voice control"  
5. "Personal Assistant (BMW)"  
6. "Visualization"  
5. "Personal Assistant (BMW)"  
6. "Receive suggestions"  
Voice control from third-party  
providers  
Adapting suggestions  
Depending on vehicle equipment, third-party  
voice control can be enabled by pressing and  
holding the microphone button on the steering  
wheel.  
Suggestions can be adapted, for example, by  
category or to output a signal tone.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
1.  
Apps menu  
3. "System settings"  
2. "Vehicle"  
56  
BMW iDrive  
CONTROLS  
3. "System settings"  
4. "Voice control"  
Functional requirements  
▷
A BMW ID or driver profile is activated.  
5. "Long press"  
▷
An active Amazon account must exist.  
6. Select the desired setting.  
Activating Amazon Alexa Car  
Integration  
Adjusting the volume  
Amazon Alexa Car Integration is activated in  
the vehicle and My BMW app if necessary.  
Turn the volume button during the voice guid-  
ance until the desired volume is set.  
Follow the instructions from the Amazon Alexa  
app to set it up in the vehicle.  
The volume remains constant even if the vol-  
ume of other audio sources is changed.  
1.  
Apps menu  
Using the voice activation of the  
smartphone  
Depending on the device, a smartphone con-  
nected to the vehicle can be used via voice  
control.  
2. "All apps"  
3. "Amazon Alexa"  
4. Select the desired setting.  
After setting it up, use Amazon Alexa in the  
vehicle as follows:  
The device must be connected via Apple Car-  
Play or Android Auto.  
Say the activation word "Alexa" and the de-  
sired command.  
Information about the active function is dis-  
played on the control display. If the function  
is restricted, reconnect Bluetooth and Wi-Fi as  
necessary.  
1. Press and hold the  
button on the  
steering wheel for approx. 3 seconds.  
The voice activation of the smartphone is  
activated.  
Automating routines  
If activation is successful, a confirmation  
appears on the control display.  
General information  
The Personal Assistant can automate routines,  
for instance the automatic opening of windows  
in the same place. Rules are created for this  
purpose, which can be activated and deacti-  
vated at any time.  
2. Press and hold the  
button on the  
steering wheel to cancel voice control of the  
smartphone.  
Amazon Alexa Car Integration  
Activating/deactivating routines  
Principle  
1.  
Apps menu  
Amazon Alexa Car Integration is available de-  
pending on vehicle equipment and national-  
market version. Alexa is a digital assistant  
from Amazon. With Amazon Alexa Car Integra-  
tion, Alexa can be used in the vehicle. For  
safety reasons, the use of some Alexa func-  
tions may be restricted while driving your vehi-  
cle.  
2. "All apps"  
3. "Automate habits"  
4. Select the desired setting.  
57  
BMW iDrive  
CONTROLS  
The camera in the headliner detects gestures  
that are carried out in the area of the center  
console at the height of the control display.  
System limits  
▷
The Personal Assistant provides informa-  
tion about vehicle functions that may not be  
installed in the vehicle.  
The camera of the gesture control uses an in-  
visible Class 1 laser.  
This also applies to safety functions and  
systems.  
Activate/deactivate gesture control  
▷
▷
Certain noises can be detected and may  
lead to problems. Keep the doors and win-  
dows closed.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
Noises from the front passenger or occu-  
pants can impair the system. Avoid making  
other noise in the vehicle while speaking.  
3. "System settings"  
4. "Gesture control"  
5. "Gesture control"  
▷
▷
Major language dialects can cause prob-  
lems with the speech recognition feature.  
Settings  
A poor data connection affects the re-  
sponse time of the Personal Assistant and  
search function.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "System settings"  
4. "Gesture control"  
5. Select the desired setting.  
BMW Gesture Control  
Principle  
Several iDrive functions can be operated by  
hand motion using BMW Gesture Control.  
Carrying out gestures  
▷
Perform gestures underneath the interior  
mirror and next to the steering wheel.  
▷
▷
Execute gestures clearly.  
Overview  
The gestures can also be executed from  
the front-passenger side.  
58  
BMW iDrive  
CONTROLS  
Possible gestures  
Gesture  
Operation  
Function  
Move extended index finger forward and Accept call.  
backward in the direction of the control  
Select a highlighted entry in a  
list during voice control.  
display.  
Confirm pop-up.  
Swipe the hand in front of the control  
display in the direction of the passenger  
seat.  
Reject call.  
Close pop-up.  
End voice control.  
Move extended index finger slowly in a  
clockwise circular movement.  
Increase the volume.  
Gesture is detected after one circular  
movement.  
Move the extended index finger counter- Reduce the volume.  
clockwise in a circular movement.  
Gesture is detected after one circular  
movement.  
Depending on the  
equipment:  
Bring thumb and index finger together  
and move the hand to the right or left.  
Turn vehicle in the Live Vehi-  
cle view.  
3D view: rotate camera view.  
This gesture can only be exe-  
cuted while the vehicle is sta-  
tionary.  
Move fist with thumb extended to the left Reverse Skip function.  
back and forth.  
The previous title is played.  
Move fist with thumb extended to the  
right back and forth.  
Forward Skip function.  
The next title is played.  
59  
BMW iDrive  
CONTROLS  
Gesture  
Operation  
Function  
With the index and middle fingers ex-  
tended, point into the direction of the  
control display.  
Perform individually assigna-  
ble gesture.  
Stretch out five fingers, form a fist and  
stretch five fingers out again.  
Perform individually assigna-  
ble gesture.  
5. "Point two fingers at display" or "Show five-  
o-five fingers"  
Assigning gesture individually  
General information  
6. Select the desired setting.  
Two gestures can be assigned individually and  
can be configured as shortcut for certain func-  
tions such as:  
System limits  
Gesture recognition by the camera in the  
headliner can be disturbed by the following cir-  
cumstances:  
▷
▷
▷
Destination guidance to home address.  
Mute/Playback  
▷
▷
▷
The camera lens is covered.  
Control display on/off  
Objects are located on the interior mirror.  
Gesture shortcuts can only be created with an  
active BMW ID or a driver profile.  
The camera lens is dirty, clean camera  
lens.  
Configure gesture shortcut  
The desired function can be selected directly in  
every menu and configured as shortcut.  
Sensors and camera lenses, refer to  
page 405.  
▷
The gesture is executed outside of the de-  
tection range.  
1. Press and hold the desired menu item.  
2. "Add to gesture shortcuts"  
▷
▷
Wearing of gloves or jewelry.  
Smoking in the car's interior.  
3. Select the desired gesture.  
Select function  
Some defined functions can be selected di-  
rectly in the menu for gesture control.  
Connecting mobile devices  
to the vehicle  
1.  
Apps menu  
Principle  
2. "Vehicle"  
Various connection types are available for us-  
ing mobile devices in the vehicle. The connec-  
tion type to select depends on the mobile de-  
vice and the desired function.  
3. "System settings"  
4. "Gesture control"  
60  
BMW iDrive  
CONTROLS  
of accident, injury, or property damage. Only  
use the systems or devices when the traffic  
situation allows. As warranted, stop and use  
the systems and devices while the vehicle is  
stationary.  
General information  
Detailed information on the functions and con-  
nection types can be found in the following  
media in the Owner's Manual under the speci-  
fied keyword:  
▷
▷
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle.  
Overview  
Printed Owner's Manual for navigation,  
communication and entertainment.  
The following overview shows possible func-  
tions and the suitable connection types for  
them. The range of functions depends on the  
vehicle equipment and the mobile device.  
The following information sources can also be  
used:  
▷
▷
Driver’s Guide app.  
Driver’s Guide Web.  
Safety information  
Warning  
Operating the integrated information systems  
and communication devices while driving can  
distract from surrounding traffic. It is possible  
to lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk  
Function  
Connection type  
Icon on the con-  
trol display  
Making calls via the hands-free sys- Bluetooth.  
tem.  
Keyword: Bluetooth connection.  
Using phone functions via iDrive.  
Keyword: calling via Bluetooth.  
Playing music from a mobile device.  
Keyword: audio.  
Bluetooth audio.  
Keyword: Bluetooth connection.  
Calling without a mobile phone.  
Personal eSIM.  
Keyword: calling with the Personal  
eSIM.  
Keyword: Personal eSIM.  
Data exchange between mobile de-  
vice and vehicle.  
Wi-Fi.  
Keyword: vehicle WLAN.  
Use Internet access via the personal Wi-Fi via personal hotspot.  
hotspot.  
Keyword: personal hotspot.  
61  
BMW iDrive  
CONTROLS  
Function  
Connection type  
Icon on the con-  
trol display  
Using Apple CarPlay via iDrive and  
via voice control.  
Bluetooth and Wi-Fi.  
Keyword: Bluetooth connection and  
Keyword: Apple CarPlay preparation. vehicle Wi-Fi.  
Using Android Auto via iDrive and via Bluetooth and Wi-Fi.  
voice control.  
Keyword: Bluetooth connection and  
Keyword: Android Auto preparation. vehicle Wi-Fi.  
Playing music from a USB device.  
Keyword: audio.  
USB.  
Keyword: USB connection.  
Additional information:  
USB port, refer to page 307.  
62  
BMW Remote Software Upgrade  
CONTROLS  
BMW Remote Software Upgrade  
There is a risk of accident, injury, and prop-  
erty damage. Do not leave children or ani-  
mals unattended in the vehicle. Take the ve-  
hicle key with you when exiting and lock the  
vehicle.  
Vehicle features and options  
This chapter describes model-specific equip-  
ment, systems, and functions that are currently  
available, or may become available in the fu-  
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.  
Additional information:  
Functional requirements  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
▷
Active ConnectedDrive contract.  
▷
The integrated SIM card in the vehicle has  
been activated.  
BMW Remote Software  
Upgrade  
▷
▷
Cellular network reception.  
Consent to transmit the corresponding data  
was given in the Data Protection menu.  
Principle  
Additional information:  
Remote Software Upgrade can be used to up-  
date the entire software of the vehicle. This  
makes new functions, functional enhance-  
ments or quality improvements available.  
Data protection, refer to page 67.  
Search for an upgrade  
Functional requirement  
Standby must be turned on to search for a  
Remote Software Upgrade.  
General information  
BMW recommends performing the Remote  
Software Upgrade as soon as it becomes  
available.  
Automatic search  
The vehicle regularly searches for updates in  
the background.  
Safety information  
Warning  
Manual search  
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle  
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger  
themselves and traffic, for example, due to  
the following actions:  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "All apps"  
3. "System settings"  
4. "Remote Software Upgrade"  
5. "Search for upgrades"  
▷
▷
▷
Establishing standby.  
Releasing the parking brake.  
6. Follow the instructions on the control dis-  
play.  
Opening and closing the doors or win-  
dows.  
▷
▷
Engaging selector lever position N.  
Using vehicle equipment.  
63  
BMW Remote Software Upgrade  
CONTROLS  
and after the installation has been successfully  
completed, the information about the version  
can be displayed on the control display.  
Download of an upgrade  
Automatic download  
If available, the data for a Remote Software  
Upgrade is automatically downloaded to the  
vehicle. No download consent is required.  
This information is also available in the Con-  
nectedDrive customer portal.  
Displaying information  
Via My BMW App  
Display in the vehicle:  
If an upgrade is available, information on the  
new software version is displayed in the My  
BMW App.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "All apps"  
3. "System settings"  
4. "Remote Software Upgrade"  
The data for the upgrade can then be down-  
loaded to a mobile device, for instance via an  
existing WLAN connection.  
5.  
▷
Display currently installed version:  
"Installed version:"  
Data can then be sent from the mobile device  
to the vehicle.  
▷
Display new available version:  
"Info on version"  
This transmission method accelerates the  
download of the data, for instance in areas  
with limited mobile network availability.  
6. Follow the instructions on the control dis-  
play.  
1. Download the upgrade using the My BMW  
App on your smartphone.  
Display in the ConnectedDrive customer portal:  
 
2. Follow the instructions in the My BMW App.  
3. Connect your smartphone to the vehicle via  
Bluetooth audio and Wi-Fi.  
Installing the upgrade  
Data for the upgrade is sent from the mo-  
bile device to the vehicle both while driving  
and when stopped. Depending on the size  
of the upgrade, it may be necessary to drive  
your vehicle to complete the data transfer.  
General information  
▷
Installation of the Remote Software Up-  
grade may result in the deletion of software  
changes, e.g., performance increases not  
made by the manufacturer of the vehicle.  
4. Follow the instructions on the control dis-  
play.  
▷
Modifications to the electrical system of the  
vehicle, for instance to control units, that  
have not been made by the vehicle manu-  
facturer can lead to an interruption of the  
installation.  
Additional information:  
Connecting mobile devices to the vehicle,  
see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertain-  
ment, Communication.  
▷
▷
▷
The installation does not occur until the  
consent was given.  
Information about the version  
The installation may take around 20 to  
30 minutes.  
General information  
The installation cannot be terminated.  
The information about the version contains a  
description of the updates included in the Re-  
mote Software Upgrade. During the download  
64  
BMW Remote Software Upgrade  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
The vehicle cannot be used during the in-  
stallation.  
▷
▷
Switch off the exterior lighting.  
Remove the devices connected to the diag-  
nostic socket.  
The vehicle can be exited during the instal-  
lation.  
Installing immediately  
The upgrade can be installed immediately if all  
prerequisites have been met.  
Prerequisites for the installation  
▷
Sufficiently charged battery.  
▷
The outside temperature is above  
14 ℉/-10 ℃.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "All apps"  
▷
The vehicle is parked in a horizontal posi-  
tion.  
3. "System settings"  
4. "Remote Software Upgrade"  
5. "Start upgrade now"  
▷
▷
▷
The hazard warning system is turned off.  
The selector lever position P is engaged.  
6. Follow the instructions on the control dis-  
play.  
The engine is turned off and sufficiently  
cooled down.  
If applicable, follow the notes for further pre-  
requisites on the control display.  
Installing with timer  
When the trip is completed, a timer can be  
used to install the upgrade automatically at  
a configured time such as during the night.  
A later installation may make sense to meet  
functional requirements, e.g., a sufficiently  
cooled down engine.  
Your vehicle can establish some prerequisites  
automatically. Follow the instructions on the  
control display.  
If the prerequisites are not met such as a suffi-  
ciently charged battery, the upgrade will not be  
offered for installation.  
1.  
Apps menu  
Pay attention to an offer for installation, e.g.,  
after longer trips.  
2. "All apps"  
3. "System settings"  
Preparing the vehicle  
4. "Remote Software Upgrade"  
5. Select the desired settings.  
The installation starts automatically when:  
▷
Park the vehicle safely away from the public  
road.  
▷
Cellular network reception must be ensured  
so that a fault message can be sent to the  
vehicle manufacturer, for instance if the in-  
stallation is terminated.  
▷
All prerequisites for the installation have  
been established correctly.  
▷
All prerequisites continue to be met at the  
time of installation.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Close the windows.  
Close the glass sunroof.  
Close the trunk.  
The timer is turned off when the drive-ready  
state is turned on.  
Installing via the My BMW App  
Once all preparations are complete and all re-  
quirements are met, the upgrade installation  
can also be started using the My BMW App  
Remove energy consuming devices such as  
a mobile phone.  
▷
▷
Disconnect any trailer or load carrier.  
The vehicle key must be located in the vehi-  
cle for the consent for installation.  
65  
BMW Remote Software Upgrade  
CONTROLS  
when the vehicle is parked. The upgrade in-  
stallation can be started remotely.  
Validity of the Owner's Manual  
Follow instructions in the My BMW App.  
Production of the vehicle  
At the time of production at the plant, the  
printed Owner's Manual is the most current  
resource.  
Functional limitations  
During the upgrade, the majority of functions is  
temporarily unavailable, for instance:  
After a software update in the vehicle  
▷
▷
Hazard warning system.  
After a vehicle software update such as via Re-  
mote Software Upgrade the Integrated Own-  
er's Manual for the vehicle will contain the lat-  
est information.  
Central locking system and, if necessary,  
Comfort Access.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Parking lights.  
Horn.  
Alarm system.  
Emergency call.  
Power windows.  
Glass sunroof.  
Checking the fuel filler flap lock.  
Operate the tailgate or trunk lid.  
The driver's door can be locked and unlocked  
from the outside using the integrated key.  
After successful upgrade  
The vehicle can be used again immediately.  
Booked services such as Advanced Real Time  
Traffic Information or Remote Services are au-  
tomatically reactivated during the next trip.  
After an extended stationary period, charge  
the vehicle battery with an extended drive.  
Malfunction  
In the event of a malfunction, follow the in-  
structions on the control display or in the My  
BMW App.  
If the malfunction cannot be corrected, contact  
an authorized service center or another quali-  
fied service center or repair shop.  
66  
Personal settings  
CONTROLS  
Personal settings  
This personal data can be permanently de-  
leted using iDrive.  
Vehicle features and options  
This chapter describes model-specific equip-  
ment, systems, and functions that are currently  
available, or may become available in the fu-  
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.  
General information  
Depending on the equipment, the following  
data is deleted:  
▷
▷
▷
▷
BMW IDs or driver profiles.  
Stored radio stations.  
Stored shortcuts.  
Additional information:  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
Navigation, for instance stored destina-  
tions.  
Data protection  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Phone book.  
Data transfer  
Online data, e.g., favorites, cookies.  
Office data, for instance voice memos.  
Login accounts.  
Principle  
The vehicle offers different services, whose  
use requires a data transfer to BMW or a serv-  
ice provider.  
Digital key.  
Altogether, the deletion of the data can take  
up to 15 minutes. In addition, the vehicle is re-  
moved from the My BMW App and Connected-  
Drive customer portal so that remote functions  
can no longer be used.  
General information  
The data transfer can be deactivated for some  
services. When the data transfer is deacti-  
vated, the respective service cannot be used.  
Functional requirements  
Settings  
▷
Data can only be deleted while stationary.  
The data transfer can be configured in different  
stages or individually for separate services.  
▷
The vehicle key must be in the vehicle.  
Deleting data  
1.  
Apps menu  
The personal data in the vehicle will be deleted  
when the vehicle is reset to the factory set-  
tings.  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "System settings"  
4. "Data privacy"  
Additional information:  
5. Select the desired setting.  
Resetting vehicle data, refer to page 67.  
Deleting personal data in the vehicle  
Reset vehicle data  
Principle  
All individual settings can be reset to the fac-  
tory settings when the drive-ready state is  
Depending on the usage, the vehicle stores  
personal data such as stored radio stations.  
67  
Personal settings  
CONTROLS  
switched off. Data can only be deleted while  
the vehicle is stationary. The vehicle key must  
be in the vehicle.  
With driver recognition, a BMW ID or driver  
profile can be activated as soon as you unlock  
your vehicle. For this, a vehicle key or digital  
key must be linked with the BMW ID or driver  
profile. After unlocking, you can change the  
BMW ID or driver profile.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "System settings"  
4. "Reset vehicle data"  
5. "Reset vehicle data"  
If no BMW ID or driver profile is activated when  
the vehicle is unlocked, the vehicle loads the  
guest profile.  
If the synchronization of settings has been en-  
abled for a BMW ID in the vehicle, the personal  
settings are kept in the BMW Cloud.  
Functional requirements  
The vehicle must be stationary to create,  
change, delete, or edit a BMW ID.  
Logging in the vehicle with a BMW ID and  
synchronization with the BMW Cloud are only  
possible when the vehicle has cellular network  
reception.  
BMW ID/driver profiles  
Principle  
In ConnectedDrive countries, the BMW ID is  
the personal login for all relevant offers for the  
BMW brand. The BMW ID can be used in the  
vehicle to store and activate personal vehicle  
settings.  
Welcome window  
After unlocking the vehicle, a Welcome window  
is shown on the control display. The type of  
the welcome depends on the following prereq-  
uisites:  
In non-ConnectedDrive countries, the personal  
vehicle settings can be stored in driver profiles.  
▷
The vehicle does not have a stored BMW  
ID or driver profile:  
If a vehicle is used by several people, each per-  
son can use their own BMW ID in the vehicle. If  
a BMW ID is activated, the settings stored for it  
are applied to the vehicle.  
The welcome is neutral. An option to add a  
BMW ID or create a driver profile is offered.  
▷
The vehicle key or the digital key has not  
been assigned to a BMW ID or a driver pro-  
file:  
General information  
The welcome is neutral. The stored BMW  
IDs or the stored driver profiles are offered  
for selection. Additionally, it is possible to  
add a new BMW ID or create a new driver  
profile.  
The BMW ID must be registered once. A BMW  
ID can be registered via the My BMW App, in  
the ConnectedDrive Portal, or through an au-  
thorized service center.  
A driver profile is created in the vehicle.  
▷
A BMW ID or driver profile has been as-  
signed to the vehicle key or digital key:  
Many of the settings that are stored for a BMW  
ID in the vehicle can be synchronized with the  
BMW Cloud. This makes these settings availa-  
ble in any vehicle where the same BMW ID is  
used to log in.  
The welcome is personalized, the stored  
settings are activated. The BMW ID or the  
driver profile can be changed.  
As soon as the drive-ready state is turned on  
or the control display is tapped outside of the  
Welcome window, the welcome will be hidden.  
The vehicle can store three BMW IDs or three  
driver profiles.  
68  
Personal settings  
CONTROLS  
Adding the BMW ID  
My BMW app  
1.  
Tap the BMW ID icon or the personal  
image on the status bar.  
If a BMW ID has been added to a vehicle, the  
vehicle is automatically added to the My BMW  
App. This means that My BMW App functions  
can be used for this vehicle. To do so, the My  
BMW App must be used with the same BMW  
ID.  
2. "Add BMW ID"  
3. Scan the displayed QR code with your  
smartphone.  
4. Observe the instructions on your smart-  
phone.  
Alternatively, an authorized service center can  
add a vehicle to the My BMW App. In this case,  
the BMW ID must then be confirmed on the  
control display in the corresponding vehicle.  
▷
If you have installed the My BMW App  
on your smartphone and saved your  
BMW ID, the BMW ID is automatically  
transferred to the vehicle.  
In rare cases, the use of My BMW App func-  
tions for this vehicle may be restricted. More  
information is shown on the control display.  
▷
If you do not have a BMW ID yet, you a  
new BMW ID can be registered.  
5. Select the other settings you want to  
change, e.g., to configure driver recognition  
as desired.  
Creating a driver profile  
In countries where BMW ConnectedDrive is not  
available, driver profiles can be created.  
▷
To configure driver recognition, the cor-  
responding vehicle key or digital key  
must be detected in the vehicle.  
1.  
Tap the icon or personal picture in the  
status bar.  
2. "Add driver profile"  
Driver recognition can be set or changed in  
the settings at a later time.  
3. Enter the name for the driver profile.  
4. Select the desired setting:  
"Transfer settings"  
6. Change any additional settings as neces-  
sary.  
Alternatively, the BMW ID can be registered by  
an authorized service center and added to the  
vehicle. The BMW ID must then be confirmed  
on the control display in the corresponding ve-  
hicle.  
If the vehicle is in the guest profile, the set-  
tings of the guest profile will be applied.  
Primary user  
The primary user is the person who first adds  
their BMW ID to the vehicle and first adds the  
vehicle to their My BMW App. Alternatively, the  
primary user can be defined by an authorized  
service center.  
The vehicle is added to the user’s My BMW  
App.  
Confirming a BMW ID  
If the BMW ID was created by an authorized  
service center and added to the vehicle, you  
must then confirm the BMW ID in the vehicle:  
The primary user has access to the following  
settings, for example:  
▷
▷
Removing BMW IDs saved to the vehicle.  
1. Select the BMW ID.  
Transferring the primary user role to an-  
other BMW ID.  
2. Scan the QR code shown.  
▷
▷
Change vehicle-wide data protection set-  
tings.  
3. Follow the instructions on your smart-  
phone.  
Create the main digital key.  
69  
Personal settings  
CONTROLS  
Additional information:  
▷
▷
BMW ID, e.g., profile picture.  
BMW Digital Key, refer to page 86.  
Navigation, e.g., recent destinations, home  
address, or map settings.  
Automatic driver recognition  
If driver recognition has been established, au-  
tomatic activation of the BMW ID or driver pro-  
file is triggered by the following actions:  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Media, e.g., favorites or saved radio sta-  
tions.  
iDrive, e.g., main menu configuration, lan-  
guage, or units.  
▷
By unlocking the vehicle using the button  
on the assigned vehicle key.  
Personal Assistant, e.g., suggestions or ac-  
tivation word.  
▷
By unlocking the vehicle with a door handle.  
The assigned vehicle key or the assigned  
digital key must be carried with you.  
Exterior lighting, e.g., one-touch signaling  
and home lights.  
Settings from the following areas are only  
synchronized when you log in for the first time:  
▷
By automatic unlocking when approaching  
the vehicle. The assigned vehicle key or the  
assigned digital key must be carried with  
you. Depending on the country, it may not  
be possible to recognize the digital key.  
▷
Seating and climate comfort, e.g., driver’s  
seat position or temperature setting.  
▷
Data protection menu.  
If there are several vehicle keys or digital keys  
in the vicinity of the vehicle, activation of the  
BMW ID or driver profile is done according to  
the following priority:  
Selecting the BMW ID/driver profile  
If the BMW ID or driver profile could not be  
recognized when unlocking the vehicle, select  
the BMW ID or driver profile on the welcome  
window.  
▷
The key that unlocks the vehicle triggers  
the activation of the assigned BMW ID or  
the assigned driver profile.  
The BMW ID or driver profile can be changed  
at any time via iDrive:  
The guest profile is activated when the ve-  
hicle is unlocked using a key that is not as-  
signed to a BMW ID or driver profile.  
1.  
Tap the icon or personal picture in the  
status bar.  
▷
▷
If a vehicle key and a digital key are de-  
tected at the same time, the digital key trig-  
gers the activation of the assigned BMW ID  
or the assigned driver profile.  
2.  
▷
▷
"Change BMW ID"  
"Change driver profile"  
3. Select the BMW ID or driver profile.  
4. If necessary, enter the PIN.  
If another key is detected on the driver's  
door after activating the BMW ID or the  
driver profile, the BMW ID or the driver pro-  
file of the last key detected is activated.  
The BMW ID or the driver profile are activated,  
the stored settings are loaded.  
Guest profile  
The guest profile can be activated and  
changed by anyone.  
If no BMW ID and no driver profile are as-  
signed to this key, the guest profile is acti-  
vated.  
In the following cases the guest profile is auto-  
matically active:  
Setting synchronization  
If synchronization is switched on, settings from  
the following areas, for example, are continu-  
ously synchronized:  
70  
Personal settings  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
A BMW ID has not yet been added or a  
driver profile has not yet been created.  
the BMW Cloud, the BMW ID data stored in the  
BMW Cloud will be retained.  
No BMW ID or driver profile has been as-  
signed to the vehicle key or the digital key  
that was used to unlock the vehicle.  
If the vehicle is removed from the primary us-  
er’s My BMW App, it will also be removed from  
the My BMW App of the other users. The cor-  
responding BMW IDs are removed from the  
vehicle.  
The following limitations apply to the guest  
profile:  
If the vehicle is reset to factory settings, it is  
removed from each user’s My BMW App, and  
all BMW IDs are removed from the vehicle.  
▷
Certain functions are not available, e.g.,  
navigation functions or saving favorites.  
▷
▷
The guest profile cannot be renamed.  
It is not possible to assign a PIN to the  
guest profile.  
Transfer of the vehicle key  
A vehicle key that is assigned to a BMW ID or  
a driver profile can be used to view or change  
the stored personal settings.  
▷
▷
It is not possible to assign driver detection  
to the guest profile.  
In ConnectedDrive countries, the synchroni-  
zation with the BMW Cloud is not possible.  
Before a vehicle key is transferred to other per-  
sons, any assigned driver detection should be  
canceled. Changes to the driver detection can  
be made in the settings of the BMW ID or the  
driver profile.  
The guest profile is selected on the Welcome  
screen or via iDrive:  
1.  
Tap the icon or personal picture in the  
status bar.  
The BMW Digital Key provides the option to  
transfer a digital key to permit other persons  
the use of your own vehicle.  
2.  
▷
▷
"Change BMW ID"  
"Change driver profile"  
Additional information:  
3. "Continue as guest"  
BMW Digital Key, refer to page 86.  
Deleting the BMW ID/driver profile  
Settings  
1.  
Tap the icon or personal picture in the  
status bar.  
General information  
Settings added when adding a BMW ID or cre-  
ating a driver profile can be changed.  
2.  
▷
▷
"Manage BMW IDs"  
"Change driver profile"  
3.  
Tap the icon of the desired BMW ID or  
the desired driver profile.  
1.  
Tap the icon or personal picture in the  
status bar.  
Removing a BMW ID from the vehicle causes  
the vehicle to be removed from the My BMW  
App. If the BMW ID has been synchronized  
with the BMW Cloud, the data stored in the  
BMW Cloud is retained after the BMW ID is  
deleted. If the currently active BMW ID is re-  
moved, the guest profile is activated.  
2. "Settings"  
The following settings are available for the  
BMW ID:  
▷
▷
▷
▷
The type of driver detection.  
The profile picture.  
The synchronization with the BMW Cloud.  
The personal salutation.  
Removing a vehicle from the My BMW App  
removes the corresponding BMW ID from the  
vehicle. If the BMW ID was synchronized with  
71  
Personal settings  
CONTROLS  
The following settings are available for the  
driver profile:  
▷
▷
▷
The type of driver detection.  
The profile picture.  
The profile name.  
Selecting a profile picture  
The profile picture can be selected from the  
predefined profile pictures:  
1.  
Tap the icon or personal picture in the  
status bar.  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Manage profile picture"  
4. "Select profile picture"  
The personal profile picture for a BMW ID can  
be adopted from the profile in the My BMW  
App. This requires that the synchronization  
with the BMW Cloud is activated in the set-  
tings. After transferring the profile picture from  
the My BMW App, you can only select one of  
the predefined images if the profile picture in  
the My BMW App is deleted or synchronization  
is deactivated.  
System limits  
A clear driver detection via the vehicle key or  
the digital key may not always be possible in  
the following cases, for example:  
▷
The driver changes, but the vehicle is not  
locked and unlocked.  
▷
When multiple vehicle keys or multiple digi-  
tal keys with an assigned BMW ID or driver  
profile are located in the outer area on the  
driver's side of the vehicle.  
▷
When the vehicle was unlocked via the My  
BMW App.  
The use of personal settings that are stored for  
a BMW ID in other vehicles is subject to techni-  
cal limitations. For example, settings may be  
stored for a system that is not available, or  
available in a non-compatible version, in other  
vehicles.  
72  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
Opening and closing  
diately seek medical help if there is any sus-  
picion that a battery or button cell battery has  
been swallowed or is located in any part of  
the body.  
Vehicle features and options  
This chapter describes model-specific equip-  
ment, systems, and functions that are currently  
available, or may become available in the fu-  
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.  
Overview  
Additional information:  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
Vehicle key  
General information  
Two vehicle keys are included in the scope of  
delivery, each containing an integrated key.  
Buttons on the vehicle key.  
Each vehicle key contains a replaceable bat-  
tery.  
Icon  
Meaning  
Depending on the equipment and national-  
market version, various settings are possible  
for the button functions.  
Unlock.  
A BMW ID or a driver profile with personal set-  
tings can be assigned to a vehicle key.  
Lock.  
Stationary climate control, refer to  
page 301.  
To provide information on maintenance rec-  
ommendations, the service data is stored in  
the vehicle key.  
Open the cargo area.  
To prevent possible locking in of the vehicle  
key, take the vehicle key with you when exiting  
the vehicle.  
Panic mode.  
Pathway lighting, refer to page 171.  
Safety information  
Additional vehicle keys  
Additional vehicle keys are available from an  
authorized service center or another qualified  
service center or repair shop.  
Warning  
The vehicle key has a button cell battery.  
Batteries or button cell batteries can be swal-  
lowed and lead to serious or fatal injuries  
within two hours, for example due to internal  
burns or chemical burns. There is a risk of  
injury or danger to life. Keep the vehicle key  
and batteries out of reach of children. Imme-  
73  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
3. Remove the battery from the battery hous-  
Loss of vehicle keys  
A lost vehicle key can be disabled and re-  
placed by an authorized service center or an-  
other qualified service center or repair shop.  
ing.  
If the lost vehicle key has an assigned BMW ID  
or driver profile, the connection to this vehicle  
key must be deleted. A new vehicle key can  
then be assigned to the BMW ID or driver pro-  
file.  
Replacing the battery  
4. Insert a CR2032 3V battery with the posi-  
tive side facing down.  
NOTICE  
5. Insert the battery housing into the vehicle  
key.  
Improper batteries in a battery-operated de-  
vice can damage the device. There is a risk  
of property damage. Always replace the dis-  
charged battery with a battery with the same  
voltage, the same size and the same specifi-  
cation.  
1. Press and hold the button, arrow 1, and  
push the cover, arrow 2, forward and re-  
move it from the side.  
6. Insert the cover into the vehicle key.  
Have old batteries disposed of by an  
authorized service center or another  
qualified service center or repair shop,  
or take them to a collection point.  
Integrated key  
2. Remove the battery housing from the vehi-  
cle key to the side.  
General information  
The vehicle can be locked and unlocked man-  
ually using the integrated key.  
Depending on the national-market version, the  
integrated key will fit in the glove compart-  
ment.  
74  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
Safety information  
Unlocking the vehicle manually  
1. Pull and hold the driver's door handle out-  
ward with one hand.  
Warning  
For some national-market versions, unlock-  
ing from the inside is only possible with par-  
ticular knowledge.  
If persons or animals spend a lengthy time  
in the vehicle and are thereby exposed to ex-  
treme temperatures, there is a risk of injury  
or danger to life. Do not lock the vehicle from  
the outside when there are people or animals  
in it. Do not leave babies, toddlers or animals  
alone in the vehicle.  
2. Guide one finger of your other hand from  
the back under the cover cap and push the  
cover cap out.  
Removing the integrated key  
1. Press and hold the button, arrow 1, and  
push the cover, arrow 2, forward and re-  
move it from the side.  
Use the thumb for counter support to pre-  
vent the cover cap from falling out of the  
door handle.  
3. Remove the cover cap.  
2. Slide out the integrated key at the open  
side of the vehicle key.  
4. Unlock the door lock with the integrated key  
by turning it counterclockwise.  
3. Remove the integrated key from the vehicle  
key.  
5. Open the driver's door.  
6. Press the central locking button to unlock  
the other doors.  
75  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
With the vehicle de-energized: pull the door  
opener of the other doors from the inside.  
In this case, use the vehicle key emergency  
detection to switch off the alarm.  
If the vehicle is locked with the integrated key  
via the door lock, the alarm system will not be  
activated.  
Locking the vehicle manually  
General information  
To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehicle,  
do not place the vehicle key in the vehicle.  
Emergency detection of the vehicle  
key  
Overview  
It is not possible to switch on the drive-ready  
state if the vehicle key has not been detected.  
Lock button for manual locking of the doors.  
Proceed as follows in this case:  
1. Hold the rear of the vehicle key against the  
mark on the steering column. Pay attention  
to the display in the instrument cluster.  
Locking the vehicle  
1. Close all doors.  
2. Enter the vehicle on the front passenger's  
side and close the front passenger door.  
2.  
▷
If the vehicle key is detected:  
Turn on drive-ready state within 10 sec-  
onds.  
3. Press the central locking button to unlock  
all doors.  
▷
If the vehicle key is not detected:  
If vehicle is de-energized: Press down the  
lock buttons on all doors except the front  
passenger door.  
Slightly change the position of the vehi-  
cle key and repeat the procedure.  
4. Exit the vehicle through the front passenger  
door.  
Malfunction  
A Check Control message is displayed where  
applicable.  
5. Press down the lock button on the front  
passenger door and close the front pass-  
enger door.  
Vehicle key detection by the vehicle may mal-  
function under the following circumstances:  
6. Pull the door handles to make sure they are  
locked. If necessary, repeat the process.  
▷
▷
The battery of the vehicle key is discharged.  
Fault of the radio link from transmission  
towers or other equipment with high trans-  
mitting power.  
Alarm system  
If the vehicle is unlocked with the integrated  
key via the door lock, the activated alarm sys-  
tem will be triggered when the door is opened.  
▷
Shielding of the vehicle key due to metal  
objects.  
76  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
Do not transport the vehicle key together  
with metal objects.  
in it. Do not leave babies, toddlers or animals  
alone in the vehicle.  
▷
Fault of the radio link from mobile phones  
or other electronic devices in direct proxim-  
ity to the vehicle key.  
Warning  
Do not carry the vehicle key in close prox-  
imity to other electronic devices.  
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle  
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger  
themselves and traffic, for example, due to  
the following actions:  
▷
▷
Fault of radio transmission by a charging  
process of mobile devices, for instance  
charging of a mobile phone.  
▷
▷
▷
Establishing standby.  
The vehicle key is located in direct proximity  
of the wireless charging tray.  
Releasing the parking brake.  
Opening and closing the doors or win-  
dows.  
Place the vehicle key in a different location.  
In the case of interference, the vehicle can also  
be unlocked and locked from the outside with  
the integrated key. Use the Emergency detec-  
tion of the vehicle key to turn on drive-ready  
state.  
▷
▷
Engaging selector lever position N.  
Using vehicle equipment.  
There is a risk of accident, injury, and prop-  
erty damage. Do not leave children or ani-  
mals unattended in the vehicle. Take the ve-  
hicle key with you when exiting and lock the  
vehicle.  
Access to vehicle interior  
Safety information  
Warning  
Actions during unlocking  
Depending on the settings, the following func-  
tions are performed when unlocking the vehi-  
cle:  
People or animals in the vehicle can lock the  
doors from the inside and lock themselves in.  
In this case, the vehicle cannot be opened  
from the outside. There is a risk of injury.  
Take the vehicle key with you so that the ve-  
hicle can be opened from the outside.  
▷
Only the driver's door and the fuel filler flap  
will be unlocked or all access to the vehicle  
will be unlocked.  
▷
▷
The unlocking of the vehicle can be con-  
firmed with a light signal or a sound signal.  
The welcome light can be turned on when  
the vehicle is being unlocked.  
Warning  
In addition, the following functions are exe-  
cuted:  
For some national-market versions, unlock-  
ing from the inside is only possible with par-  
ticular knowledge.  
▷
If a BMW ID or a driver profile was assigned  
to the vehicle key, this BMW ID or driver  
profile will be activated.  
If persons or animals spend a lengthy time  
in the vehicle and are thereby exposed to ex-  
treme temperatures, there is a risk of injury  
or danger to life. Do not lock the vehicle from  
the outside when there are people or animals  
▷
▷
The interior lights are switched on, unless  
they were manually switched off.  
Depending on vehicle equipment, folded-in  
exterior mirrors are folded out.  
77  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
If the exterior mirrors were folded in using  
the button inside the vehicle, they will not  
fold out when the vehicle is unlocked.  
If only the driver's door and fuel filler flap have  
been unlocked due to the settings in place,  
press the button on the vehicle key again to  
unlock the other vehicle access points.  
▷
▷
Anti-theft protection is switched off.  
The alarm system is switched off.  
The lighting functions may depend on the am-  
bient brightness.  
Additional information:  
▷
▷
▷
Settings, refer to page 91.  
Locking the vehicle  
1. Close the driver's door.  
Welcome lights, refer to page 170.  
BMW ID/driver profiles, refer to page 68.  
2.  
Press the button on the vehicle key.  
Actions during locking  
Depending on the settings, the following func-  
tions are performed when locking the vehicle:  
All vehicle access points are locked.  
On the door handle  
Principle  
▷
The locking of the vehicle can be confirmed  
with a light signal or a sound signal.  
▷
Depending on vehicle equipment, the exte-  
rior mirrors can be folded in automatically  
when locking. The exterior mirrors are not  
folded in when the hazard warning flashers  
are switched on.  
The vehicle can be accessed without operating  
the vehicle key.  
The vehicle key is automatically detected near  
the vehicle.  
The following functions are executed:  
General information  
The function is available with Comfort Access.  
▷
All doors, the cargo area, and the fuel filler  
flap are locked.  
Depending on national-market version, the ve-  
hicle can also be unlocked and locked via the  
door handle using a compatible smartphone  
and digital key.  
▷
Anti-theft protection is switched on. This  
prevents the doors from being unlocked us-  
ing the lock buttons or the door openers.  
▷
The alarm system is switched on.  
Additional information:  
If the drive-ready state is still turned on when  
you lock the vehicle, the vehicle horn will honk  
twice. In this case, drive-ready state must be  
turned off using the Start/Stop button.  
BMW Digital Key, refer to page 86.  
Functional requirements  
▷
Carry the vehicle key with you, e.g., in your  
pants pocket.  
Additional information:  
Settings, refer to page 91.  
▷
Bluetooth must be activated on the smart-  
phone to unlock and lock using the digital  
key.  
With the vehicle key  
▷
▷
To lock the vehicle, the vehicle key must be  
outside of the vehicle near the doors.  
Unlocking the vehicle  
Press the button on the vehicle key.  
After locking, approx. 2 seconds must  
elapse before unlocking is possible.  
78  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
When the driver walks away from the unlocked  
vehicle with the vehicle key, the vehicle will be  
locked.  
Unlock vehicle  
General information  
The function is available with Comfort Access.  
The vehicle will be unlocked when an author-  
ized vehicle key is detected in the unlocking  
zone.  
The unlocking zone is located within a radius  
of approx. 5 ft/1.50 m around the vehicle.  
Fully grasp the handle of a front door.  
The vehicle will be locked when the vehicle key  
leaves the locking zone.  
Locking the vehicle  
1. Close the driver's door.  
The locking zone is located within a radius of  
approx. 9 ft/2 m around the vehicle.  
2. With your finger, touch the grooved surface  
on a closed front door handle for approx.  
1 second without gripping the door handle.  
Depending on the national-market version,  
touchless unlocking and locking is also possi-  
ble for compatible smartphones with a digital  
key. Enable Bluetooth on your smartphone to  
do so.  
If the vehicle key is located in the unlocking  
zone for an extended period of time without  
movement, the vehicle will be locked automati-  
cally.  
If someone is detected on a seat while locking  
the vehicle, the following restrictions apply:  
▷
The vehicle will be locked but not secured  
against theft.  
Malfunction  
Wet or snowy conditions may disrupt the lock-  
ing request detection on the door handles.  
▷
The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.  
Additional information:  
In the case of a malfunction, unlock and lock  
the vehicle using the buttons of the vehicle key  
or use the integrated key.  
BMW Digital Key, refer to page 86.  
Actions during unlocking  
If the settings specify that only the driver's  
door and the fuel filler flap will be unlocked,  
note the following:  
Touchless unlocking/locking of the  
vehicle  
The driver's door and fuel filler flap will only  
unlock when the driver is within the driver's  
door unlocking zone.  
Principle  
When the driver approaches the locked vehicle  
with the vehicle key, the vehicle is unlocked.  
Settings, refer to page 91.  
79  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
If the Key Card is not detected, slightly change  
the position of the Key Card and repeat the  
procedure.  
Functional requirements  
▷
Carry the vehicle key with you, e.g., in your  
pants pocket.  
▷
Automatic unlocking and locking must be  
activated in the settings.  
With the BMW Digital Key  
▷
▷
The drive-ready state must be turned off.  
Principle  
If the vehicle has been in the idle state for  
several days, contactless unlocking/locking  
will only be available after the vehicle has  
been driven.  
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-  
market version, a digital key can be installed  
on a compatible smartphone and used to un-  
lock and lock the vehicle.  
Additional information:  
Additional information:  
Settings, refer to page 91.  
BMW Digital Key, refer to page 86.  
With the Key Card  
Locking/unlocking the vehicle  
Principle  
The Key Card is a chip card on which the digi-  
tal key is installed. The Key Card can be used  
to unlock and lock the vehicle.  
Additional information:  
Key Card, refer to page 85.  
General information  
The Key Card is available with Comfort Access.  
Hold the smartphone NFC antenna directly at  
the center of the driver's door handle. The po-  
sition of the near field communication antenna  
depends on the smartphone model.  
Locking/unlocking the vehicle  
When locking the vehicle with the smartphone,  
make sure that all doors and the cargo area  
are closed.  
Frequently Asked Questions  
What precautions can be taken to be able to  
open a vehicle, despite accidentally locking in  
the vehicle key?  
Hold the activated Key Card directly at the cen-  
ter of the driver's door handle.  
▷
The app’s remote services offer the option  
to lock and unlock a vehicle.  
When locking the vehicle with the Key Card,  
make sure that all doors and the cargo area  
are closed.  
80  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
This requires an active BMW Connected-  
Drive contract, and the app must be instal-  
led on a smartphone.  
sary, remove foreign objects from the bumper  
and the lower tailgate before operating the  
lower tailgate.  
▷
Unlocking the vehicle can be requested via  
the BMW ConnectedDrive Call Center.  
Warning  
An active BMW ConnectedDrive contract is  
required.  
Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit the  
windows and heating elements while driving.  
There is a risk of injury or risk of property  
damage. Cover the edges and ensure that  
pointed objects do not hit the windows.  
Access to the cargo area  
General information  
The cargo area will be opened to the config-  
ured opening height.  
NOTICE  
Manual operation of the tailgate in the wrong  
sequence can damage the tailgate. There is  
a risk of property damage. Close the lower  
tailgate first before closing the upper tailgate  
manually.  
The tailgate consists of the upper and the  
lower tailgate. The lower tailgate opens down-  
ward to make loading the cargo area easier.  
The opened lower tailgate can be loaded with  
up to 250 kg.  
Safety information  
With the vehicle key  
General information  
Warning  
To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehicle,  
do not place the vehicle key in the cargo area.  
Body parts can be jammed when operating  
the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make  
sure that the travel path of the tailgate is  
clear during opening and closing.  
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-  
market version, the following settings can be  
changed:  
▷
▷
▷
Unlocking the cargo area with the vehicle  
key also unlocks the doors.  
Warning  
Before unlocking the cargo area with the  
vehicle key, first unlock the vehicle.  
The tailgate swings back and up when it  
opens. There is a risk of injury or risk of dam-  
age to property. Make sure that the travel  
path of the tailgate is clear during opening  
and closing.  
Only the upper tailgate can be opened, or  
the upper and lower tailgates together, us-  
ing the vehicle key.  
▷
The tailgate can be operated using  
the button on the vehicle key.  
NOTICE  
Foreign objects such as sand or icing be-  
tween the bumper and tailgate may cause  
damage when operating the lower tailgate.  
There is a risk of property damage. If neces-  
Functional requirements  
To open the cargo area with the vehicle key,  
the trailer power socket must not be occupied.  
81  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
Selector lever position P must be engaged to  
open the cargo area with the vehicle key.  
Opening the upper tailgate  
You must enable the setting for opening with  
the vehicle key.  
Additional information:  
Settings, refer to page 91.  
Opening the cargo area  
▷
Press and hold the button on the  
vehicle key for approx. 1 second.  
▷
▷
Unlock the vehicle and then press the but-  
ton on the cargo area.  
▷
Press and hold the button on the  
vehicle key for approx. 1 second.  
With Comfort Access: carry the vehicle key  
with you and press the button on the cargo  
area.  
If necessary, the lower tailgate will also open.  
On the cargo area  
Locked doors are not unlocked.  
Opening the lower tailgate  
The upper tailgate must be open.  
General information  
With Comfort Access, the cargo area can be  
accessed without activating the vehicle key.  
Press the button on the lower tailgate.  
The key is automatically detected near the ve-  
hicle.  
Depending on the national-market version,  
compatible smartphones with a digital key are  
also detected automatically. In this case, the  
cargo area can be opened with a smartphone.  
Closing the upper tailgate  
Additional information:  
BMW Digital Key, refer to page 86.  
Functional prerequisites  
▷
Carry the vehicle key with you, e.g., in your  
pants pocket.  
▷
▷
Press the button on the inside of the  
upper tailgate.  
▷
Bluetooth must be activated on the smart-  
phone to detect the digital key.  
Press the button on the inside of the  
upper tailgate.  
The vehicle is locked after closing  
the cargo area. To do so, the driver's door  
must be closed and the vehicle key must be  
outside of the vehicle near the cargo area.  
82  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
The lower tailgate will be closed automatically  
with the upper tailgate.  
▷
▷
When the vehicle starts moving.  
By pressing the button on the outside of  
the cargo area. Pressing it again closes the  
cargo area again.  
Closing the lower tailgate  
Make sure that there is no cargo on the lower  
tailgate.  
▷
▷
By pressing the button on the inside of the  
cargo area. Pressing it again closes the  
cargo area again.  
Press the button on the lower tailgate.  
By pressing the button on the vehicle key.  
Pressing the button again continues the  
opening process.  
Inside the vehicle  
▷
By pressing or pulling the button in the  
driver's door. Pressing again continues the  
opening procedure.  
Functional prerequisites  
To open the trunk using the button inside the  
vehicle, the trailer power socket must not be  
occupied.  
Interruption of the closing procedure  
The closing procedure is interrupted in the fol-  
lowing situations:  
The vehicle key or digital key must be located  
within the vehicle in order to close the trunk  
using the button inside the vehicle.  
▷
If the vehicle drives off with a jerky move-  
ment.  
When the vehicle is locked, selector lever posi-  
tion P must be engaged before the trunk lid  
can be opened using the button inside the ve-  
hicle.  
▷
By pressing the button on the outside of  
the cargo area. Pressing it again opens the  
cargo area again.  
▷
▷
▷
By pressing the button on the inside of  
the cargo area. Pressing it again opens the  
cargo area again.  
Opening the trunk  
Press the button in the driver's door.  
By pressing the button on the vehicle key.  
Pressing it again opens the cargo area  
again.  
If necessary, the lower tailgate will also  
open.  
By releasing the button in the driver's door.  
Pulling again and holding continues the  
closing motion.  
Closing the cargo area  
Pull and hold the button in the driver's  
door.  
Opening and closing the cargo area  
contactlessly  
The lower tailgate will be closed automatically  
with the upper tailgate.  
An acoustic signal sounds before the trunk is  
closed.  
Principle  
You can open the cargo area contactlessly  
when carrying the vehicle key on your person.  
With automatic tailgate activation, the cargo  
area can also be closed contactlessly.  
Interruption of the opening  
procedure  
The opening procedure is interrupted in the  
following situations:  
83  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
Sensors detect specific foot movements near  
the center of the rear area, and the cargo area  
opens or closes.  
Opening the cargo area  
1. Stand in the middle behind the vehicle at  
approx. one arm's length away from the  
rear of the vehicle.  
General information  
Function availability depends on vehicle equip-  
ment and national-market version.  
2. Wave a foot under the vehicle in the driv-  
ing direction and immediately pull it back.  
With these movements, the leg must pass  
through the ranges of both sensors.  
If the vehicle key is within the sensor range, the  
cargo area may open or close inadvertently if  
you unintentionally move your foot or if a foot  
movement is detected.  
The sensor has an approximate range of  
5 ft/1.50 m extending from the rear area.  
If contactless opening is used for the cargo  
area, the locked doors will not be unlocked.  
Additional information:  
BMW Digital Key, refer to page 86.  
Before the cargo area opens, the hazard warn-  
ing system flashes.  
Safety information  
Moving a foot again will stop the opening proc-  
cedure. The subsequent foot movement will  
close the cargo area again.  
Warning  
With hands-free opening of the cargo area,  
there may be unintentional contact with vehi-  
cle parts, e.g., hot exhaust system. There is  
a risk of injury. When moving your foot, make  
sure you have a firm stance and do not touch  
the vehicle.  
Closing the cargo area  
Perform the foot movement for opening the  
cargo area.  
The hazard warning system flashes and an  
acoustic signal sounds.  
Moving a foot again will stop the closing proc-  
ess. The subsequent foot movement will open  
the cargo area again.  
Functional requirements  
▷
To close the cargo area contactlessly, the  
automatic tailgate must be installed.  
System limits  
The detection of the foot movement may be  
limited due to the following external conditions:  
▷
▷
Selector lever position P must be engaged.  
Contactless opening and closing of the  
trunk must be activated in the settings.  
▷
▷
Ice, snow or slush on the rear of the vehicle.  
Dirt or road salt on the rear of the vehicle.  
▷
Bluetooth must be activated on the smart-  
phone to open and close the cargo area  
contactlessly using the Digital Key.  
Movement in range of the sensors may cause  
the cargo area to open unintentionally, e.g.,  
due to running water when cleaning the vehi-  
cle or from heavy rainfall, or due to the mov-  
ing brushes in a car wash. To prevent such  
Depending on vehicle equipment:  
No trailer hitches should be mounted.  
▷
Additional information:  
Settings, refer to page 91.  
84  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
unintended opening of the cargo area in such  
cases, keep the vehicle key at a sufficient dis-  
tance from the rear of the vehicle.  
Safety information  
NOTICE  
Depending on vehicle equipment: Objects  
mounted on a trailer hitch cannot be detected  
if the trailer power socket is not plugged in.  
If the Key Card and a mobile device are in the  
wireless charging tray at the same time, the  
Key Card could become damaged. There is  
a risk of property damage. Do not place the  
Key Card in the wireless charging tray at the  
same time as a mobile device.  
Malfunction  
Warning  
With manual operation of a blocked tailgate,  
it can release itself unexpectedly from the  
blocking. There is a risk of injury or risk of  
damage to property. Do not operate the tail-  
gate manually if it is blocked. Have the vehi-  
cle checked by an authorized service center  
or another qualified service center or repair  
shop.  
Activating/deactivating Key Card in  
the vehicle  
General information  
When the BMW Digital Key is activated for the  
vehicle, a digital key can be used instead of the  
vehicle key.  
A deactivated Key Card remains in the list of  
paired digital keys.  
In the event of an electrical malfunction in the  
automatic tailgate, operate the unlocked tail-  
gate slowly with a smooth motion by hand.  
Functional requirement  
A vehicle key must be located in the vehicle to  
activate and deactivate the Key Card.  
To close the tailgate fully, press down lightly  
only. Closing occurs automatically.  
Activating Key Card  
Tray with thermoelectric cooling and heating  
system for a cup holder:  
Key Card  
Principle  
The Key Card allows the vehicle to be unlocked  
and locked, as well as started.  
General information  
Key Card availability depends on vehicle equip-  
ment and national-market version.  
A digital key that has already been paired with  
the vehicle is installed on the Key Card. The  
digital key must be activated via iDrive.  
Tray without thermoelectric cooling and heat-  
ing system for a cup holder:  
Before leaving the vehicle, deactivate the Key  
Card or take the Key Card with you because  
the active Key Card can be used to start the  
vehicle. Always take the vehicle key with you to  
a service appointment.  
85  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
1. Open the cover of the smartphone tray.  
Tray without thermoelectric cooling and heat-  
ing system for a cup holder:  
2. Place Key Card in the center of the smart-  
phone tray.  
3. Follow instructions on the control display.  
Deactivating Key Card  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Doors and windows"  
4. "Digital Key"  
1. Open the cover of the smartphone tray.  
5. "Key Card"  
2. Place activated Key Card in the center of  
the smartphone tray.  
6. "Deactivate Key Card"  
A deactivated Key Card remains in the list of  
paired digital keys.  
3. Press the Start/Stop button.  
After drive-ready state is switched on, the Key  
Card can be removed from the tray.  
Unlocking and locking the vehicle  
The vehicle can be unlocked and locked with  
the activated Key Card.  
Malfunction  
The vehicle may not be able to detect the Key  
Card if there are objects between the smart-  
phone tray and the Key Card, e.g., a wallet or  
smartphone case.  
Additional information:  
Access to the vehicle interior, refer to page 77.  
Turning on the drive-ready state  
Tray with thermoelectric cooling and heating  
system for a cup holder:  
BMW Digital Key  
Principle  
BMW Digital Key lets you lock and unlock and  
start your vehicle using a digital key.  
86  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
General information  
BMW Digital Key availability and functionality  
depend on vehicle equipment and national-  
market version.  
Enabling the main digital key  
Vehicle owner's smartphone is enabled as a  
main digital key in the vehicle. The vehicle  
owner must prove his authorization for the ve-  
hicle for this purpose.  
BMW Digital Key can be used with a compat-  
ible smartphone or other compatible mobile  
devices.  
Proof of authorization can be started via the  
My BMW App or using the activation code in  
the corresponding smartphone function, e.g.,  
the Wallet app.  
To unlock and start a vehicle with a compatible  
smartphone, this function must be offered by  
the smartphone manufacturer. The My BMW  
app can be used to check if the smartphone  
and vehicle are compatible and which func-  
tions are supported.  
Both vehicle keys must be located in the vehi-  
cle to be enabled.  
Follow the activation instructions in the Digital  
Key menu, on the app, or on the control dis-  
play.  
A BMW ID or a driver profile with individual  
settings can be assigned to a digital key.  
Sharing digital keys  
When using a smartphone as a digital key, it is  
helpful to carry the deactivated Key Card in the  
vehicle. In situations where the vehicle is to be  
given to another person, they can be given the  
Key Card instead of the smartphone. To do so,  
the Key Card must be activated via iDrive.  
General information  
Digital Key allows the sharing of digital keys  
with other people. This option is available via  
the smartphone that is enabled as main digital  
key. This function must be supported by the  
smartphone.  
Always take the vehicle key with you to a serv-  
ice appointment.  
Additional information:  
Forwarding authorization  
To share the digital key, select the correspond-  
ing function on the smartphone, for instance in  
the Wallet app.  
▷
▷
▷
BMW ID/driver profiles, refer to page 68.  
Key Card, refer to page 85.  
 
As soon as a digital key is shared with another  
person, the person will receive an invitation.  
When the invitation is accepted, the digital key  
on the recipient's smartphone will be activated.  
Functional requirements  
▷
▷
▷
The smartphone is compatible with BMW  
Digital Key  
The vehicle is linked with the Connected-  
Drive account of the vehicle owner.  
Limiting the range of functions  
Certain functions of the digital key can be lim-  
ited before handing it over. For instance, if the  
digital key is passed on to a novice driver, the  
switch-off for driving stability control systems  
can be disabled and the engine power can  
be reduced. For more information, refer to the  
ConnectedDrive Portal and My BMW app.  
The rechargeable battery of the smart-  
phone has a sufficient charge. The neces-  
sary minimum charge of the rechargeable  
battery depends on the smartphone.  
▷
Bluetooth must be activated on the smart-  
phone for contactless unlocking and locking  
using the digital key.  
87  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
3. "Doors and windows"  
Authentication  
4. "Digital Key"  
Depending on the recipient’s smartphone  
model, an authentication may be required for  
security and safety reasons.  
5. If necessary, select the digital key.  
6. Delete the Digital Key.  
An authorized vehicle key, the main digital key  
or another method may be used for authenti-  
cation. Follow the corresponding instructions  
on the smartphone or the control display.  
Resetting the function  
To reset the BMW Digital Key function, an au-  
thorized vehicle key must be located in the ve-  
hicle.  
Deleting digital keys  
When resetting the BMW Digital Key function,  
all digital keys including the main digital key  
will be deleted. The Key Card's digital key is  
retained and deactivated.  
General information  
Deleted digital keys will be removed from the  
list of enabled digital keys.  
After the reset, the vehicle can no longer be  
unlocked, locked or started with a digital key.  
Deleted digital keys cannot be restored.  
The main digital key must be enabled again to  
be able to use BMW Digital Key again.  
Deleting the main digital key  
The main digital key can be deleted from the  
smartphone or via iDrive.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
The deletion of the main digital key is com-  
pleted immediately.  
3. "Doors and windows"  
4. "Digital Key"  
Deleting a shared key  
5. "Reset function"  
Shared keys can be deleted using the smart-  
phone with the master Digital Key, using the  
smartphone with the shared key to be deleted,  
or via iDrive.  
Unlocking and locking the vehicle  
The vehicle can be unlocked and locked as fol-  
lows:  
The deletion via the smartphone using the  
main digital key will not be performed until the  
vehicle is used with a key other than the key to  
be deleted.  
▷
▷
Using the door handle.  
With Comfort Access: depending on the na-  
tional-market version, the vehicle can be  
locked and unlocked with no-touch activa-  
tion.  
If the smartphone associated with a shared  
key or iDrive is used to delete a shared key, it  
will be deleted immediately.  
BMW Digital Key availability and function-  
ality depend on vehicle equipment and na-  
tional-market version.  
Deletion via iDrive  
Additional information:  
To delete a digital key via iDrive, there must be  
an authorized vehicle key in the vehicle, or the  
master Digital Key must be in the smartphone  
tray.  
Access to the vehicle interior, refer to page 77.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
88  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
Turning on the drive-ready state  
Sale of the smartphone  
Delete all digital keys on the smartphone prior  
to selling the smartphone. This ensures that  
the smartphone can no longer be used for the  
vehicle.  
Using the smartphone tray  
Tray with thermoelectric cooling and heating  
system for a cup holder:  
Changing smartphones  
To use a new smartphone as a master Digital  
Key, activate the new smartphone according to  
the instructions for the master Digital Key. The  
previous master key is deleted when the new  
smartphone is activated.  
Sale of the vehicle  
Prior to selling a vehicle, reset the Digital  
Key function or remove the vehicle from the  
ConnectedDrive account of the current vehicle  
owner.  
Tray without thermoelectric cooling and heat-  
ing system for a cup holder:  
When the vehicle is removed from the Con-  
nectedDrive account, all digital keys for the ve-  
hicle will be deleted. The Key Card's digital key  
is retained and deactivated.  
System limits  
The interior motion sensor and tilt alarm sen-  
sor of the alarm system cannot be switched off  
with a digital key.  
1. Open the cover of the smartphone tray.  
2. Place smartphone in the center of the  
smartphone tray.  
Additional information:  
Alarm system, refer to page 93.  
Ensure that the display is facing up.  
3. Close the cover of the smartphone tray.  
Malfunction  
Digital key recognition by the vehicle may mal-  
function under the following circumstances:  
4. Press the Start/Stop button to turn on  
drive-ready state.  
▷
The smartphone is shielded from the sen-  
sors in the vehicle by a smartphone cover  
that is not suitable.  
Inside the vehicle  
With Comfort Access, it is sufficient, depending  
on the country, for the smartphone with Blue-  
tooth enabled to be located inside the vehicle.  
Press the Start/Stop button to turn on drive-  
ready state.  
▷
Objects such as a chip card or the Key Card  
are located between the smartphone and  
the smartphone cover.  
89  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
Fault of the connection from transmission  
towers or other equipment with high trans-  
mitting power.  
Opening the door  
▷
Press the button to unlock all the  
doors.  
Shielding of the smartphone due to build-  
ings or metal objects.  
Pull the door opener above the arm-  
rest.  
▷
▷
Front doors: pull the door opener on the  
door to open the door. The other doors re-  
main locked.  
Buttons for the central  
locking system  
Back doors: pull twice on the door opener  
on the door to be opened; the first time  
unlocks the door, the second time opens it.  
The other doors remain locked.  
General information  
The vehicle is automatically locked when driv-  
ing off.  
In the event of a severe accident, the vehicle  
is automatically unlocked. The hazard warning  
system and interior lights are illuminated.  
Soft-close automatic  
function  
Overview  
Principle  
The soft-close automatic function reduces ef-  
fort and noise when closing vehicle doors.  
The door can be pushed into the door lock  
without effort and the door will close automati-  
cally.  
Safety information  
Warning  
The central locking buttons are located on the  
front door.  
Body parts can be jammed while operating  
the doors. There is a risk of injury. Make sure  
that the area of movement of the doors is  
clear while opening and closing.  
Locking the vehicle  
Press the button in the driver's door  
or front passengers door with the front  
doors closed.  
Closing  
To close the doors, push lightly.  
The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.  
The closing process is automatic.  
The vehicle is not secured against theft when  
locking.  
Unlocking the vehicle  
Press the button in the driver's door or  
front passenger’s door.  
90  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
If the active BMW ID does not have an as-  
signed PIN, this PIN must be set now. The  
PIN is needed to deactivate the valet park-  
ing mode.  
Valet parking mode  
Principle  
In the valet parking mode, the control display is  
disabled.  
6. If necessary, enter the PIN.  
7. "Activate valet parking mode"  
E.g., this mode can be used when the vehicle  
is handed over for valet parking.  
Deactivating valet parking mode  
1. Select the desired BMW ID on the lock  
screen.  
General information  
Depending on the national-market version, the  
valet parking mode may not be available.  
2.  
▷
Enter the assigned PIN for the BMW ID.  
If you have forgotten the PIN: enter the  
access data for the BMW ID.  
Valet Parking mode has the following restric-  
tions:  
▷
If the selected BMW ID does not have  
an assigned PIN: enter the access data  
for the BMW ID.  
▷
Vehicle settings cannot be changed via  
iDrive.  
▷
Settings stored to a BMW ID or guest pro-  
file cannot be changed.  
Settings  
▷
▷
Personal data cannot be displayed.  
The audio system is muted, with the possi-  
ble volume of the audio system being lim-  
ited.  
General information  
Depending on the equipment and national-  
market version, various settings for opening  
and closing are possible.  
▷
▷
▷
The integrated Universal Remote Control is  
deactivated.  
Dynamic Stability Control cannot be turned  
off.  
Unlocking and locking  
The availability of certain settings of the  
driving modes is limited.  
Doors  
1.  
Apps menu  
Additional information:  
2. "Vehicle"  
BMW ID/driver profiles, refer to page 68.  
3. "Doors and windows"  
4. "Lock/unlock"  
Functional requirement  
The driver has registered in the vehicle with a  
BMW ID.  
5. "Unlock"  
6. Select the desired setting:  
▷
"Driver's door only"  
Activating the valet parking mode  
Only the driver's door and the fuel filler  
flap are unlocked. Pressing again un-  
locks the entire vehicle.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "System settings"  
4. "Valet parking mode"  
5. If necessary, "PIN"  
▷
"All doors"  
The entire vehicle is unlocked.  
91  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
"Sound on lock/unlock"  
Touchless unlocking/locking  
Unlocking is confirmed with two sound  
signals, locking is confirmed with one  
sound signal.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Doors and windows"  
4. "Comfort access"  
5. Select the desired setting.  
Folding mirrors in automatically  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
Automatic unlocking  
3. "Doors and windows"  
4. "Lock/unlock"  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
5. "Fold mirrors on lock/unlock"  
3. "Doors and windows"  
4. "Lock/unlock"  
Cargo area  
5. Select the desired setting:  
Upper or both tailgates  
The button in the car's interior can be set up to  
open only the upper tailgate or the upper and  
lower tailgate together:  
▷
▷
"Unlock doors at end of trip"  
"Unlock doors when in P"  
If locked, the vehicle unlocks automatically  
when drive-ready state is turned off or selector  
lever position P is engaged.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
Automatic locking  
3. "Doors and windows"  
4. "Tailgate"  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
5. Select the desired setting:  
3. "Doors and windows"  
4. "Lock/unlock"  
▷
"Upper tailgate"  
Only the upper tailgate opens.  
"Both tailgates"  
5. "Lock after a short time"  
▷
The vehicle locks automatically after a short  
period of time if no door is opened after un-  
locking.  
The upper and lower tailgate will be  
opened together.  
To open the upper and lower tailgate at  
the same time, the upper tailgate must  
be closed when the button is pressed.  
Confirmation signals from the vehicle  
1.  
Apps menu  
This setting is also valid for the touch-  
less opening of the tailgate.  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Doors and windows"  
4. "Lock/unlock"  
5. Select the desired setting:  
▷
"Flash on lock/unlock"  
Unlocking is signaled by flashing twice,  
locking by flashing once.  
▷
With alarm system:  
92  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
When adjusting the opening height, make sure  
the clearance above the tailgate is at least  
4 in/10 cm.  
Tailgate and doors  
Depending on the vehicle equipment and  
country version, this setting may not be of-  
fered.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
1.  
Apps menu  
3. "Doors and windows"  
4. "Tailgate"  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Doors and windows"  
4. "Tailgate"  
5. "Opening height"  
6. Monitor the tailgate and set the desired  
opening height.  
5. Select the desired button.  
6. Select the desired setting:  
▷
"Upper tailgate"  
Opening/closing the cargo area  
contactlessly  
The upper tailgate is opened.  
"Upper tailgate and door(s)"  
▷
1.  
Apps menu  
The tailgate is opened and the doors  
unlocked.  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Doors and windows"  
4. "Tailgate"  
▷
▷
"Both tailgates"  
The upper and lower tailgate will be  
opened.  
5. Select the desired setting.  
"Both tailgates and door(s)"  
Alarm system  
The upper and lower tailgate will be  
opened and the doors unlocked.  
Principle  
The following settings are available for  
the button on the vehicle key:  
The alarm system issues a visual and acoustic  
signal when someone attempts to open the  
locked vehicle incorrectly.  
▷
▷
"Tailgate will only open if vehicle is already  
unlocked"  
The vehicle must be unlocked before the  
tailgate can be used with the vehicle key.  
General information  
When the vehicle is locked, the vehicle alarm  
system reacts to the following changes:  
"Lock tailgate button"  
The operation of the tailgate via the vehicle  
key is disabled.  
▷
Opening a door, the hood, or the cargo  
area.  
▷
▷
Movements in the vehicle interior.  
Adjusting the opening height  
You can set how far the upper tailgate can be  
opened.  
Changes in the vehicle inclination such as  
during attempts at stealing a wheel or  
when towing the vehicle.  
▷
Disconnected battery voltage.  
93  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
Improper use of the socket for OBD on-  
board diagnostics.  
▷
▷
Press the button on the vehicle key  
and hold for at least 3 seconds.  
Locking the vehicle while a device is con-  
nected to the diagnostic socket.  
Briefly press the button on the vehi-  
cle key three times in succession.  
The alarm system signals these changes visu-  
ally and acoustically:  
To switch off the alarm: press any button.  
▷
Acoustic alarm:  
Indicator light on the interior mirror  
Depending on local regulations, the acous-  
tic alarm may be suppressed.  
▷
Optical alarm:  
By flashing of the hazard warning system  
and headlights, where required.  
Do not modify the system to ensure function of  
the alarm system.  
Turning the alarm system on/off  
The alarm system is turned on as soon as the  
vehicle is locked from the outside.  
▷
▷
The indicator light flashes briefly every  
2 seconds:  
The alarm system is switched on.  
The alarm system is not switched on if the  
vehicle is locked from a greater distance with  
the My BMW App or manually from the inside.  
The indicator light flashes for approx.  
10 seconds, then flashes briefly every  
2 seconds:  
The alarm system is switched off as soon as  
the vehicle is unlocked.  
Interior motion sensor and tilt alarm sensor  
are not active, as doors, hood, or tailgate  
are not correctly closed. Correctly closed  
access points are secured.  
Opening the doors with the alarm  
system switched on  
The alarm system is triggered when a door  
is opened if the door was unlocked using the  
integrated key in the door lock.  
When the remaining open access points  
are closed, the interior motion sensor and  
tilt alarm sensor will be turned on.  
▷
The indicator light flashes even though all  
access points have been closed:  
Opening the cargo area with the  
alarm system switched on  
The cargo area can be opened even when the  
alarm system is switched on.  
Alarm system error.  
▷
▷
The indicator light goes out after unlocking:  
The vehicle has not been tampered with.  
After closing the cargo area, the cargo area will  
be locked and monitored again. The hazard  
warning system flashes once during closing.  
The indicator light flashes after unlocking  
until drive-ready state is switched on, but  
no longer than approx. 5 minutes:  
The alarm has been triggered.  
Panic mode  
You can trigger the alarm system if you find  
yourself in a dangerous situation.  
Tilt alarm sensor  
The inclination of the vehicle is monitored.  
94  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
The alarm system responds in situations such  
as attempts to steal a wheel or when the vehi-  
cle is towed.  
If the vehicle is unlocked with the integrated  
key, the drive-ready state must subsequently  
be turned on via the emergency detection of  
the vehicle key.  
Interior motion sensor  
The vehicle interior is monitored.  
Window  
The alarm system triggers when movement is  
detected inside the vehicle.  
General information  
The windows and the glass sunroof must be  
closed for the system to function properly.  
When a window is frequently opened to the  
same position, this task can be performed by  
the BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant. This is  
useful if you frequently use the same parking  
garage, for example.  
Avoiding unintentional alarms  
General information  
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen-  
sor can trigger an alarm, although no unau-  
thorized action occurred.  
Additional information:  
BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant, refer to  
page 53.  
Possible situations for an unwanted alarm:  
Safety information  
▷
▷
▷
In car washes.  
In duplex garages.  
Warning  
During transport on trains carrying vehicles,  
at sea or on a trailer.  
When operating the windows, body parts and  
objects can be jammed. There is a risk of in-  
jury or risk of damage to property. Make sure  
that the travel path of the windows is clear  
while opening and closing.  
▷
▷
With animals in the vehicle.  
When the vehicle is locked after start of re-  
fueling.  
The tilt alarm sensor and the interior motion  
sensor can be switched off in such situations.  
With the vehicle key  
Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and  
interior motion sensor  
Opening windows  
Press and hold the button on the vehi-  
cle key after unlocking.  
Press the button on the vehicle key  
within 30 seconds as soon as the vehi-  
cle is locked.  
The windows open for as long as the button  
on the vehicle key is pressed.  
The indicator light illuminates for approx.  
2 seconds and then continues to flash.  
Closing the windows  
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen-  
sor are switched off until the vehicle is locked  
again.  
With Comfort Access: press and hold  
the button on the vehicle key after lock-  
ing.  
Ending the alarm  
Unlock the vehicle.  
95  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
The windows close for as long as the button  
on the vehicle key is pressed.  
Closing the windows  
Depending on the vehicle equipment, exterior  
mirrors are folded in unless they were folded  
in during locking. The exterior mirrors are not  
folded in when the hazard warning flashers are  
switched on.  
On the door handle  
Principle  
With your finger, touch and hold the grooved  
surface on a closed door handle without  
grasping the door handle.  
The windows can be closed using the door  
handle without operating the vehicle key.  
The vehicle key is automatically detected near  
the vehicle.  
In addition to locking, the windows and glass  
sunroof with sun protection will be closed.  
Depending on the vehicle equipment, exterior  
mirrors are folded in unless they were folded  
in during locking. The exterior mirrors are not  
folded in when the hazard warning flashers are  
switched on.  
General information  
The function is available with Comfort Access.  
Depending on national-market version, the  
windows can also be closed via the door han-  
dle using a compatible smartphone and digital  
key.  
Inside the vehicle  
Additional information:  
Overview  
BMW Digital Key, refer to page 86.  
Functional prerequisites  
▷
Carry the vehicle key with you, for instance  
in your pants pocket.  
▷
Bluetooth must be activated on the smart-  
phone to close the window(s) using the dig-  
ital key.  
Power windows  
Functional requirements  
▷
Standby state is switched on.  
▷
Drive-ready state is switched on.  
The vehicle key or digital key must be inside  
the vehicle.  
96  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
Opening windows  
Closing without the anti-trap  
mechanism  
▷
Press the switch to the resistance  
point.  
In case of danger from the outside or if icing  
might prevent normal closing, proceed as fol-  
lows:  
The window opens while the switch  
is being held.  
▷
Press the switch beyond the resist-  
ance point.  
1. Pull the  
switch past the resistance  
The window opens automatically.  
Pressing the switch again stops the motion.  
point and hold it there.  
The window closes with limited anti-trap  
mechanism. If the closing force exceeds a  
specific threshold, closing is interrupted.  
Closing the windows  
▷
Pull the switch to the resistance  
point.  
2. Pull the  
switch past the resistance  
point again within approx. 4 seconds and  
hold it there.  
The window closes while the switch  
is being held.  
▷
Pull the switch beyond the resist-  
ance point.  
The window closes without the anti-trap  
mechanism.  
The window closes automatically.  
Pulling again stops the motion.  
Window roller sunblinds  
Anti-trap mechanism  
General information  
Principle  
The safety switch in the driver's door can be  
used to prevent children, for instance from op-  
erating the roller sunblinds using the switches  
in the rear.  
The anti-trap mechanism prevents objects or  
body parts becoming jammed between the  
door frame and window while a window is be-  
ing closed.  
Overview  
General information  
If resistance or blockage is detected while a  
window is being closed, the closing will be in-  
terrupted.  
Driver's door  
Safety information  
Warning  
Accessories on the windows such as anten-  
nas can impact anti-trap mechanism. There  
is a risk of injury. Do not install accessories in  
the area of movement of the windows.  
Button for roller sunblinds.  
97  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
The side roller sunblinds cannot be moved at  
low interior temperatures.  
Rear doors  
Safety switch  
Principle  
The safety switch can be used to prevent chil-  
dren, for instance, from opening and closing  
the rear windows using the switches in the  
rear.  
Buttons for the roller sunblinds.  
If an accident of a certain severity occurs, the  
safety function is switched off automatically.  
Functional requirement  
The affected window must be closed.  
Overview  
Operation  
On the driver’s door  
Press the button on the driver's door to  
open the roller sunblind if closed or to  
close the roller sunblind if open.  
If the button on the driver's door is pressed  
again while moving, the roller sunblind moves  
in the opposite direction.  
The safety switch is located on the  
driver's door.  
On the rear doors  
Turning the safety functions on/off  
Press the button to open the closed  
roller sunblind or to close the open  
roller sunblind.  
Press the safety switch on the driver’s  
door.  
The LED in the button illuminates  
when the safety function is switched on.  
If the button is pressed again during the move-  
ment, the roller sunblind is moved in the oppo-  
site direction.  
System limits  
If you are no longer able to move the roller  
sunblinds after having activated them consec-  
utively a number of times, the overheating pro-  
tection mechanism is active. The system is dis-  
abled for a limited time to prevent overheating.  
Let the system cool down.  
98  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
Functional prerequisites  
Glass sunroof  
Safety information  
Warning  
▷
Carry the vehicle key with you, for instance  
in your pants pocket.  
▷
Bluetooth must be activated on the smart-  
phone to close the glass sunroof using the  
digital key.  
Body parts can be jammed when operating  
the glass sunroof. There is a risk of injury.  
Make sure that the area of movement of the  
glass sunroof is clear during opening and  
closing.  
Closing glass sunroof  
With the vehicle key  
Opening glass sunroof  
Press and hold the button on the vehi-  
cle key after unlocking.  
Touch the grooved surface on the external  
door handle of a closed front door with your  
finger and hold it there without grasping the  
door handle.  
The glass sunroof with sun protection will be  
opened for as long as the button on the vehicle  
key is pressed.  
In addition to locking, the windows and glass  
sunroof with sun protection will be closed.  
Closing glass sunroof  
Depending on the vehicle equipment, exterior  
mirrors are folded in unless they were folded  
in while locking. The exterior mirrors are not  
folded in when the hazard warning flashers are  
switched on.  
With Comfort Access: press and hold  
the button on the vehicle key in close  
range of the vehicle after locking.  
The glass sunroof with sun protection will be  
closed for as long as the button on the vehicle  
key is pressed.  
Inside the vehicle  
Depending on the vehicle equipment, exterior  
mirrors are folded in unless they were folded  
in while locking. The exterior mirrors are not  
folded in when the hazard warning flashers are  
switched on.  
Functional requirements  
The glass sunroof and sun protection can be  
operated under the following conditions.  
▷
▷
Standby state is switched on.  
Drive-ready state is switched on.  
On the door handle  
The vehicle key must be inside the vehicle.  
Principle  
General information  
The glass sunroof and the sun protection are  
operated using the same switch.  
The glass sunroof can be closed using the  
door handle without operating the vehicle key.  
The vehicle key is automatically detected near  
the vehicle.  
99  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
The rear sun protection is operated using sep-  
arate buttons.  
fully open, the glass sunroof  
opens.  
▷
▷
Slide switch forward to the resistance point  
and hold.  
Overview  
The glass sunroof closes while the switch  
is being held. If the glass sunroof is already  
closed or in the tilted position, the sun pro-  
tection closes.  
Button in the vehicle  
Slide the switch back past the resistance  
point.  
The sun protection opens automatically. If  
the sun protection is already fully open, the  
glass sunroof opens automatically.  
Pressing the switch again stops the motion.  
▷
Push the switch forward past the resistance  
point.  
Opening/closing the glass sun-  
roof/front sun protection.  
The glass sunroof closes automatically. If  
the glass sunroof is already closed or in  
the tilted position, the sun protection closes  
automatically.  
Pressing the switch again stops the motion.  
Lifting/closing glass sunroof  
Push switch briefly upward.  
Opening/closing the glass sunroof and  
sun protection together  
▷
The closed glass sunroof tilts  
and the sun protection opens  
slightly.  
▷
Briefly press out the switch  
twice in succession toward  
the rear past the resistance  
point.  
▷
The opened glass sunroof  
closes until it is in the tilted  
position. The sun protection  
does not move.  
The glass sunroof and sun  
protection open together.  
▷
The tilted glass sunroof closes.  
Pressing the switch again  
stops the motion.  
Opening/closing the glass sunroof and  
sun protection separately  
▷
Briefly press out the switch twice in succes-  
sion toward the front past the resistance  
point.  
▷
Slide switch back to the re-  
sistance point and hold.  
The glass sunroof and sun protection close  
together.  
Holding down the switch  
opens the sun protection. If  
the sun protection is already  
Pressing the switch again stops the motion.  
100  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
On the control panel in the rear doors  
Comfort position  
In some models, the wind noises in the car's  
interior are lowest when the glass sunroof is  
not fully open. In these models, the automatic  
function initially only opens the glass sunroof  
up to this comfort position.  
General information  
When equipped with roller sunblinds in the rear  
side windows:  
The rear and front sun protection can be  
opened and closed via the control panels in the  
rear doors.  
Operating the switch inside the vehicle again  
opens the glass sunroof completely.  
Overview  
Opening/closing the sun protection  
On the headliner control panel  
Overview  
Button for the rear sun protection.  
Button for the front sun protection.  
Opening the rear sun protection.  
Closing the rear sun protection.  
Operation  
The front and rear sun protection cannot be  
operated with the switches in the rear when  
the safety function is switched on.  
Operation  
Press the button to open the closed  
rear sun protection or to close the open  
rear sun protection.  
Press the button to open the rear sun  
protection.  
Press button again to stop the movement.  
Press button again to stop the movement.  
When the button is pressed again, the rear sun  
protection will move in the opposite direction.  
Press the button to close the rear sun  
protection.  
Press the button to open the closed  
front sun protection or to close the  
open front sun protection.  
Press button again to stop the movement.  
Press button again to stop the movement.  
101  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
When the button is pressed again, the front  
sun protection will move in the opposite direc-  
tion.  
the roof frame and glass sunroof while the  
glass sunroof is closing.  
General information  
Additional information:  
If a resistance or blockage is detected while  
the glass sunroof is closing, the closing opera-  
tion is interrupted once the roof reaches the  
half-open position, or it is stopped when clos-  
ing from the tilted position.  
Safety switch, refer to page 98.  
On the control panel above the third  
seat row  
Overview  
Closing from the open position without  
the anti-trap mechanism  
If an external hazard or ice prevents normal  
closure, proceed as follows:  
1. Close all doors.  
Button for the rear sun protection.  
2. Switch on drive-ready state or stop a mov-  
ing vehicle.  
3. Push the switch forward past the resistance  
point and hold.  
Operation  
It is not possible to operate the rear sun pro-  
tection via the switches in the rear if the safety  
function is switched on.  
The glass sunroof closes with limited anti-  
trap mechanism. If the closing force ex-  
ceeds a specific threshold, closing is inter-  
rupted.  
Press the button to open the closed  
rear sun protection or to close the open  
rear sun protection.  
4. Push the switch forward again past the  
resistance point and hold until the glass  
sunroof closes without the anti-trap mech-  
anism. Make sure that the closing path is  
clear.  
Press button again to stop the movement.  
When the button is pressed again, the rear sun  
protection will move in the opposite direction.  
Closing from the lifted position without  
the anti-trap mechanism  
In case of danger from the outside or if icing  
might prevent normal closing, proceed as fol-  
lows:  
Additional information:  
Safety switch, refer to page 98.  
Anti-trap mechanism  
Principle  
The anti-trap mechanism prevents objects or  
body parts from becoming jammed between  
102  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
▷
If the glass sunroof is closed, it opens then  
closes again.  
If the glass sunroof is open, it first closes,  
then opens and closes again.  
The sun protection is initialized in the  
closed position.  
1. Close all doors.  
2. Switch on drive-ready state or stop a mov-  
ing vehicle.  
Initialization is complete once the glass sun-  
roof and the sun protection have opened then  
closed again.  
3. Push the switch forward past the resistance  
point and hold.  
Initializing after a power interruption  
General information  
After a power interruption during the opening  
or closing process, the glass sunroof can only  
be operated to a limited extent. Initializing the  
system can help in this case.  
The system can be initialized under the follow-  
ing conditions:  
▷
The vehicle is parked in a horizontal posi-  
tion.  
▷
The vehicle will not be moved until the initi-  
alization is completed.  
▷
▷
The drive-ready state is established.  
The outside temperature is above  
41 ℉/5 ℃.  
During initialization, the glass sunroof closes  
without the anti-trap mechanism.  
Make sure that the closing path is clear.  
Initializing the system  
Press the switch up and hold  
it until the initialization is com-  
plete:  
Initialization begins within 15 seconds.  
103  
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
CONTROLS  
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
Vehicle features and options  
Warning  
With a backrest inclined too far to the rear,  
This chapter describes model-specific equip-  
ment, systems, and functions that are currently  
available, or may become available in the fu-  
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.  
the protective effect of the seat belt can no  
longer be ensured. There is a risk of sliding  
under the seat belt in an accident. There is a  
risk of injury or danger to life. Adjust the seat  
prior to starting the trip. Adjust the backrest  
so that it is in the most upright position as  
possible and do not adjust again while driv-  
ing.  
Additional information:  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
Sitting safely  
An ideal seat position that meets the needs of  
the occupants can make a vital contribution to  
relaxed, fatigue-free driving.  
Warning  
There is a danger of jamming when moving  
the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk  
of damage to property. Make sure that the  
travel path of the seat is clear prior to any  
adjustment.  
In the event of an accident, the correct seat  
position plays an important role. Follow the in-  
formation in the following chapters.  
Additional information:  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Seats, refer to page 104.  
Adjusting seats  
Seat belts, refer to page 113.  
Head restraints, refer to page 115.  
Airbags, refer to page 178.  
General information  
The current seat position can be stored using  
the memory function.  
Seats, front  
Safety information  
Warning  
Overview  
Seat setting while driving can lead to unex-  
pected movements of the seat. Vehicle con-  
trol could be lost. There is a risk of accident,  
injury, or property damage. Only adjust the  
seat on the driver's side when the vehicle is  
stationary.  
The switches for setting the seats are located  
on the front seats.  
104  
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
CONTROLS  
Setting the longitudinal direction  
Adjusting backrest tilt  
Press switch forward or backward.  
Tilt switch forward or backward.  
Adjusting the height  
Adjusting the seat position  
automatically  
General information  
The seat setting for the driver's seat is stored  
in the active BMW ID or in the active driver  
profile. If the BMW ID or the driver profile is  
reactivated at a later time, the saved position  
will be called up automatically.  
Activate/deactivate the function  
Press switch up or down.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
Adjusting seat tilt  
3. "Seat comfort"  
4. Select driver’s seat.  
5. "Use automatically"  
6. Select the desired setting.  
Tilt switch up or down.  
105  
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
CONTROLS  
The curvature is shifted up/down.  
Thigh support  
Sport seat  
Backrest width  
Principle  
Adjusting the backrest width may improve side  
support when cornering.  
General information  
The backrest width is changed by adjusting  
the side sections of the backrest.  
When exiting the vehicle, the backrest width  
opens completely. The last set position is au-  
tomatically applied before you start driving.  
Pull the lever at the front of the seat and push  
the thigh support forward or back.  
Multifunctional seat  
Adjusting the backrest width  
▷
Press the front section of the but-  
ton:  
The backrest width decreases.  
▷
Press the rear section of the button:  
The backrest width increases.  
Upper backrest  
Push the switch in the front or back.  
Principle  
The upper backrest supports the back in the  
shoulder region. A correct setting leads to a  
relaxed seat position and reduces strain on the  
shoulder muscles.  
Lumbar support  
Principle  
The curvature of the seat backrest can be ad-  
justed in a way that it supports the lumbar  
region of the spine. The lower back and the  
spine are supported for upright sitting position.  
General information  
When exiting the vehicle, the upper backrest  
moves all the way back. The last set position is  
automatically applied before you start driving.  
Adjusting the lumbar support  
▷
Press the front/rear section of the  
button:  
The curvature is increased/de-  
creased.  
▷
Press the upper/lower section of the but-  
ton:  
106  
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
CONTROLS  
Adjusting the upper backrest  
Turning on  
1.  
Press the button. The LED illumi-  
nates.  
2. Adjust the front passenger seat on the driv-  
er's seat.  
3. If needed, store the memory position for the  
front passenger seat.  
Turning off  
▷
▷
Press the front section of the button:  
The upper backrest is inclined forward.  
Press the rear section of the button:  
The upper backrest is inclined backward.  
Press the button. The LED goes out.  
The function deactivates itself auto-  
matically after some time.  
Seat massage  
Front passenger seat functionality  
Principle  
Principle  
The seat massage ensures relaxed muscles  
and better blood circulation in the lumbar re-  
gion and can avoid fatigue.  
The front passenger seat can be adjusted with  
the switches of the driver's seat, for instance to  
increase the legroom in the rear.  
If needed, the memory position for the front  
passenger seat can be stored.  
Turning the seat massage on/off  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
Overview  
3. "Seat comfort"  
Buttons in the vehicle  
4. Select desired seat.  
5. "Massage"  
6. "Massage"  
7. If necessary, select the desired setting.  
Calibrating the front seats  
General information  
As soon as the electric seat setting no longer  
functions precisely, a Check Control message  
is displayed on the control display.  
Front passenger seat functionality  
To restore the accuracy of the electric seat set-  
ting, the front seats must be calibrated.  
107  
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
CONTROLS  
Safety information  
Safety information  
Warning  
Warning  
There is a danger of jamming when moving  
the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk  
of damage to property. Make sure that the  
travel path of the seat is clear prior to any  
adjustment.  
There is a danger of jamming when moving  
the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk  
of damage to property. Make sure that the  
travel path of the seat is clear prior to any  
adjustment.  
Calibrating the front seat  
1. Press the longitudinal direction switch for-  
ward until the seat stops.  
Warning  
There is a danger of jamming when folding  
down the center armrest in the rear. There  
is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area  
of movement of the center armrest is clear  
when folding down.  
2. Press the switch forward again until the  
seat stops.  
As soon as the message on the control dis-  
play disappears, the calibration is complete.  
If the message remains active, repeat the cali-  
bration.  
Warning  
If the message is still shown after repeated  
calibration, have the vehicle checked by an  
authorized service center or another qualified  
service center or repair shop.  
When folding back the second row of seats,  
there is a danger of jamming. There is a  
risk of injury or risk of damage to property.  
Make sure that the area of movement of the  
second row of seats is clear prior to folding  
down.  
Rear seats  
Second row of seats  
Warning  
Seats in the second row of seats are not  
locked when they are folded down and they  
can move. There is a risk of injury and risk of  
property damage. Only fold the seats in the  
second row down while loading. When driving  
without a load, fold back and lock the seats in  
the second row before driving away.  
General information  
For the seats in the second row of seats, the  
backrest tilt can be adjusted, as can the longi-  
tudinal direction as needed.  
The longitudinal direction of the middle section  
is adjusted together with the left rear seat.  
108  
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
CONTROLS  
Overview  
Backrest tilt  
The seat setting switches are located on the  
seats.  
Tilt switch forward or backward.  
Access to the third row of seats  
Resetting to base position  
Safety information  
Warning  
There is a danger of jamming when moving  
the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk  
of damage to property. Make sure that the  
travel path of the seat is clear prior to any  
adjustment.  
Press the button to reset to base position.  
The process is canceled if the button is  
pressed again.  
Warning  
If a rear seat backrest is not locked, unse-  
cured cargo can be thrown about the car’s  
interior; for instance, in the event of an acci-  
dent, braking or an evasive maneuver. There  
is a risk of injury. Make sure that the rear seat  
backrest is locked after folding it back.  
Longitudinal direction  
Press switch forward or backward.  
109  
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
CONTROLS  
Folding down the rear seat backrest  
6-seater  
With seven seats:  
General information  
1. Fold middle section of the second seat row  
up as necessary.  
The second seat row consists of two split  
seats with separate armrests.  
2. Push the switch once forward or backward.  
Rear armrest  
Safety information  
Warning  
Body parts may be pinched when moving  
the armrest. There is a risk of injury. Make  
sure that the area of movement is clear when  
moving the armrest.  
The seat automatically moves to the respec-  
tive end position.  
Adjusting the height  
With six seats:  
1. Pull lever up to the stop.  
▷
▷
Upward: pull the armrest into the desired  
position.  
2. Fold backrest forward.  
Downward: pull the armrest to the top posi-  
tion and then push it all the way down.  
To make the entry to the rear easier, the seat  
will automatically move to the most forward  
position.  
After setting the height, move the armrest up  
or down slightly, making sure the armrest en-  
gages properly.  
To avoid a collision, the position of the front  
seats may be adjusted automatically.  
If the second row of seats is not locked, an  
acoustic signal will sound and a warning icon  
will be displayed in the instrument cluster.  
110  
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
CONTROLS  
Setting the longitudinal direction  
Third row of seats  
General information  
The third row of seats consists of two divided  
seats.  
Fold up the backrest  
Safety information  
Slide the upper part of the armrest to the front  
or rear.  
Warning  
There is a danger of jamming when moving  
the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk  
of damage to property. Make sure that the  
travel path of the seat is clear prior to any  
adjustment.  
Operating the second seat row from  
the front seats  
Principle  
The second seat row can be operated from  
the front seats, e.g. to prepare the entry to the  
third seat row easier.  
Warning  
If a rear seat backrest is not locked, unse-  
cured cargo can be thrown about the car’s  
interior; for instance, in the event of an acci-  
dent, braking or an evasive maneuver. There  
is a risk of injury. Make sure that the rear seat  
backrest is locked after folding it back.  
Overview  
From the rear  
Comfort entry, 3rd seat row  
Adjusting  
Push the switch once forward or back-  
ward. The seat automatically moves to  
the respective end position.  
1.  
Press the switch.  
▷
Press the switch. The rear seat backrest  
automatically moves to the respective  
111  
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
CONTROLS  
end position. Pressing again stops the  
motion.  
Folding down the rear seat backrest  
From the rear  
▷
Push the switch and hold it. The rear  
seat backrest moves as long as the  
switch is held down.  
Pull the switch or hold it pulled. The  
rear seat backrest and the head re-  
straint fold down.  
2. Fold the head restraint back.  
Switch  
Function  
From the cargo area  
Front.  
The left rear seat backrest sets  
itself upright.  
Press the switch or hold it pressed.  
The rear seat backrest and the head  
restraint fold down.  
Rear.  
The right rear seat backrest  
sets itself upright.  
Exiting from the third row of seats  
Depending on the equipment version, the sec-  
ond seat row can be folded down using the  
switch or the lever.  
From the cargo area  
Additional information:  
Access to the third row of seats, refer to  
page 109  
With seven seats: emergency  
unlocking rear seat backrest  
General information  
The two outer backrests of the second seat  
row can be folded down manually such as in  
the event of an electrical fault.  
1.  
Press the switch.  
▷
▷
Pull the switch. The rear seat backrest  
automatically moves to the respective  
end position. Pulling again stops the  
motion.  
Unlocking from the second seat row  
Pull the switch and hold it. The rear seat  
backrest moves as long as the switch is  
pulled.  
2. Fold the head restraint back.  
Switch  
Function  
Top, rear.  
The left rear seat backrest sets  
itself upright.  
Pull the loop and fold the rear seat backrest  
forward.  
Bottom,  
rear.  
The right rear seat backrest  
sets itself upright.  
112  
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
CONTROLS  
Unlocking from the third seat row  
Safety information  
Warning  
Use of a seat belt to buckle more than one  
person will potentially defeat the ability of  
the seat belt to serve its protective function.  
There is a risk of injury or danger to life.  
Do not strap in more than one person per  
single seat belt. Infants and children are not  
allowed on an occupant's lap, and must be  
transported and secured in designated child  
restraint systems.  
Pull the loop and fold the rear seat backrest  
forward.  
Seat belts  
Warning  
The protective effect of safety gear, including  
seat belts, can be limited or lost when seat  
belts are fastened incorrectly. An incorrectly  
fastened seat belt can cause additional inju-  
ries, for instance in the event of an accident,  
braking or evasive maneuvers. There is a risk  
of injury or danger to life. Make sure that all  
occupants are wearing seat belts correctly.  
General information  
The vehicle is fitted with six or seven seat belts  
to ensure occupant safety. However, they can  
only offer protection when adjusted correctly.  
Always make sure that seat belts are being  
worn by the occupants before driving off. The  
airbags supplement the seat belts as an ad-  
ditional safety device. The airbags do not re-  
place seat belts.  
Warning  
All seat belt anchorage points are designed to  
achieve the best possible protective effect for  
the seat belts when used properly and with the  
correct seat settings.  
With a rear seat backrest that is not locked,  
the protective effect of the middle seat belt  
is not guaranteed. There is a risk of injury or  
danger to life. If you are using the middle seat  
belt, lock the wider rear seat backrest.  
The two outer seat belt buckles of the rear  
seats are intended for the persons sitting on  
the left and right.  
The center seat belt buckle of the rear seats is  
intended for the person sitting in the middle.  
Warning  
The protective effect of safety gear, including  
seat belts, may not be fully operational or fail  
in the following situations:  
Additional information:  
Notes on sitting safely, refer to page 104.  
▷
The seat belts or seat belt buckles are  
damaged, soiled, or changed in any  
other way.  
▷
Seat belt tensioners or seat belt winders  
were modified.  
113  
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
CONTROLS  
Seat belts can be imperceptibly damaged in  
the event of an accident. There is a risk of  
injury or danger to life. Keep clean and do  
not modify: seat belts, seat belt buckles, seat  
belt tensioners, seat belt winders, and seat  
belt anchors. After an accident, have the seat  
belts checked by an authorized service center  
or another qualified service center or repair  
shop.  
Adjusting  
Correct use of seat belts  
Press and hold the button, arrow 1, and push  
the seat belt height adjustment up or down.  
▷
Wear the seat belt tight to your body over  
your lap and shoulders, without twisting it.  
After setting the height, make sure that the  
seat belt height adjustment engages correctly.  
▷
Wear the seat belt deep on your hips over  
your lap. The seat belt must not press on  
your stomach.  
Buckling the seat belt  
1. Guide the seat belt slowly over shoulder  
and hip to put it on.  
▷
Do not rub the seat belt against sharp  
edges, or guide it or jam it in across hard  
or fragile objects.  
2. Insert the buckle tongue into the seat belt  
buckle. The seat belt buckle must engage  
audibly.  
▷
▷
Avoid thick clothing.  
Re-tighten the seat belt frequently upward  
around your upper body area.  
Seat belt height adjustment  
General information  
The seat belt anchorage point in the second  
row of seats can be adjusted to the body size  
of the occupants with the seat belt height ad-  
justment.  
To ease accessibility to the seat belt buckle, an  
adjustable slider is available on the belt to help  
position the buckle when not in use.  
Unbuckling the seat belt  
1. Hold down the seat belt firmly.  
2. Press the red button in the seat belt buckle.  
3. Guide the seat belt back into the seat belt  
winder.  
114  
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
CONTROLS  
General information  
Seat belt reminder  
If a door with access to the rear row seating  
is operated within 30 minutes before starting  
off, a message appears on the control display  
when the trip is completed and a signal tone  
sounds.  
General information  
Make sure that the seat belts are positioned  
correctly.  
The seat belt reminder becomes active in the  
following situations:  
If the trip is continued within 30 minutes, the  
message is displayed again after the trip has  
been completed.  
▷
▷
▷
When the seat belt on the driver's side or  
on the passenger's side is not fastened.  
When the seat belt is unfastened while driv-  
ing.  
Activate/deactivate the function  
1.  
Apps menu  
When objects are lying on a seat.  
2. "System settings"  
3. "Rear Occupant Alert"  
4. Select the desired setting.  
Display in the instrument cluster  
The indicator light in the instrument cluster illu-  
minates after turning on the drive-ready state  
when the seat belt reminder is active.  
Safety mode  
A Check Control message is displayed where  
applicable. Check whether the seat belt has  
been fastened correctly.  
Depending on vehicle equipment, the driver  
and front passenger seat belt straps are auto-  
matically tightened once after driving off, if the  
seat belt is fastened.  
Icon  
Meaning  
If necessary, in critical driving situations, e.g.,  
during emergency braking, the front seat belts  
are automatically pretensioned.  
Seat belt on the driver's seat is  
not buckled.  
After a critical driving situation without an acci-  
dent, the front seat belts are loosened again. If  
the belt tension does not loosen automatically,  
stop the vehicle and unbuckle the seat belt us-  
ing the red button in the buckle. Fasten the  
seat belt before continuing to drive.  
Seat belt on the passenger  
seat or another seat in the ve-  
hicle is not buckled.  
Seat belt is buckled on the cor-  
responding seat.  
Seat belt is not buckled on the  
corresponding seat.  
Front head restraints  
Safety information  
Warning  
Rear Occupant Alert  
Principle  
Removal or incorrect adjustment of head re-  
straints can cause injuries in the head and  
neck area. There is a risk of injury.  
At the end of a trip, the system informs the  
driver of the possible presence of occupants on  
the rear seats.  
115  
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
Before driving, install the removed head  
restraints on the occupied seats.  
Adjusting the height  
Adjust the head restraint so its center  
supports the back of the head at as  
close to eye level as possible.  
▷
▷
Adjust the distance so that the head re-  
straint is as close as possible to the back  
of the head. Adjust the distance via the  
backrest tilt as needed.  
For manually adjustable head restraints:  
After adjusting, make sure that the head  
restraint is correctly engaged.  
Press switch up or down.  
Adjusting the distance  
Warning  
Body parts can be jammed when moving the  
head restraint. There is a risk of injury. Make  
sure that the area of movement is clear when  
moving the head restraint.  
Warning  
Objects on the head restraint reduce the pro-  
tective effect in the head and neck area.  
There is a risk of injury.  
▷
▷
Back: press the button and push the head  
restraint toward the rear.  
Forward: pull the head restraint toward the  
front.  
▷
▷
Do not use seat or head restraint covers.  
Do not hang objects, for instance clothes  
hangers, directly on the head restraint.  
Adjusting the side extensions  
▷
▷
Only use accessories that have been de-  
termined to be safe for attachment to a  
head restraint.  
Do not use any accessories, for instance  
pillows, while driving.  
Active head restraint  
In the event of a rear-end collision with a  
certain severity, the active head restraint auto-  
matically reduces the distance from the head.  
Fold the side extensions on the head restraint  
forward for increased side support in the rest-  
ing position.  
Have the active head restraint checked and if  
necessary replaced in the case of damage or if  
it was exposed to an accident.  
116  
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
Only use accessories that have been de-  
termined to be safe for attachment to a  
head restraint.  
Removing the head restraints  
The head restraints cannot be removed.  
Do not use any accessories, for instance  
pillows, while driving.  
Rear head restraints  
Safety information  
Warning  
Folding down the head restraints  
General information  
The outer head restraints of the second seat  
row and the head restraints of the third seat  
row can be folded down to improve the rear  
field of vision. Only fold down the head re-  
straint if no one will be sitting in the corre-  
sponding seat.  
Removal or incorrect adjustment of head re-  
straints can cause injuries in the head and  
neck area. There is a risk of injury.  
▷
Before driving, install the removed head  
restraints on the occupied seats.  
▷
Adjust the head restraint so its center  
supports the back of the head at as  
close to eye level as possible.  
Second-row seating  
▷
▷
Adjust the distance so that the head re-  
straint is as close as possible to the back  
of the head. Adjust the distance via the  
backrest tilt as needed.  
For manually adjustable head restraints:  
After adjusting, make sure that the head  
restraint is correctly engaged.  
Press button, arrow 1, and fold the head re-  
straint back.  
Warning  
Body parts can be jammed when moving the  
head restraint. There is a risk of injury. Make  
sure that the area of movement is clear when  
moving the head restraint.  
To return the head restraint to its initial posi-  
tion, fold the head restraint forward as far as  
it will go. Make sure that the head restraint  
engages correctly.  
Warning  
Objects on the head restraint reduce the pro-  
tective effect in the head and neck area.  
There is a risk of injury.  
▷
▷
Do not use seat or head restraint covers.  
Do not hang objects, for instance clothes  
hangers, directly on the head restraint.  
117  
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
CONTROLS  
Third row of seats  
Cushions for head restraints in rear  
Only use the pillow when the vehicle is  
switched off.  
1. Bring the head restraint to a sufficiently  
high position.  
2. Attach the pillow and place the pillow band  
around the back of the head restraint, ar-  
row 1.  
Pull the loop to fold the head restraint forward.  
To return the head restraint to its initial posi-  
tion, fold the head restraint back as far as it will  
go. Make sure that the head restraint engages  
correctly.  
Adjusting the height  
3. Close pushbuttons, arrow 2.  
▷
▷
To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and  
push the head restraint down.  
To raise: push the head restraint up.  
Removing the head restraint  
The head restraints cannot be removed.  
118  
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
CONTROLS  
Cushions for head restraints in rear,  
6-seater  
Exterior mirrors  
Only use the pillow when the vehicle is  
switched off.  
General information  
The front passenger's side exterior mirror is  
more curved than the driver's side mirror.  
1. Pull the upper lug through the loop on the  
top of the head restraint.  
The exterior mirror adjustment is stored in the  
active BMW ID or in the active driver profile. If  
the BMW ID or the driver profile is reactivated  
at a later time, the stored position is called up  
automatically.  
The current exterior mirror adjustment can be  
stored using the memory function.  
Safety information  
2. Close both pushbuttons.  
Warning  
Objects in the mirror are closer than they ap-  
pear. The distance to the road users behind  
could be incorrectly estimated, for instance  
while changing lanes. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, and property damage. Estimate  
the distance to the traffic behind by looking  
over your shoulder.  
Overview  
3. Move the head restraint into the topmost  
position.  
4. Close the push-button on the lower lug and  
the pushbutton on the bottom of the head  
restraint.  
119  
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
In car washes.  
Icon  
Meaning  
On narrow roads.  
Fold the exterior mirror in and out.  
Exterior mirrors that were folded in are folded  
out automatically at a speed of approx.  
25 mph/40 km/h.  
Adjust the exterior mirrors.  
Automatic heating  
Both exterior mirrors are automatically heated  
as needed and when the drive-ready state is  
switched on.  
Select exterior mirror, Automatic Curb  
Monitor.  
Adjusting the exterior mirrors  
Automatic dimming  
The exterior mirror on the driver's side is au-  
tomatically dimmed. Photocells in the interior  
mirror are used to control this.  
Press the button.  
The selected exterior mirror moves  
along with the button movement.  
Automatic Curb Monitor  
Selecting the exterior mirror  
Principle  
To change over to the other mirror:  
Slide the switch.  
If reverse gear is engaged, the mirror glass on  
the passenger's side is tilted downward. This  
improves your view of the curb and other low-  
lying obstacles when parking, for instance.  
Malfunction  
In case of an electrical malfunction, adjust the  
exterior mirror by pressing on the edges of the  
mirror glass.  
Activating the Automatic Curb Monitor  
1.  
Slide the switch to the driver's side  
mirror position.  
Folding in/folding out the exterior  
mirrors  
2. Engage selector lever position R.  
When the trailer power socket is occupied or  
trailer towing is activated, the Automatic Curb  
Monitor is deactivated.  
NOTICE  
Depending on the vehicle width, the vehicle  
can be damaged in car washes. There is a  
risk of property damage. Before washing, fold  
in the mirrors by hand or with the button.  
Deactivating the Automatic Curb  
Monitor  
Slide the switch to the front passenger's side  
exterior mirror position.  
Press the button.  
Folding is possible at vehicle speeds of up to  
approx. 12 mph/20 km/h.  
Folding the exterior mirrors in and out is help-  
ful in the following situations:  
120  
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
CONTROLS  
Electric steering wheel adjustment  
Interior mirror, automatic  
dimming feature  
General information  
The steering wheel adjustment is stored in the  
active BMW ID or in the active driver profile. If  
the BMW ID or the driver profile is reactivated  
at a later time, the stored position is called up  
automatically.  
General information  
The interior mirror is dimmed automatically.  
Photocells are used for control:  
▷
▷
In the mirror glass.  
The current steering wheel position can be  
stored using the memory function.  
On the rear of the mirror.  
To make it easier to enter and get out of the  
vehicle, the steering wheel moves temporarily  
into the upper position.  
Overview  
Adjusting the steering wheel position  
Functional requirements  
▷
Keep the photocells clean.  
▷
Do not cover the area between the interior  
mirror and the windshield.  
Press the switch to adjust the steering wheel  
forward/back position and height to the seat  
position.  
Steering wheel  
Safety information  
Warning  
Memory function  
Principle  
The following settings can be stored and, if  
necessary, retrieved using the memory func-  
tion:  
Steering wheel adjustments while driving  
can lead to unexpected steering wheel move-  
ments. Vehicle control could be lost. There is  
a risk of accident, injury, or property damage.  
Adjust the steering wheel while the vehicle is  
stationary only.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Seat position.  
Exterior mirror adjustment.  
Steering wheel position.  
Height of the Head-up display.  
121  
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
CONTROLS  
General information  
Two memory locations with different settings  
can be set for each driver profile.  
Storing settings  
1. Set the desired position.  
The following settings are not stored:  
2.  
Press the button. The LED illumi-  
▷
▷
Backrest width.  
Lumbar support.  
nates.  
3. Press the desired memory button 1 or 2  
while the LED is illuminated. A signal  
sounds.  
Safety information  
Calling up settings  
Press the desired memory button 1 or 2.  
Warning  
Using the memory function while driving can  
lead to unexpected seat or steering wheel  
movements. Vehicle control could be lost.  
There is a risk of accident, injury, and prop-  
erty damage. Only retrieve the memory func-  
tion when the vehicle is stationary.  
The stored position is called up.  
The procedure stops when a seat setting  
switch or one of the memory buttons is  
pressed again.  
The adjustment of the seat position on the  
driver's side is interrupted after a short time  
while driving.  
Warning  
There is a danger of jamming when moving  
the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk  
of damage to property. Make sure that the  
travel path of the seat is clear prior to any  
adjustment.  
Seat climate control  
Various climate control functions are available  
for the seats.  
Additional information:  
Climate control, refer to page 286.  
Overview  
The memory buttons are located on the front  
doors.  
122  
Transporting children safely  
CONTROLS  
Transporting children safely  
Vehicle features and options  
Warning  
A hot vehicle may result in death to persons,  
especially children, or animals. There is a  
risk of injury or danger to life. Do not leave  
people, especially children, or animals unat-  
tended in the vehicle.  
This chapter describes model-specific equip-  
ment, systems, and functions that are currently  
available, or may become available in the fu-  
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.  
Additional information:  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
Warning  
The right place for children  
Safety information  
Warning  
Exposure to intense sunlight can cause child  
restraint systems and their components to  
become very hot. Persons may sustain burn  
injuries when touching the hot components.  
There is a risk of injury. Do not expose  
the child restraint system to direct sunlight  
or cover where necessary. If necessary, let  
the child restraint system cool down before  
transporting a child. Do not leave children un-  
attended in the vehicle.  
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle  
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger  
themselves and traffic, for example, due to  
the following actions:  
▷
▷
▷
Establishing standby.  
Releasing the parking brake.  
Children in the rear seat  
Opening and closing the doors or win-  
dows.  
General information  
▷
▷
Engaging selector lever position N.  
Using vehicle equipment.  
Accident research shows that the safest place  
for children is in the rear seat.  
Children younger than 13 years of age or  
shorter than 5 ft/150 cm should be transported  
in the rear seat in suitable child restraint sys-  
tems designed for the age, weight and size  
of the child. Children 13 years of age or older  
must wear a seat belt as soon as a suitable  
child restraint system can no longer be used  
due to their age, weight, or size.  
There is a risk of accident, injury, and prop-  
erty damage. Do not leave children or ani-  
mals unattended in the vehicle. Take the ve-  
hicle key with you when exiting and lock the  
vehicle.  
123  
Transporting children safely  
CONTROLS  
Safety information  
Installing child restraint  
systems  
Warning  
The seat belt cannot be fastened correctly  
on children shorter than 5 ft/150 cm without  
suitable additional child restraint systems.  
The protective effect of safety gear, including  
seat belts, can be limited or lost when seat  
belts are fastened incorrectly. An incorrectly  
fastened seat belt can cause additional inju-  
ries, for instance in the event of an accident,  
braking or evasive maneuvers. There is a risk  
of injury or danger to life. Secure children  
shorter than 5 ft/150 cm using suitable child  
restraint systems.  
General information  
Pay attention to the specifications and the op-  
erating and safety information of the child re-  
straint system manufacturer when selecting,  
installing, and using child restraint systems.  
Safety information  
Warning  
The protective effect of child restraint sys-  
tems and their fastening systems which have  
been damaged or exposed to an accident  
can be limited or lost. A child cannot be prop-  
erly restrained in the event of an accident,  
braking or evasive maneuvers. There is a risk  
of injury or danger to life.  
Children on the front passenger  
seat  
General information  
Do not use child restraint systems which  
have been damaged or exposed to an acci-  
dent.  
Before using a child restraint system on the  
front passenger seat, ensure that the front,  
knee, and side airbags on the passenger's side  
are deactivated.  
If attachment systems have been damaged  
or strained by an accident, have them  
checked and replaced by an authorized serv-  
ice center or another qualified service center  
or repair shop.  
Additional information:  
For automatic deactivation of front passenger  
airbags, refer to page 180.  
Safety information  
Warning  
Warning  
The stability of the child restraint system is  
limited or compromised with incorrect seat  
setting or improper installation of the child  
seat. There is a risk of injury or danger to life.  
Make sure that the child restraint system fits  
securely against the backrest. If possible, ad-  
just the backrest tilt for all affected backrests  
and correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that  
seats and backrests are securely engaged or  
locked. If possible and necessary, adjust the  
height of the head restraints or remove them.  
Active front passenger airbags can injure a  
child in a child restraint system when the air-  
bags are deployed. There is a risk of injury.  
Make sure that the front passenger airbags  
are deactivated and that the PASSENGER  
AIRBAG OFF indicator light illuminates.  
124  
Transporting children safely  
CONTROLS  
Seat position and height  
Before installation  
After installing a child restraint system, move  
the front passenger seat as far back as it will  
go and, if possible, bring it up to the highest  
position. This seat position and height ensure  
the best possible position for the belt and of-  
fers optimal protection in the event of an acci-  
dent.  
Before installing child restraint systems, en-  
sure that the rear seat backrests are locked.  
Move the rear seats into the rearmost position  
to facilitate installation of the child restraint  
system.  
Third row of seats  
Before installing a child restraint system in  
the third row of seats, depending on the equip-  
ment, note the following:  
After mounting a universal child restraint sys-  
tem, adjust the tilt of the seat backrest so that  
the belt is not constrained.  
If the upper attachment point of the seat belt  
is located in front of the seat belt guide of the  
child seat, move the front passenger seat care-  
fully forward until the best possible seat belt  
guide position is reached.  
▷
Roll up the cargo cover and remove the  
case.  
▷
▷
Remove the cargo area partition net.  
Bring seats and backrests of the second  
row of seats into the most forward position.  
Backrest width  
▷
Raise the head restraints of the third row of  
seats into the highest position.  
Adjustable backrest width: Before installing a  
child restraint system on the front passenger  
seat, open the backrest width completely. Do  
not change the backrest width again and do  
not call up a memory position.  
Do not change the settings that have been  
made after this.  
On the front passenger seat  
Child seat security  
Deactivating the airbags  
Warning  
Active front passenger airbags can injure a  
child in a child restraint system when the air-  
bags are deployed. There is a risk of injury.  
Make sure that the front passenger airbags  
are deactivated and that the PASSENGER  
AIRBAG OFF indicator light illuminates.  
The seat belts in the rear and the front pass-  
enger seat belt can be permanently locked to  
fasten child restraint systems.  
Before installing a child restraint system in the  
front passenger seat, make sure that the front,  
knee and side airbags on the passenger's side  
are deactivated.  
Additional information:  
For automatic deactivation of front passenger  
airbags, refer to page 180.  
125  
Transporting children safely  
CONTROLS  
to life. Make sure that the lower anchors are  
correctly engaged and that the child restraint  
system fits securely against the backrest.  
Locking the seat belt  
1. Pull out the seat belt strap completely.  
2. Secure the child restraint system with the  
seat belt.  
3. Allow the seat belt strap to be pulled in  
and pull it tight against the child restraint  
system. The seat belt is disabled.  
Warning  
The mounts for the lower anchors and at-  
tachment points of the child restraint system  
are intended for attaching child restraint sys-  
tems only. If other objects are attached, the  
mounts or attachment points can be dam-  
aged. There is a risk of injury or risk of dam-  
age to property. Only attach child restraint  
systems at the corresponding mounts for the  
lower anchors or attachment points.  
Unlocking the seat belt  
1. Unbuckle the seat belt buckle.  
2. Remove the child restraint system.  
3. Allow the seat belt strap to be pulled in  
completely.  
LATCH child restraint  
system  
Position  
Icon  
Meaning  
General information  
LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for Chil-  
dren.  
The corresponding icon shows  
the mounts for the lower  
LATCH anchors.  
Pay attention to the specifications, operating  
tips and safety instructions from the child re-  
straint system manufacturer when selecting,  
installing, and using LATCH child restraint sys-  
tems.  
Seats equipped with lower an-  
chors are marked with a pair  
(2) of LATCH icons.  
For vehicles equipped with a  
middle seat:  
It is not recommended to use  
the inner lower anchors of  
standard outer LATCH posi-  
tions to fasten a child restraint  
system on the middle seat.  
Use the vehicle seat belt in-  
stead for the middle seat.  
Mounts for lower anchors  
General information  
The lower anchors may be used to attach the  
CRS to the vehicle seat up to a combined child  
and CRS weight of 65 lbs/30 kg when the child  
is restrained by the internal harnesses.  
Before attaching child restraint  
systems  
Safety information  
Pull the seat belt away from the area of the  
child seat mountings.  
Warning  
If the lower anchors on child restraint system  
are not engaged correctly, the child restraint  
system will not be able to provide suitable  
protection. There is a risk of injury or danger  
126  
Transporting children safely  
CONTROLS  
Installing child restraint systems  
1. Mount child restraint system, see manufac-  
turer's information.  
Warning  
If the rear seat backrest is not locked, the  
protective effect of the child restraint system  
is limited or nonexistant. In certain situations,  
for instance braking maneuvers or in case of  
an accident, the rear seat backrest can fold  
forward. There is a risk of injury or danger to  
life. Make sure that the rear seat backrests  
are locked.  
2. Make sure that the child restraint system  
mount is correctly engaged in the lower an-  
chor on both sides.  
With comfort rear seats: installation  
of child restraint systems  
To facilitate installation, you may need to  
change additional settings:  
Warning  
1. Tilt the backrest slightly backward.  
The mounts for the lower anchors and at-  
tachment points of the child restraint system  
are intended for attaching child restraint sys-  
tems only. If other objects are attached, the  
mounts or attachment points can be dam-  
aged. There is a risk of injury or risk of dam-  
age to property. Only attach child restraint  
systems at the corresponding mounts for the  
lower anchors or attachment points.  
2. Mount child restraint system, see manufac-  
turer's information.  
3. Make sure that the child restraint system  
mount is correctly engaged in the lower an-  
chor on both sides.  
4. After installation, move the backrest back  
up slightly so that the child restraint system  
rests lightly against the backrest.  
Child restraint systems with  
tether strap  
Attachment points for upper  
retaining strap  
Icon  
Meaning  
General information  
When attaching child restraint systems to the  
upper attachment points, observe the specifi-  
cations and the operating and safety informa-  
tion of the child restraint system manufacturer.  
The respective icon shows the  
attachment point for the upper  
retaining strap. Seats with an  
upper top tether are marked  
with this icon. It is located on  
the rear seat backrest, the rear  
shelf or the rear seat.  
Safety information  
Warning  
Routing the retaining strap  
With seven seats, or third row of seats with six  
seats:  
If the upper retaining strap is incorrectly used  
for the child restraint system, the protective  
effect is reduced. There is a risk of injury. En-  
sure that the upper retaining strap is guided  
to the upper attachment point without twist-  
ing and not over sharp edges.  
127  
Transporting children safely  
CONTROLS  
3. Guide the upper retaining strap between  
or along both sides of the supports for the  
head restraint to the attachment point.  
Middle seat: raise the head restraint, if  
needed, press the button on the mounts  
for this purpose. Guide the upper retaining  
strap between or along both sides of the  
supports of the head restraint to the attach-  
ment point.  
1
Driving direction  
4. If there is a retaining strap, run it between  
the backrest and the cargo cover.  
2
3
4
5
6
Head restraint  
5. Attach the hook of the retaining strap to the  
attachment point.  
Hook for upper retaining strap  
Attachment point  
Seat backrest  
6. Tighten the retaining strap.  
Upper retaining strap  
Locking the doors and  
windows in the rear  
With six seats, second seat row:  
General information  
In certain situations it may be advisable to se-  
cure the rear doors and windows, for instance  
when transporting children.  
Doors  
1
Driving direction  
Head restraint  
2
3
4
5
6
7
Hook for upper retaining strap  
Attachment point  
Floor  
Seat backrest  
Upper retaining strap  
Push the locking lever on the rear doors up.  
Attaching the upper retaining strap  
to the attachment point  
The door can now be opened from the outside  
only.  
1. Bring the seat of the second seat row into  
the base position.  
After locking, make sure that the door cannot  
be opened from the inside.  
Reset to base position, refer to page 109.  
2. Raise the head restraint, if needed.  
128  
Transporting children safely  
CONTROLS  
Safety switch for rear  
Press the button on the driver's door.  
Various functions are locked and can-  
not be operated in the rear such as the  
power windows.  
129  
Driving  
CONTROLS  
Driving  
The Start/Stop button is located on the  
center console.  
Vehicle features and options  
This chapter describes model-specific equip-  
ment, systems, and functions that are currently  
available, or may become available in the fu-  
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.  
Driving off  
1. Turn on drive-ready state.  
2. Apply gear position.  
3. Driving off.  
Additional information:  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
When stopping  
Start/Stop button  
Selector lever positions D, S, or R  
On inclines, the system prevents rolling back  
against the set driving direction and provides  
drive-off support.  
Principle  
Pressing the Start/Stop button turns drive-  
ready state on/off.  
Driving off  
Press the accelerator pedal to drive off.  
General information  
Drive-ready state turns on when the brake  
pedal is pressed while pushing the Start/Stop  
button.  
The parking brake is released automatically.  
Depending on the load and driving situation or  
when a trailer is used, the vehicle may roll back  
slightly.  
Pressing the Start/Stop button again turns  
drive-ready state back off and turns standby  
state back on.  
Acoustic pedestrian protection  
Additional information:  
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-  
market version, Acoustic Pedestrian Protection  
generates a continuous driving noise in vehi-  
cles with electric or electrically assisted drives.  
▷
▷
Drive-ready state, refer to page 42.  
Standby state, refer to page 41.  
Overview  
▷
With a stationary vehicle and drive-ready  
state turned on, as soon as the selector  
lever position P is exited.  
▷
With electric driving up to approx.  
20 mph/30 km/h.  
A speaker system broadcasts the noise to the  
environment. As a result, other road users,  
for instance pedestrians or cyclists, can better  
perceive the vehicle.  
130  
Driving  
CONTROLS  
Display in the instrument cluster  
Auto Start/Stop function  
The display in the instrument  
cluster indicates that the Auto  
Start/Stop function is ready for  
an automatic engine start.  
Principle  
The Auto Start/Stop function helps save fuel.  
The system switches off the engine during a  
stop, for instance in traffic jam or at traffic  
lights. Drive-ready state remains switched on.  
The engine starts automatically for driving off.  
Functional limitations  
The engine does not switch off automatically in  
situations like the following:  
General information  
The Auto Start/Stop function switches to  
standby whenever the engine is started using  
the Start/Stop button.  
▷
▷
In case of a steep downhill grade.  
Brake pedal was not depressed hard  
enough.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
When the ambient temperature is high and  
automatic climate control is switched on.  
The function is activated at low speeds.  
Engine stop  
Vehicle interior has not yet been heated or  
cooled as desired.  
Functional requirements  
The engine is switched off automatically when  
stopping under the following conditions:  
When window condensation is possible and  
automatic climate control is switched on.  
Engine or other components are not at op-  
erating temperature.  
▷
The selector lever is in selector lever posi-  
tion D.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Engine cooling is required.  
Vehicle battery is deeply discharged.  
At higher elevations.  
▷
The brake pedal remains depressed while  
the vehicle is at a standstill or the vehicle is  
held by Automatic Hold.  
The hood is unlocked.  
▷
The driver's seat belt is buckled or the driv-  
er's door is closed.  
For stop-and-go traffic.  
After driving in reverse.  
Manual engine stop  
If the engine was not switched off automati-  
cally when the vehicle stopped, the engine can  
be switched off manually:  
Without Mild Hybrid technology: Wheels are  
at a sharp angle or steering wheel is being  
turned.  
▷
▷
▷
Hill Descent Control is activated.  
xOFFROAD driving mode is on.  
Selector lever position is S or R.  
▷
Depress the brake pedal forcefully again  
from the current pedal position.  
▷
Engage selector lever position P.  
When all functional preconditions are fulfilled,  
the engine switches off.  
Starting the engine  
Functional requirements  
The engine starts automatically under the fol-  
lowing preconditions:  
Air conditioning system when the  
engine is switched off  
The air flow from the air conditioning system is  
reduced when the engine is switched off.  
131  
Driving  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
By releasing the brake pedal.  
Deactivating the system manually  
When Automatic Hold is activated: step on  
the accelerator pedal.  
Principle  
In certain driving situations, e.g., traffic jams,  
it may be helpful to deactivate Auto Start/  
Stop manually. The engine will then no longer  
switch off automatically.  
Driving off  
Accelerating as usual after starting the engine.  
Safety mode  
After the engine switches off automatically, it  
will not start again automatically if any one of  
the following conditions are met:  
If this function is deactivated while the engine  
is being stopped automatically, the engine will  
start.  
Depending on vehicle equipment: Via  
button  
▷
The driver's seat belt is unbuckled and the  
driver's door is open.  
▷
Hood was unlocked.  
Some indicator lights illuminate for a varied  
length of time.  
The engine can only be started using the Start/  
Stop button.  
System limits  
Even if driving off was not intended, the deac-  
tivated engine starts up automatically in the  
following situations:  
Press the button.  
▷
LED is illuminated: Auto Start/Stop  
function is deactivated.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Vehicle interior is extremely hot when the  
cooling is on.  
▷
LED off: Auto Start/Stop function is ena-  
bled.  
Vehicle interior is extremely cold when the  
heating is on.  
When window condensation is possible and  
automatic climate control is switched on.  
Depending on vehicle equipment: Via  
iDrive  
Without mild hybrid technology:  
In case of a steering operation.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
▷
▷
▷
When changing the selector lever position  
from D or P to R.  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Drivetrain and chassis"  
5. "Auto Start/Stop"  
6. Select the desired setting.  
In case of seriously discharged vehicle bat-  
tery.  
When starting an oil level measurement.  
Via selector lever position  
The Auto Start/Stop function is also disabled  
in selector lever position S.  
132  
Driving  
CONTROLS  
Via the Driving Experience Control  
Safety information  
The Auto Start/Stop function is also deacti-  
vated in SPORT driving mode of the Driving  
Experience Control.  
Warning  
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and  
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident,  
injury, and property damage. Before leaving  
your vehicle, secure it against rolling away,  
e.g., by applying the parking brake.  
Switching off the vehicle during an  
automatic engine stop  
If the engine stops automatically, the vehicle  
can be parked safely, for example to leave it.  
1. Press the Start/Stop button.  
Selector lever positions  
▷
▷
▷
Drive-ready state is switched off.  
Standby state is switched on.  
Gear position D  
Selector lever position for normal driving. All  
gears for forward travel are activated automat-  
ically.  
Selector lever position P is engaged au-  
tomatically.  
2. Set the parking brake.  
R reverse gear  
Engage selector lever position R only when the  
vehicle is stationary.  
Automatic deactivation  
In certain situations, the Auto Start/Stop func-  
tion is deactivated automatically for safety rea-  
sons, for instance if no driver is detected.  
N Neutral  
The vehicle may be pushed or roll without  
drive, for instance in car washes, in selector  
lever position N.  
Malfunction  
The Auto Start/Stop function no longer  
switches off the engine automatically. A Check  
Control message is displayed. You may con-  
tinue driving. Have the vehicle checked by an  
authorized service center or another qualified  
service center or repair shop.  
Parking position P  
General information  
Selector lever position, for instance for parking  
the vehicle. The transmission blocks the drive  
in selector lever position P.  
Steptronic transmission  
Engage selector lever position P only when the  
vehicle is stationary.  
Principle  
The Steptronic transmission is the vehicle's  
automatic transmission. With shift paddles, it  
offers the option of manual shifting if needed.  
P is engaged automatically  
Selector lever position P is engaged automati-  
cally in situations such as the following:  
133  
Driving  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
▷
After drive-ready state is switched off, if se-  
lector lever position R, D, or S is engaged.  
The selector lever automatically returns to  
the center position when released.  
After standby is switched off, if selector  
lever position N is engaged.  
The driver's seat belt is unbuckled and the  
driver's door is opened while the vehicle is  
stationary and selector lever position D, S,  
or R is engaged.  
Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that se-  
lector lever position P is engaged and the  
parking brake is engaged. Otherwise, the vehi-  
cle may begin to move.  
Engaging selector lever position P  
Additional information:  
Press the button.  
Parking brake, refer to page 140.  
The parking brake is applied and the  
transmission lock is engaged.  
Engaging selector lever positions  
General information  
To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you  
select a gear position or reverse gear, main-  
tain pressure on the brake pedal until you are  
ready to drive off.  
Functional requirements  
Only when the drive-ready state is switched on  
and the brake pedal is depressed is it possible  
to change from selector lever position P to an-  
other selector lever position.  
Press button P.  
The transmission lock is engaged.  
The selection lever position P cannot be  
changed until all technical prerequisites are  
met.  
Rolling or pushing the vehicle  
General information  
In some situations, the vehicle is supposed to  
roll without its own drive for a short distance,  
for instance in a car wash or to be pushed.  
Engaging selector lever position D, N,  
R
1. Fasten driver's seat belt.  
2. Tilt or pull the selector lever into the desired  
direction, past a resistance point, if needed.  
134  
Driving  
CONTROLS  
Engaging selector lever position N  
S Sport mode  
Principle  
NOTICE  
The shifting points and shifting times in the  
Sport program are designed for sportier han-  
dling. The transmission, for instance shifts up  
later and the shifting times are shorter.  
Selector lever position P is automatically en-  
gaged when standby state is switched off.  
The wheels are blocked. There is a risk of  
property damage. Do not switch off standby  
if the vehicle is meant to coast, e.g., in a car  
wash.  
Activating the Sport program  
1. Switch on drive-ready state while pressing  
on the brake pedal.  
2. If necessary, release the parking brake and  
switch off Automatic Hold.  
3. Depress the brake pedal.  
4. Engage selector lever position N.  
5. Switch off drive-ready state.  
In this way, standby state remains switched  
on, and a Check Control message is dis-  
played.  
Pull the selector lever from selector lever posi-  
tion D to D/S.  
The engaged gear is displayed in the instru-  
ment cluster, for instance S1.  
The vehicle can roll.  
Selector lever position P is engaged automati-  
cally after approximately 35 minutes.  
The sport program of the transmission is acti-  
vated.  
If the system is not operational, you may not  
be able to change the selector lever position.  
Ending the Sport program  
Pull the selector lever to D/S.  
Electronically unlock the transmission lock, if  
needed.  
D is displayed in the instrument cluster.  
Additional information:  
Electronic unlocking of the transmission lock,  
refer to page 136.  
Displays in the instrument cluster  
The selector lever position is  
displayed, for example P.  
Kickdown  
Kickdown is used to achieve maximum driving  
performance.  
Step on the accelerator pedal beyond the re-  
sistance point at the full throttle position.  
135  
Driving  
CONTROLS  
The engaged gear is also displayed in the in-  
strument cluster, for instance D1.  
Electronic unlocking of the  
transmission lock  
After conservative driving in manual mode  
without acceleration or shifting via the shift  
paddles for a certain amount of time, the  
transmission switches back to automatic  
mode.  
General information  
Unlock the transmission lock electroni-  
cally, e.g., to maneuver the vehicle out of a  
hazardous area in the event of a malfunction.  
It is possible to switch into automatic mode:  
Before unlocking the transmission lock, secure  
the vehicle against rolling away, for instance  
with a wheel chock.  
▷
Pull and hold the right shift paddle until D is  
displayed in the instrument cluster.  
▷
In addition to the pulled right shift paddle,  
pull the left shift paddle.  
Engaging selector lever position N  
1. Quickly press the Start/Stop button three  
times without pressing the brake.  
Continuous manual mode  
In Sport program S, pulling a shift paddle  
switches to manual mode M permanently.  
2. Depress the brake pedal.  
3. Press the selector lever to position N until  
position N is shown on the selector lever.  
The engaged gear is displayed in the instru-  
ment cluster, for instance M1.  
An appropriate Check Control message is  
displayed.  
It is possible to switch into automatic mode:  
▷
▷
▷
Pull and hold the right shift paddle until S is  
displayed on the instrument cluster.  
4. Maneuver the vehicle from the hazardous  
area and secure it against rolling away.  
In addition to the pulled right shift paddle,  
pull the left shift paddle.  
Shift paddles  
Pull the selector lever to D/S.  
When M2 is set manually while the vehicle is  
stationary, the transmission will no longer shift  
back to M1. This shift behavior is maintained  
until M1 is engaged manually or manual mode  
M is exited.  
Principle  
The shift paddles on the steering wheel are  
used to change gears manually.  
General information  
Shifting  
Shifting  
The vehicle only shifts at suitable RPM and  
road speeds.  
Even in manual mode, the transmission shifts  
automatically in certain situations, e.g., when  
speed limits are reached.  
Temporary manual mode  
In selector lever position D, pulling a shift pad-  
dle switches into manual mode temporarily.  
▷
▷
Upshifting: pull the right shift paddle.  
Downshifting: pull left shift paddle.  
136  
Driving  
CONTROLS  
The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in-  
strument cluster, followed by the current gear.  
General information  
Using Launch Control causes premature com-  
ponent wear since this function represents a  
very heavy load for the vehicle.  
Advanced mode  
Do not turn the steering wheel when driving off  
with Launch Control.  
General information  
Depending on vehicle equipment, the Step-  
tronic transmission offers an advanced mode  
with adapted shift characteristics.  
Do not use Launch Control when breaking in  
the vehicle.  
Additional information:  
▷
▷
▷
Automatic downshift to lowest possible  
gear.  
Break-in, refer to page 328.  
If the left shift paddle is pulled and held, the  
Steptronic transmission automatically shifts  
down to the lowest possible gear.  
Functional requirement  
Launch Control can be used when the engine  
is at operating temperature. The engine is at  
operating temperature after an uninterrupted  
trip of at least 6 miles/10 km.  
Avoid automatic upshifting in manual  
mode.  
In manual mode, the Steptronic transmis-  
sion does not shift up automatically when  
speed limits are reached.  
Driving off with Launch Control  
1. Turn on drive-ready state.  
There is no downshifting for kickdown.  
2. Activate drive mode: "SPORT".  
3. Enabling the driving dynamics setting:  
"SPORT PLUS".  
Enabling advanced mode  
The advanced mode is enabled in manual  
mode when Dynamic Stability Control is disa-  
bled.  
4. With the left foot, press down forcefully on  
the brake.  
5. Engage forward gear.  
Depending on vehicle equipment, the ad-  
vanced mode can also be enabled in manual  
mode as follows, for example:  
6. Press the accelerator pedal all the way  
down and hold.  
Launch Control information is displayed in  
the instrument cluster.  
▷
▷
"SPORT PLUS": Driving mode is selected.  
Dynamic Traction Control is activated.  
7. The starting engine speed adjusts. Wait  
briefly until the engine speed is constant.  
Keep the accelerator pedal in this position.  
Launch Control  
8. Release the brake within a few seconds of  
the Launch Control information illuminating.  
Principle  
The vehicle accelerates.  
Launch Control enables optimum acceleration  
on roads with good traction under dry sur-  
rounding conditions.  
Upshifting is performed automatically as  
long as the Launch Control information is  
displayed and the accelerator pedal is not  
released.  
137  
Driving  
CONTROLS  
Launch Control stays on as long as the  
Launch Control information is displayed  
and the accelerator pedal is not released.  
▷
▷
The transmission shifts down to the  
lowest possible gear and switches to  
manual operation M.  
A dynamic setting has been activated  
for the drivetrain.  
Repeated use during a trip  
After Launch Control has been used, the trans-  
mission must cool down for a short time before  
Launch Control can be used again. Launch  
Control adjusts to the surrounding conditions  
when used again.  
2. Change gears manually.  
Automatic deactivation  
The Sprint function is ended automatically  
when driving moderately for a defined period  
of time.  
After using Launch Control  
To support driving stability, reactivate Dynamic  
Stability Control as soon as possible.  
Manual deactivation  
▷
Keep the right shift paddle pulled until  
SPRINT is no longer displayed in the instru-  
ment cluster.  
System limits  
An experienced driver may be able to achieve  
better acceleration values in DSC OFF without  
Launch Control mode.  
▷
▷
In addition to the pulled right shift paddle,  
pull the left shift paddle.  
Press the selector lever from selector lever  
position S to D.  
Steptronic Sport  
transmission: sprint function  
Driving Experience Control  
Principle  
Principle  
The Driving Experience Control influences,  
among other things, the vehicle's driving dy-  
namics.  
Depending on the equipment, the Sprint func-  
tion can be used for an upcoming acceleration  
process. The Sprint function prepares the driv-  
etrain for the acceleration process.  
The vehicle can be adjusted depending on the  
situation using various driving modes.  
General information  
When the Sprint function is activated, the re-  
sponse characteristics of the vehicle will be-  
come more dynamic.  
General information  
The following systems may be affected, for in-  
stance:  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Drivetrain.  
Activating  
1. Keep the left shift paddle pulled until  
SPRINT is displayed in the instrument clus-  
ter.  
Chassis.  
Steering.  
Display in the instrument cluster.  
Cruise control.  
138  
Driving  
CONTROLS  
Overview  
Driving modes in detail  
Buttons in the vehicle  
COMFORT  
The COMFORT driving mode is a balanced  
setting between sporty and consumption-opti-  
mized driving.  
SPORT  
The SPORT driving mode is a dynamic setting  
for more agility with an optimized suspension.  
SPORT PLUS  
The SPORT PLUS driving mode is a dynamic  
setting for maximum agility with an adjusted  
drive.  
Button  
Driving mode  
SPORT  
SPORT PLUS  
SPORT INDIVIDUAL  
ECO PRO  
In ECO PRO driving mode, consumption is op-  
timized.  
COMFORT  
INDIVIDUAL configuration  
ECO PRO  
ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL  
General information  
For some driving modes, there is another  
mode that can be adjusted individually.  
Displays in the instrument cluster  
The individual configuration set last is acti-  
vated directly when the driving mode is called  
up again.  
The selected driving mode is  
displayed in the instrument clus-  
ter.  
Configuring and resetting  
E.g., ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL drive mode:  
Activating/deactivating drive modes  
Press the button for the desired drive mode  
repeatedly until the desired drive mode is dis-  
played in the instrument cluster.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Drivetrain and chassis"  
5. "ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL"  
6. Select the desired setting.  
When changing the drive mode, the current  
drive mode is deactivated.  
Reset ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL to the standard  
settings:  
"Reset to ECO PRO STANDARD"  
139  
Driving  
CONTROLS  
Enabling INDIVIDUAL  
Press the button for the desired driving mode  
several times.  
My Programs in detail  
My Pro-  
grams  
Description  
"REAR  
This program creates an at-  
My Programs  
SEAT VIEW" mosphere that encourages  
sleep for children in the rear.  
Principle  
Various vehicle functions in the vehicle interior  
are adapted to each other in a program.  
Activating/deactivating My  
Programs  
When a program is selected, for example, the  
interior lighting, climate control, and music se-  
lection are adjusted.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "All apps"  
3. "REAR SEAT VIEW"  
Safety information  
Parking brake  
Warning  
People or animals in the vehicle can lock the  
doors from the inside and lock themselves in.  
In this case, the vehicle cannot be opened  
from the outside. There is a risk of injury.  
Take the vehicle key with you so that the ve-  
hicle can be opened from the outside.  
Principle  
The parking brake is used to prevent the vehi-  
cle from rolling away when it is parked.  
Safety information  
Warning  
Warning  
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and  
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident,  
injury, or property damage. Before leaving  
the vehicle, secure the vehicle against rolling  
away.  
For some national-market versions, unlock-  
ing from the inside is only possible with par-  
ticular knowledge.  
If persons or animals spend a lengthy time  
in the vehicle and are thereby exposed to ex-  
treme temperatures, there is a risk of injury  
or danger to life. Do not lock the vehicle from  
the outside when there are people or animals  
in it. Do not leave babies, toddlers or animals  
alone in the vehicle.  
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured  
against rolling away, follow the following:  
▷
▷
Set the parking brake.  
On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,  
turn the front wheels in the direction of  
the curb.  
▷
On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,  
also secure the vehicle, for instance with  
a wheel chock.  
140  
Driving  
CONTROLS  
The indicator light in the instrument  
cluster illuminates red.  
Warning  
The parking brake is set.  
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle  
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger  
themselves and traffic, for example, due to  
the following actions:  
While driving  
Use while driving serves as an emergency  
braking function.  
▷
▷
▷
Establishing standby.  
Releasing the parking brake.  
Pull the switch and hold it. The vehicle  
brakes hard while the switch is being  
pulled.  
Opening and closing the doors or win-  
dows.  
▷
▷
Engaging selector lever position N.  
Using vehicle equipment.  
The indicator light in the instrument  
cluster illuminates red, a signal sounds,  
and the brake lights illuminate.  
There is a risk of accident, injury, and prop-  
erty damage. Do not leave children or ani-  
mals unattended in the vehicle. Take the ve-  
hicle key with you when exiting and lock the  
vehicle.  
A Check Control message is displayed.  
The parking brake is engaged when the vehi-  
cle is stationary.  
Engaging the parking brake  
automatically  
Overview  
In some situations, the parking brake is en-  
gaged automatically, e.g., through Automatic  
Hold.  
Button in the vehicle  
Additionally, the system can be set to auto-  
matically engaging the parking brake when the  
drive-ready state is turned off.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Drivetrain and chassis"  
5. "Parking brake"  
Parking brake  
6. Select the desired setting.  
In selector lever position N, the parking brake  
will not be engaged automatically.  
Setting the parking brake  
With a stationary vehicle  
Pull the switch.  
The LED illuminates.  
141  
Driving  
CONTROLS  
Releasing the parking brake  
After a power interruption  
To reestablish parking brake operability after  
a power interruption, an initialization may be  
required.  
Releasing the parking brake manually  
1. Turn on drive-ready state.  
1. Turn on standby state.  
2.  
Press the switch while stepping on  
the brake pedal or selector lever position P  
is set.  
2.  
Pull the switch while stepping on the  
brake pedal or selector lever position P is  
set and then push.  
The LED and the indicator light go out.  
The parking brake is released.  
This process may take a few seconds. Some  
mechanical sounds associated with this proc-  
ess are normal.  
Releasing the parking brake  
automatically  
The parking brake is released automatically  
when you drive off.  
The indicator light is no longer illumi-  
nated as soon as the parking brake is  
ready for operation again.  
The LED and the indicator light go out.  
Using the parking brake via iDrive  
The parking brake can also be engaged or dis-  
engaged via iDrive. Additionally, further infor-  
mation is displayed.  
Automatic Hold  
Principle  
Automatic Hold assists the driver by automat-  
ically applying and releasing the brake, for ex-  
ample, in stop-and-go traffic.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
The vehicle is automatically held in place when  
it is stationary.  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Drivetrain and chassis"  
5. "Parking brake"  
On uphill grades the system prevents the vehi-  
cle from rolling back when driving off.  
6. Select the desired setting.  
General information  
The parking brake is automatically engaged  
under the following conditions:  
Malfunction  
If the parking brake fails or malfunctions, se-  
cure the vehicle so that it does not roll away  
before you exit.  
▷
▷
If drive-ready state is turned off.  
The driver’s door is open for more than one  
second and no pedal is pressed during this  
time.  
A Check Control message is displayed.  
Secure the vehicle against rolling away, for in-  
stance with a wheel chock, after getting out of  
the vehicle.  
▷
If the parking brake is used to brake the  
vehicle to a stop while driving.  
In selector lever position N, Automatic Hold is  
temporarily deactivated.  
142  
Driving  
CONTROLS  
Safety information  
Overview  
Button in the vehicle  
Warning  
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and  
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident,  
injury, or property damage. Before leaving  
the vehicle, secure the vehicle against rolling  
away.  
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured  
against rolling away, follow the following:  
▷
▷
Set the parking brake.  
On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,  
turn the front wheels in the direction of  
the curb.  
Automatic Hold  
▷
On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,  
also secure the vehicle, for instance with  
a wheel chock.  
Activating Automatic Hold  
1. Turn on drive-ready state.  
2.  
Press the button.  
Warning  
The LED illuminates.  
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle  
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger  
themselves and traffic, for example, due to  
the following actions:  
The indicator light illuminates green.  
Automatic Hold is activated.  
After every vehicle restart, the last se-  
lected setting is active.  
▷
▷
▷
Establishing standby.  
Releasing the parking brake.  
Opening and closing the doors or win-  
dows.  
Automatic Hold holding the vehicle  
Automatic Hold is activated and the driver’s  
door is closed.  
▷
▷
Engaging selector lever position N.  
Using vehicle equipment.  
After stopping, the vehicle is automat-  
ically secured against rolling away as  
soon as the indicator light illuminates  
green.  
There is a risk of accident, injury, and prop-  
erty damage. Do not leave children or ani-  
mals unattended in the vehicle. Take the ve-  
hicle key with you when exiting and lock the  
vehicle.  
Driving off  
Press the accelerator pedal to drive off.  
The brake is released automatically and the  
indicator light of the parking brake is no longer  
illuminated.  
143  
Driving  
CONTROLS  
Automatic parking brake application  
The parking brake is automatically set if drive-  
ready state is switched off while the vehicle is  
being held by Automatic Hold or if the vehicle  
is exited.  
The indicator light changes from green  
to red.  
The parking brake is not set automatically if  
the drive-ready state was switched off while  
the vehicle was coasting. Automatic Hold is  
temporarily deactivated in this case.  
Deactivate Automatic Hold  
Press the button.  
The LED goes out.  
The indicator light goes out.  
Automatic Hold is switched off.  
If the vehicle is being held by Automatic Hold,  
also press on the brake pedal when switching  
off.  
144  
Displays  
CONTROLS  
Displays  
thorized service center or another qualified  
service center or repair shop.  
Vehicle features and options  
This chapter describes model-specific equip-  
ment, systems, and functions that are currently  
available, or may become available in the fu-  
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.  
Overview  
Additional information:  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
Instrument cluster  
Principle  
The instrument cluster comprises various digi-  
tal displays, e.g., a speedometer, time, range,  
temperature as well as indicator and warning  
lights.  
Instrument cluster  
Display ranges on the instrument  
cluster  
General information  
The layout of the instrument cluster adapts to  
the respective driving mode. The positions of  
some displays may vary, e.g., the selector lever  
display.  
Some of the displays in the instrument cluster  
may differ from the illustrations in the Owner's  
Manual.  
1
Speedometer  
Safety information  
2
Driver assistance systems 222  
Parking assistance systems 249  
Driver Attention Camera 215  
Check Control 148  
Warning  
3
4
If the driving information displays on the in-  
strument cluster fail, e.g., the speedometer,  
do not use the vehicle. There is a risk of  
accident, injury, and property damage. Imme-  
diately park the vehicle in a safe manner.  
Turning drive-ready state off and on again  
may correct the malfunction, allowing you to  
continue driving. If the malfunction cannot be  
corrected, have the vehicle checked by an au-  
Selector lever display 133  
Gear shift indicator 156  
Selection lists 155  
5
6
Power gauge 156  
Tachometer 157  
Engine temperature 158  
145  
Displays  
CONTROLS  
Select the menu using the arrow buttons on  
the steering wheel where applicable.  
7
Outside temperature 158  
Central display range 159  
Shift lights 159  
8
3. Select the desired setting using the knurled  
wheel on the steering wheel.  
9
Drive mode 138  
10 Speed Limit Info 222  
Speed Limit Assistant 243  
11 Time 162  
Settings  
Specific displays can be configured individu-  
ally, e.g., a second actual speed.  
12 Fuel gauge 163  
Range 163  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Displays"  
Additional information:  
4. "Instrument cluster"  
5. Select the desired setting.  
Indicator/warning lights, refer to page 149.  
Operating elements on the steering  
wheel  
Live Vehicle  
Operating  
element  
Function  
Principle  
Live Vehicle is a virtual representation of your  
own vehicle with different information, e.g., ve-  
hicle status or energy flow indicators.  
Display the menu bar on the  
instrument cluster.  
Press the corresponding arrow  
key to move the selection.  
General information  
Appropriate information is shown on the con-  
trol display depending on the driving situation.  
Fault statuses are not taken into account.  
Turn knurled wheel: scroll se-  
lection up or down.  
Press knurled wheel: confirm  
selection.  
Adaptive content  
The following content is displayed in alternat-  
ing order and, if necessary, depending on the  
selected drive mode:  
Configuring the layout  
In COMFORT drive mode, the layout in the in-  
strument cluster can be individually configured  
and displayed.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Vehicle status, refer to page 163.  
Current driving condition, refer to page 164.  
Sport displays, refer to page 164.  
Efficiency trainer, refer to page 344.  
Trip data, refer to page 160.  
1.  
Press the button on the steering  
wheel.  
xOFFROAD display, refer to page 282.  
A menu bar is displayed in the instrument  
cluster.  
2. "LAYOUT"  
146  
Displays  
CONTROLS  
Static information  
Overview  
The following information may be shown per-  
manently on the control display regardless of  
the driving situation and driving mode set.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Vehicle status.  
Trip data.  
xVIEW display, refer to page 218.  
xOFFROAD display.  
Adjusting the display  
In the Live Vehicle menu, you can choose be-  
tween an adaptive display and static content.  
Head-up display views are projected onto the  
windshield through a protective glass. The pro-  
tective glass is located between the steering  
wheel and windshield.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
Displayable information  
The following information is displayed on the  
Head-up display:  
3. "Live Vehicle"  
4. "Content"  
5. Select the desired setting.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Vehicle speed.  
Navigation instructions.  
Check Control messages.  
Sport displays.  
BMW Head-up display  
Principle  
Shift lights.  
The Head-up display projects important infor-  
mation, e.g., speed, onto the windshield in the  
driver's field of view. Information can be re-  
corded without you having to look away from  
the road.  
Efficiency trainer.  
Lists and messages.  
Driver assistance systems.  
Some of this information is only displayed  
briefly as needed.  
The steering wheel buttons can be used to  
configure various views for the Head-up dis-  
play. Additional settings can be changed on  
the control display, e.g., brightness or height.  
Configuring a view  
The views for the Head-up display can be set  
independently of the display on the instrument  
cluster, e.g., a reduced view.  
General information  
Follow instructions for cleaning the Head-up  
display in the Vehicle Care chapter.  
1.  
Press the button on the steering  
Additional information:  
wheel.  
Caring for special components, refer to  
page 407.  
A menu bar is displayed in the instrument  
cluster.  
2. "HEAD-UP"  
147  
Displays  
CONTROLS  
Select the menu using the arrow buttons on  
the steering wheel where applicable.  
Special windshield  
The windshield is part of the system.  
3. Select the desired setting using the knurled  
wheel on the steering wheel.  
The shape and coating of the special wind-  
shield enable the system to function.  
If damaged, have the special windshield re-  
placed by an authorized service center or an-  
other qualified service center or repair shop.  
Turning the Head-up display on/off  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Displays"  
Check Control  
4. "Head-up display"  
5. "Head-up display"  
Principle  
The Check Control system monitors functions  
in the vehicle and notifies you of faults in the  
monitored systems.  
Settings  
Individual settings can be entered for the  
Head-up display such as for the height, bright-  
ness or illustration. In addition, individual dis-  
plays in the Head-up display can be set up  
separately such as for Driver Assistance.  
A Check Control message is displayed as  
a combination of indicator lights or warning  
lights and text messages on the instrument  
cluster and, if applicable, on the Head-up dis-  
play. In addition, an acoustic signal may sound  
and a text message may appear on the control  
display.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Displays"  
Some Check Control messages are hidden au-  
tomatically after approx. 20 seconds, but they  
will be stored. Stored Check Control messages  
can be displayed on the control display. Urgent  
Check Control messages are permanently dis-  
played but may be hidden temporarily.  
4. "Head-up display"  
5. Select the desired setting.  
Visibility of the display  
The visibility of the displays in the Head-up  
display is influenced by the following factors:  
Hiding Check Control messages  
▷
▷
Seat position.  
Permanently displayed Check Control mes-  
sages can be hidden temporarily. These mes-  
sages are automatically displayed again after  
approx. 8 seconds.  
Objects on the Head-up display's protective  
glass.  
▷
Dust or dirt on the Head-up display's pro-  
tective glass.  
An arrow icon next to the Check Control  
message indicates whether the Check Control  
message can be hidden.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Windshield dirty on inside or outside.  
Sunglasses with certain polarization filters.  
Wet road.  
To hide Check Control messages, press  
the left arrow button on the steering  
wheel.  
Unfavorable light conditions.  
If the image is distorted, have the basic set-  
tings checked by an authorized service center  
or another qualified service center or repair  
shop.  
148  
Displays  
CONTROLS  
Displaying stored Check Control  
messages  
Additional information such as the cause of a  
fault or the required action can be called up via  
Check Control.  
Indicator lights and warning  
lights  
Principle  
The indicator lights and the warning lights on  
the instrument cluster show the status of some  
functions in the vehicle. The indicator lights  
and warning lights indicate faults in monitored  
systems.  
Depending on the Check Control message, fur-  
ther help can be selected.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Vehicle status"  
General information  
Indicator lights and warning lights can illumi-  
nate in a variety of combinations and colors.  
4. "Check Control"  
5. Select the desired text message.  
Several of the lights are checked for proper  
functioning and illuminate temporarily when  
drive-ready state is turned on.  
Display  
A Check Control message is displayed in the  
instrument cluster as a text message with an  
icon.  
Red lights  
For urgent messages, an added text is auto-  
matically displayed on the control display.  
Seat belt reminder  
If several faults occur at once, the messages  
are displayed consecutively.  
Seat belt on the driver's seat is not  
buckled.  
Certain messages displayed while driving are  
displayed again after drive-ready state is  
switched off.  
Additional information:  
Seat belt reminder, refer to page 115.  
Icons in the instrument cluster indicate  
an active or saved Check Control mes-  
sage.  
Airbag system  
Warning light illuminates briefly: Indi-  
cates that the entire airbag system and  
seat belt tensioners are operational  
when drive-ready state is switched on.  
Warning light does not illuminate or illuminates  
continuously: the airbag system or the seat  
belt tensioners may not be operational. Have  
the vehicle checked immediately by an author-  
ized service center or another qualified service  
center or repair shop.  
Additional information:  
Airbags, refer to page 178.  
149  
Displays  
CONTROLS  
Warning function for pedestrians, refer to  
page 188.  
Parking brake  
The parking brake is set.  
Additional information:  
Parking brake, refer to page 140.  
Forward Collision Warning  
Warning light illuminates: risk of colli-  
sion, e.g., with a vehicle, is detected.  
Increased awareness is required.  
Brake system  
The brake pads are worn or there is  
another issue with the brake system.  
Warning light flashes and a signal sounds: risk  
of imminent collision with a vehicle detected.  
Immediately initiate braking or an evasive ma-  
neuver.  
The braking assistance may not be op-  
erational. A higher pedal force may be  
required for braking.  
Additional information:  
Have the vehicle checked immediately by an  
authorized service center or another qualified  
service center or repair shop.  
Warning function in rear-end collision situa-  
tions, refer to page 186.  
Intersection Collision Warning: vehicle  
detected from the right  
Emergency Stop Assistant  
The Emergency Stop Assistant is trig-  
gered.  
Warning light illuminates: risk of colli-  
sion with vehicle crossing from the right  
detected. Increased awareness is re-  
quired.  
Additional information:  
Emergency Stop Assistant, refer to page 206.  
Warning light flashes and a signal sounds: risk  
of imminent collision with a crossing vehicle  
detected. Immediately initiate braking or an  
evasive maneuver.  
Risk of collision  
Warning light illuminates or flashes in  
conjunction with an acoustic signal if  
there is risk of imminent collision.  
Additional information:  
Warning function at intersections, refer to  
page 190.  
Additional information:  
Forward Collision Mitigation, refer to page 183.  
Intersection Collision Warning: vehicle  
detected from the left  
Pedestrian Warning  
Warning light illuminates: risk of colli-  
sion with a person, e.g., a pedestrian  
or a cyclist. Increased awareness is re-  
quired.  
Warning light illuminates: risk of colli-  
sion with vehicle crossing from the left  
detected. Increased awareness is re-  
quired.  
Warning light flashes and a signal sounds: risk  
of imminent collision with a person, e.g., a pe-  
destrian or a cyclist. Immediately initiate brak-  
ing or an evasive maneuver.  
Warning light flashes and a signal sounds: risk  
of imminent collision with a crossing vehicle  
detected. Immediately initiate braking or an  
evasive maneuver.  
Additional information:  
Additional information:  
150  
Displays  
CONTROLS  
Warning function at intersections, refer to  
page 190.  
Immediately grasp the steering wheel with  
your hands and pay attention to the surround-  
ing traffic.  
Additional information:  
Distance Control  
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 235.  
Warning light flashes and acoustic sig-  
nal sounds: Brake and evade as neces-  
sary.  
Yellow lights  
Additional information:  
Antilock Braking System  
Distance Control, refer to page 229.  
The system may not be operational.  
The Antilock Braking System is not  
available.  
Assisted Driving Mode  
Warning light flashes and acoustic sig-  
nal sounds:  
The ability to steer may be restricted  
during full braking.  
The system is switched off or will be  
interrupted very soon.  
Have the vehicle checked immediately by an  
authorized service center or another qualified  
service center or repair shop.  
Warning light illuminates and acoustic signal  
sounds:  
Additional information:  
The driver's line of sight is not directed at the  
surrounding traffic. System interruption is im-  
minent. The system reduces the speed to a  
standstill if applicable. It is possible that the  
system will not execute any supporting steer-  
ing movements.  
Antilock Braking System, refer to page 216.  
Assisted Driving Mode  
Warning light illuminates and acoustic  
signal sounds: A system interruption is  
imminent.  
Additional information:  
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 235.  
Warning light flashes: A lane boundary has  
been crossed.  
Additional information:  
Assisted Driving Mode: Hands are not  
on steering wheel  
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 235.  
Warning light illuminates and acoustic  
signal sounds:  
Assisted Driving Mode: Hands are not  
on steering wheel  
The hands are not on the steering  
wheel or, depending on the vehicle equipment  
and national-market version, the driver's line of  
sight is not directed at the surrounding traffic.  
System interruption is imminent.  
Hands are not grasping the steering  
wheel. The system is still active.  
Grab the steering wheel with your  
hands.  
The system reduces the speed to a standstill if  
applicable.  
Additional information:  
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 235.  
It is possible that the system will not execute  
any supporting steering movements.  
151  
Displays  
CONTROLS  
Dynamic Stability Control  
Tire pressure monitor  
Warning light flashes: Dynamic Stabil-  
ity Control is regulating the driving and  
brake power. The vehicle is stabilized.  
Reduce the vehicle speed and adjust your driv-  
ing style to the road conditions.  
Warning light illuminates: Flat tire or  
tire pressure loss has been detected.  
Follow the information in the Check  
Control message.  
Warning light flashes then illuminates continu-  
ously: Flat tires or tire pressure losses cannot  
be detected.  
Warning light illuminates: Dynamic Stability  
Control has malfunctioned or is initializing.  
Driving stabilization is restricted or has failed.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Fault caused by systems or devices with  
the same radio frequency: after leaving the  
area of the interference, the system auto-  
matically becomes active again.  
If the warning light illuminates continuously,  
have the vehicle checked immediately by an  
authorized service center or another qualified  
service center or repair shop.  
In the case of tires with special appro-  
val: the tire pressure monitor was unable  
to complete the reset. Reset the system  
again.  
Additional information:  
Dynamic Stability Control, refer to page 216.  
Wheel without wheel electronics installed:  
Have it checked by an authorized service  
center or another qualified service center or  
repair shop as needed.  
The Dynamic Stability Control  
deactivated or the Dynamic Traction  
Control activated  
Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated  
or Dynamic Traction Control is acti-  
vated.  
Malfunction: have the vehicle checked by  
an authorized service center or another  
qualified service center or repair shop.  
Additional information:  
Additional information:  
▷
Dynamic Stability Control, refer to  
page 216.  
Tire pressure monitor, refer to page 362.  
▷
Dynamic Traction Control, refer to  
page 218.  
Steering system  
The steering system may not be op-  
erational.  
Flat tire monitor  
Have the vehicle checked by an author-  
ized service center or another qualified service  
center or repair shop.  
Warning light illuminates: Flat tire or  
tire pressure loss has been detected.  
Reduce your speed and stop cau-  
tiously. Avoid sudden braking and steering  
maneuvers.  
Additional information:  
Integral Active Steering, refer to page 221.  
Additional information:  
Exhaust emissions  
Flat tire monitor, refer to page 370.  
▷
The warning light illuminates:  
The exhaust gas quality is declining,  
e.g., because the fuel filler cap is  
152  
Displays  
CONTROLS  
fitted incorrectly. Have the vehicle  
checked as soon as possible.  
Parking lights  
Parking lights are switched on.  
Additional information:  
▷
The warning light flashes under certain cir-  
cumstances:  
Parking lights, low-beam headlights,  
refer to page 169.  
This indicates that there is excessive misfir-  
ing in the engine.  
Reduce the vehicle speed and have the ve-  
hicle checked immediately; otherwise, se-  
rious engine misfiring within a brief pe-  
riod can seriously damage emission control  
components, in particular the catalytic con-  
verter.  
Low-beam headlights  
Low-beam headlights are switched on.  
Additional information:  
Parking lights, low-beam headlights,  
refer to page 169.  
Have the vehicle checked by an authorized  
service center or another qualified service cen-  
ter or repair shop.  
Automatic High Beam Assistant  
Additional information:  
Low-beam headlights are switched on  
and the Automatic High Beam Assis-  
tant is activated.  
Socket for OBD on-board diagnostics, refer to  
page 389.  
High-beam headlights are switched on and  
off automatically depending on the traffic sit-  
uation.  
Acoustic pedestrian protection  
Acoustic pedestrian protection has  
malfunctioned. Increased caution when  
maneuvering.  
Additional information:  
Automatic High Beam Assistant, refer to  
page 167.  
If malfunctioning repeatedly, have the vehicle  
checked by an authorized service center or an-  
other qualified service center or repair shop.  
Lane departure warning  
Additional information:  
Depending on vehicle equipment and  
national-market version:  
Acoustic pedestrian protection, refer to  
page 130.  
Indicator light flashes: the system is  
performing a steering intervention.  
Additional information:  
Green lights  
Lane departure warning, refer to page 193.  
Turn signal  
Turn signal is on.  
Automatic Hold: vehicle is held  
automatically  
Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator  
light indicates that a turn signal bulb  
has failed.  
Automatic Hold is ready to use. The  
vehicle is automatically held in place  
when it is stationary.  
Additional information:  
Turn signal, refer to page 166.  
Additional information:  
Automatic Hold, refer to page 142.  
153  
Displays  
CONTROLS  
Automatic Hold: vehicle secured  
against rolling away  
Lane Change Assistant: lane change in  
progress  
The vehicle is automatically secured  
against rolling away after stopping.  
Arrow icon for lane change green: the  
system carries out a lane change.  
Additional information:  
Additional information:  
Automatic Hold, refer to page 142.  
Lane Change Assistant, refer to page 239.  
Cruise Control  
Lane Change Assistant: lane change  
not possible  
The system is active.  
Gray line for lane boundary on the ap-  
propriate side: system detected a lane  
change request. Lane change not cur-  
rently possible.  
Additional information:  
Cruise control, refer to page 226.  
Distance Control  
Additional information:  
Indicator light illuminates: Vehicle has  
been detected ahead of you. The vehi-  
cle icon goes out if no vehicle has been  
detected ahead of you.  
Lane Change Assistant, refer to page 239.  
Assisted Driving Mode Plus  
The system is active.  
Additional information:  
Indicator light flashes: Preceding vehicle has  
driven off.  
Additional information:  
Assisted Driving Mode Plus, refer to  
page 240.  
Distance Control, refer to page 229.  
Blue lights  
Speed Limit Assist  
The detected speed limit can be ap-  
plied with the SET button. As soon as  
the speed limit has been applied, a  
green checkmark is displayed.  
High-beam headlights  
High-beam headlights have been  
switched on.  
Additional information:  
Additional information:  
Speed Limit Assistant, refer to page 243.  
▷
▷
High-beam headlights, refer to page 166.  
Automatic High Beam Assistant, refer to  
page 167.  
Assisted Driving Mode  
The system supports the driver in  
keeping the vehicle within the lane.  
Gray lights  
Additional information:  
Seat belt reminder  
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 235.  
Seat belt on the passenger seat or an-  
other seat in the vehicle is not buckled.  
Additional information:  
154  
Displays  
CONTROLS  
Seat belts, refer to page 113.  
Additional information:  
Distance Control, refer to page 229.  
Cruise Control  
Assisted Driving Mode Plus  
The system is interrupted.  
Additional information:  
The system can be activated.  
Additional information:  
Cruise control, refer to page 226.  
Assisted Driving Mode Plus, refer to  
page 240.  
Distance Control  
Indicator light is illuminated: the system  
is interrupted.  
Selection lists  
Indicator light flashes: Conditions are  
not adequate for the system to work. The sys-  
tem was deactivated but applies the brakes  
until you actively resume control by pressing  
on the brake pedal or accelerator pedal.  
Principle  
Lists can be displayed and, if necessary, used  
for certain functions in the instrument cluster or  
the Head-up display.  
Additional information:  
▷
▷
▷
Entertainment source.  
Distance Control, refer to page 229.  
Current audio source.  
List of most recent telephone calls.  
Assisted Driving Mode  
If necessary, the corresponding menu will open  
on the control display.  
The system is on standby and does not  
manipulate steering movements.  
System activates automatically as soon  
as all function conditions are fulfilled.  
Displaying and using the list  
The selection lists can be displayed and op-  
erated using the operating elements on the  
steering wheel.  
Additional information:  
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 235.  
Operating  
elements  
Function  
Assisted Driving Mode Plus  
The system is interrupted and will acti-  
vate automatically as soon as all func-  
tional requirements are met.  
Turn the knurled wheel: dis-  
play the entertainment list or  
scroll up or down in the list.  
Additional information:  
Press knurled wheel: confirm  
selection.  
Assisted Driving Mode Plus, refer to page 240.  
Press the corresponding arrow  
key to change the entertain-  
ment source.  
White lights  
Cruise Control with Distance Control  
Show list of most recent tele-  
phone calls.  
No Distance Control because accelera-  
tor pedal is being pressed.  
155  
Displays  
CONTROLS  
Display  
Gear shift indicator  
Principle  
The shift point indicator recommends the gear  
that best suits the current driving situation. Us-  
ing the optimal gear supports an efficient driv-  
ing style.  
General information  
The gear shift indicator is active in manual  
mode M depending on vehicle equipment and  
national-market version.  
Selection lists, e.g., entertainment sources, are  
displayed on the instrument cluster.  
Example: selecting a radio station  
Displays  
Information on upshifting, downshifting, or en-  
gaged gear is displayed on the instrument  
cluster.  
1.  
Press the entertainment sources  
button.  
On vehicles without a gear shift indicator, the  
engaged gear is displayed.  
2.  
To switch to the list of radio sta-  
tions, tilt the knurled wheel to the right.  
Example Description  
3. Turn the knurled wheel to select a radio  
station.  
In continuous manual mode M:  
Optimal gear is engaged.  
4. Press the knurled wheel to confirm the se-  
lected radio station.  
With shift paddles: temporary  
manual mode.  
Example: changing the entertainment  
source  
With shift paddles: Sport program.  
Shift information.  
1.  
Press the entertainment sources  
button.  
2.  
To select an entertainment source,  
turn the knurled wheel.  
Additional information:  
Shift paddles, refer to page 136.  
3. Press the knurled wheel to confirm the se-  
lected entertainment source.  
Power gauge  
Principle  
The power gauge indicates the currently  
drawn drive power as a percentage.  
156  
Displays  
CONTROLS  
Enabling/disabling the power gauge  
Icon  
Description  
The power display or tachometer is shown de-  
pending on the driving mode selected or the  
individual configuration of the layout.  
Blue icon: cold drivetrain.  
White icon: increased drive sys-  
tem temperature, for instance  
due to sustained or high  
power demand when driving  
on mountain roads.  
Display  
Depending on vehicle equip-  
ment and national-market ver-  
sion:  
Drive power limitation defined  
via the BMW Digital Key.  
With 8-cylinder engine:  
Power is reduced while the ve-  
hicle is broken in.  
Needle in range of arrow 1: display for energy  
recovery such as while decelerating CHARGE.  
System-related functional limi-  
tation.  
Needle in range of arrow 2: the drive power in  
percent, POWER.  
A Check Control message is  
displayed in addition where ap-  
plicable.  
Reduced drive power  
The available power may be reduced due to  
certain factors. The power gauge is automati-  
cally adjusted accordingly.  
Tachometer  
In addition, the icons on the power gauge and  
tachometer indicate reduced drive power.  
General information  
Always avoid RPM in the red warning field. In  
this range, the fuel supply is reduced to protect  
the engine.  
Activating/deactivating the  
tachometer  
The tachometer is displayed depending on the  
selected drive mode or the individually config-  
ured layout.  
The tachometer display changes depending  
on the selected driving mode.  
Reduced rotational speed range  
The available rotational speed range may be  
reduced due certain factors such as a cold  
drive system. The tachometer display is auto-  
157  
Displays  
CONTROLS  
matically adjusted depending on the available  
rotational speed range.  
Additional information:  
Coolant level, refer to page 385.  
Icon Description  
Display  
Power is reduced while the vehicle is  
broken in.  
▷
Cold engine: the needle  
is in the blue temperature  
range, close to the stop of  
the temperature display, and  
the word WARM-UP is dis-  
played.  
Standby state and drive-  
ready state  
Drive at moderate RPM and  
vehicle speeds.  
OFF is displayed in the instru-  
ment cluster. Drive-ready state  
is turned off and standby state  
turned on.  
▷
▷
Normal operating temperature: the needle  
is in the middle or in the left half of the  
temperature display.  
Hot engine: the needle is in the red temper-  
ature range. In addition, a Check Control  
message is displayed.  
READY is displayed in the  
instrument cluster. The Auto  
Start/Stop function is ready for  
automatic engine start.  
Additional information:  
Coolant level, refer to page 385.  
Additional information:  
Indicator light in the instrument  
cluster  
▷
Operating state of the vehicle, refer to  
page 40.  
▷
Auto Start/Stop function, refer to page 131.  
A red indicator light is displayed.  
Engine temperature  
Outside temperature  
▷
Cold engine: the needle  
is in the blue temperature  
range, close to the stop of  
the temperature display, and  
the word WARM-UP is dis-  
played.  
General information  
If the indicator drops to +37℉/+3℃ or lower, a  
signal sounds.  
A Check Control message is displayed.  
There is an increased risk of ice on roads.  
Drive at moderate RPM and  
vehicle speeds.  
▷
▷
Normal operating temperature: the needle  
is in the middle or in the left half of the  
temperature display.  
Hot engine: the needle is in the red temper-  
ature range. In addition, a Check Control  
message is displayed.  
158  
Displays  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
Shift when all fields illuminate red at the  
latest.  
Safety information  
When the maximum rotational speed is  
reached, the entire display flashes red and  
the fuel supply is interrupted in order to  
protect the engine.  
Warning  
Even at temperatures above +37 ℉/+3 ℃  
there is a risk of icy roads, for instance on  
bridges or shady sections of the road. There  
is a risk of accident, injury, and property dam-  
age. Modify your driving style to the weather  
conditions at low temperatures.  
Central display range  
Displayable content  
The following settings can be selected:  
Shift lights  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Reduced display.  
Trip data, refer to page 160.  
Assisted View, refer to page 161.  
Navigation system route preview.  
Navigation system map view.  
G-Meter, refer to page 162.  
Entertainment.  
Principle  
Shift lights indicate the suitable upshift point at  
which optimal acceleration can be achieved.  
General information  
The shift lights are active in manual mode M  
and can be displayed on the instrument cluster  
or on the Head-up display in combination with  
the tachometer.  
Augmented View.  
Depending on vehicle equipment, Aug-  
mented View on the instrument cluster en-  
ables the visualization of driver assistance  
systems on the actual vehicle's surround-  
ings.  
Functional prerequisite  
Manual mode M must be activated for the shift  
lights to appear.  
Grey lines indicate the recommended min-  
imum distance to the preceding vehicle  
when speed control systems are deacti-  
vated.  
Display  
▷
Android Auto©.  
Depending on vehicle equipment and na-  
tional-market version, select functions of  
a compatible smartphone can also be dis-  
played, e.g., map views.  
Some contents for the central display range  
can also be configured as a view in the Head-  
up display.  
Successive fields illuminating yellow indicate  
an upcoming shift point.  
Additional information:  
Head-up display, refer to page 147.  
Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertain-  
ment, and Communication, refer to page 6.  
159  
Displays  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
▷
Travel time depending on the config-  
ured interval.  
Configuring the central display  
range  
The content of the central display range on the  
instrument cluster can be configured individu-  
ally, for instance the trip data display.  
Distance traveled depending on the  
configured interval.  
Distance traveled in Coasting mode.  
Displaying trip data continuously  
1.  
Press the button on the steering  
1.  
Apps menu  
wheel.  
2. "Vehicle"  
A menu bar is displayed in the instrument  
cluster.  
3. "Live Vehicle"  
4. "Content"  
5. "Trip data"  
2. "CONTENT"  
Select the menu using the arrow buttons on  
the steering wheel where applicable.  
Display in the instrument cluster  
Information on consumption and distance cov-  
ered can be displayed in the instrument clus-  
ter.  
3. Select the desired setting using the knurled  
wheel on the steering wheel.  
Trip data  
Principle  
The trip data display provides various informa-  
tion about the trip, e.g., average consumption  
or trip distance.  
General information  
The trip data can be displayed on the control  
display and in the instrument cluster.  
▷
▷
▷
Current consumption, arrow 1.  
Average consumption, arrow 2.  
Depending on the setting in the Live Vehicle  
menu, the trip data is shown on the control  
display.  
Distance traveled depending on the config-  
ured interval, arrow 3.  
The icon is displayed when the vehicle  
is in Coasting mode.  
The values can be displayed and reset de-  
pending on different intervals.  
▷
Total mileage, arrow 4.  
Display on the control display  
Current consumption  
General information  
The following trip data is shown on the control  
display:  
The current fuel consumption display allows  
you to check the current fuel consumption, e.g.,  
to drive economically and in an environmen-  
tally-friendly manner.  
▷
▷
Configured interval for displaying trip data.  
Average fuel consumption depending  
on the configured interval.  
Mild hybrid technology: Depending on vehi-  
cle equipment, the fuel supply is interrupted  
160  
Displays  
CONTROLS  
and the engine continues to run when driving  
slowly or even when the vehicle is stationary.  
In this case, the internal combustion engine is  
operated electrically.  
The trip data is displayed.  
Average consumption  
The average fuel consumption is displayed de-  
pending on how the intervals for displaying trip  
data are configured.  
Adjusting the display of the trip data  
The intervals for the display of the trip data  
in the instrument cluster and on the control  
display are adjustable.  
2. Press and hold the button until the values  
are reset.  
Via iDrive:  
1.  
Apps menu  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "System settings"  
4. "Time period for trip data"  
5. "Reset Individual"  
3. "System settings"  
4. "Time period for trip data"  
5. "Values"  
The average values and counters are reset.  
Once the average values and counters have  
been reset, the following interval is automati-  
cally activated:  
6. Select the desired setting:  
▷
▷
▷
▷
"Since start of trip": the values are auto-  
matically reset approx. four hours after  
the vehicle has come to a standstill.  
"Since Individual ( )"  
"Since last refuel": the values are au-  
tomatically reset after refueling with a  
larger quantity of fuel.  
Assisted View  
"Since factory": the values since the  
time of the factory delivery are dis-  
played.  
Principle  
With Assisted View, information on driver as-  
sistance systems can be displayed on the in-  
strument cluster with a vehicle animation.  
"Since Individual": the values since the  
last manual reset are displayed. The  
values can be reset at any time.  
Information on parking and maneuvering is  
displayed in the Assisted View whenever the  
parking assistance system is active.  
Resetting average values manually  
The following interval can be reset manually at  
any time:  
"Since Individual ( )"  
Using the button on the left steering column  
switch:  
1. Press the button.  
161  
Displays  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
Cameras, refer to page 35.  
Safety information  
Radar sensors, refer to page 36.  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the  
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready  
to take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
G-Meter  
General information  
The G-Meter indicates the forces that are ap-  
plied in longitudinal and transverse direction  
on the vehicle occupants while driving.  
The display can be configured on the central  
display range of the instrument cluster.  
The values are automatically reset whenever  
you start a new drive.  
Additional information:  
General  
Central display area, refer to page 159  
You can configure how Assisted View is dis-  
played on the central display range.  
Manually reseting G-Meter values  
1. Display the G-Meter on the instrument  
cluster.  
Additional information:  
Central display area, refer to page 159  
Display  
2.  
Press and hold the knurled wheel  
on the steering wheel until the values are  
reset.  
Date and time  
Various settings can be applied for the date  
and time display such as the date format.  
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-  
market version, the time zone can be set or  
automatic time zone enabled. With automatic  
time setting, the time, date and, if necessary,  
the time zone are updated automatically.  
An example of active Driver Assistance: Indica-  
tor and warning lights for Distance Control and  
Assisted Driving Mode are displayed. At the  
same time, the Distance Control is animated in  
Assisted View.  
1.  
Apps menu  
System limits  
2. "Vehicle"  
The system's detection capability is limited.  
3. "System settings"  
4. "Date and time"  
5. Select the desired settings.  
Only objects that are detected by the system  
are taken into account.  
Additional information:  
162  
Displays  
CONTROLS  
The Check Control message appears  
continuously below a range of approx.  
30 miles/50 km.  
Fuel gauge  
Principle  
The current fill level of the fuel tank is dis-  
played.  
Safety information  
NOTICE  
General information  
With a range below 30 miles/50 km, the  
engine may no longer have sufficient fuel.  
Engine functions are not ensured anymore.  
There is a risk of property damage. Refuel  
promptly.  
Vehicle inclination may cause the display to  
vary.  
Additional information:  
Refueling, refer to page 346.  
Display  
Display  
An arrow beside the fuel pump  
icon shows which side of the ve-  
hicle the fuel filler flap is on.  
The current range is displayed  
as a numerical value next to the  
fuel gauge.  
The current range is displayed  
as numerical value.  
Indicator light in the instrument  
cluster  
Setting the units of  
measurement  
The yellow indicator light illuminates,  
once the fuel reserve is reached.  
Depending on the national-market version, you  
can set the units of measurement for some  
values, for instance consumption, distances,  
and temperature.  
Range  
1.  
Apps menu  
Principle  
2. "Vehicle"  
The range indicates the distance that can still  
be covered with the current tank of fuel.  
3. "System settings"  
4. "Units"  
5. Select the desired setting.  
General information  
The estimated range with remaining fuel is  
permanently displayed on the instrument clus-  
ter.  
Vehicle status  
With a low remaining range, a Check Control  
message is briefly displayed. A low remaining  
range means that engine functions cannot al-  
ways be ensured for sporty driving, e.g., when  
cornering at speed.  
General information  
The status can be displayed and actions per-  
formed for several systems such as for Check  
Control.  
163  
Displays  
CONTROLS  
Depending on the situation, additional in-  
formation on adaptive recuperation is dis-  
played.  
Displaying vehicle status  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
▷
Efficient rolling with engine switched off.  
3. "Vehicle status"  
Additional information:  
▷
▷
Adaptive recuperation, refer to page 342.  
Coasting, refer to page 343.  
Overview  
Icon  
Description  
Functional requirements  
"FLAT TIRE MONITOR": Sta-  
tus of the flat tire monitor, refer  
to page 370.  
▷
COMFORT or ECO PRO driving mode is se-  
lected.  
▷
For Live Vehicle, select the following set-  
ting: "Adaptive content".  
"Tire Pressure Monitor": status  
of the Tire Pressure Monitor,  
refer to page 362.  
Display  
"Engine oil level": electronic  
oil measurement, refer to  
page 383.  
"Check Control": displaying  
stored Check Control mes-  
sages, refer to page 148.  
"Service": display of the service  
notifications, refer to page 165.  
An example:  
The adaptive recuperation is active, arrow 1.  
Current driving condition  
The vehicle battery is charged when the vehi-  
cle decelerates, arrow 2.  
General information  
The current driving condition is displayed dy-  
namically while driving in the Live Vehicle  
menu on the control display.  
Sport displays  
The following states can be displayed:  
Principle  
▷
▷
▷
Driving.  
The Sport displays especially support a sporty  
driving style.  
Coasting mode: "EFFICIENT COASTING"  
"CHARGING BATTERY"  
With mild hybrid technology:  
Adaptive recuperation.  
Functional requirements  
▷
▷
SPORT driving mode is selected.  
▷
The following setting is selected for Live  
Vehicle:"Adaptive content"  
164  
Displays  
CONTROLS  
Make sure that the vehicle's date and time are  
set correctly.  
Display  
The sport displays are displayed in the Live  
Vehicle menu on the control display.  
1.  
Apps menu  
The following information is displayed:  
2. "Vehicle"  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Torque.  
3. "Vehicle status"  
4. "Service"  
Power.  
Boost pressure.  
Engine oil temperature.  
5. "Vehicle inspection"  
6. "Date:"  
7. Select the desired setting.  
Service  
Principle  
The service notifications indicate recom-  
mended maintenance work.  
General information  
After turning on, the next service appointment  
or the distance remaining until the next servic-  
ing is displayed briefly on the instrument clus-  
ter.  
A service advisor can read out the mainte-  
nance work from the vehicle key.  
Display  
More information may be displayed on the  
control display.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Vehicle status"  
4. "Service"  
Maintenance measures as well as legally  
mandated inspections are displayed.  
5. Select the desired entry.  
Entering appointment dates  
Dates for mandatory vehicle inspections can  
be entered.  
165  
Light and view  
CONTROLS  
Light and view  
4. If necessary, "Additional settings"  
5. "One-touch turn signal"  
Vehicle features and options  
This chapter describes model-specific equip-  
ment, systems, and functions that are currently  
available, or may become available in the fu-  
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.  
6. Select the desired setting.  
Brief flashing  
Press the lever to the resistance point and hold  
it there for as long as you want the turn signal  
to flash.  
Additional information:  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
High-beam headlights,  
headlight flasher  
Turn signal  
Turn signal in exterior mirror  
Press the lever forward or pull it backward.  
When driving and during operation of the turn  
signals or hazard warning system, do not fold  
in the exterior mirrors so that the turn signal  
lamps on the exterior mirror are easy to see.  
Flashing  
▷
▷
High-beam headlights on, arrow 1.  
The high-beam headlights illuminate when  
the low-beam headlights are switched on.  
High-beam headlights off/headlight flasher,  
arrow 2.  
Press the lever past the resistance point.  
The indicator light in the instrument  
cluster illuminates when the high-beam  
headlights are turned on.  
One-touch signaling  
Lightly tap the lever up or down.  
The one-touch signaling duration can be ad-  
justed.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Exterior lighting"  
166  
Light and view  
CONTROLS  
The indicator light in the instrument  
cluster is illuminated when the low-  
beam headlights are switched on.  
Automatic High Beam  
Assistant  
The headlights are automatically changed be-  
tween low-beam headlights and high-beam  
headlights.  
Principle  
The Automatic High Beam Assistant detects  
other road users early on and automatically  
switches the high-beam headlights on or off  
depending on the traffic situation.  
The blue indicator light in the instru-  
ment cluster illuminates when the sys-  
tem switches on the high-beam head-  
lights.  
General information  
Interruption of the journey with activated Au-  
tomatic High Beam Assistant: the Automatic  
High Beam Assistant remains activated when  
continuing the journey.  
The Automatic High Beam Assistant ensures  
that the high-beam headlights are switched  
on, whenever the traffic situation allows. In the  
low speed range, the high-beam headlights  
are not switched on by the system.  
The Automatic High Beam Assistant is deacti-  
vated when manually switching the high-beam  
headlights on and off.  
The system responds to light from oncoming  
traffic and traffic driving ahead of you, and to  
ambient lighting, for instance in towns and cit-  
ies.  
To reactivate the Automatic High Beam Assis-  
tant, press the button on the turn signal lever.  
The high-beam headlights can be switched on  
and off manually at any time.  
Deactivating Automatic High Beam  
Assistant  
Functional requirements  
▷
Automatic headlight control is activated.  
▷
Low-beam headlights are switched on.  
Activating Automatic High Beam  
Assistant  
Press the button on the turn signal lever.  
Sensitivity of the Automatic High  
Beam Assistant  
General information  
The sensitivity of the Automatic High Beam  
Assistant can be adjusted.  
Press the button on the turn signal lever.  
167  
Light and view  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
In very unfavorable weather conditions  
such as fog or heavy precipitation.  
Safety information  
When detecting poorly-lit road users such  
as pedestrians, cyclists, horseback riders  
and wagons; when driving close to train or  
ship traffic; or at animal crossings.  
Warning  
If adjustments have been made or the sen-  
sitivity has been modified, oncoming traffic  
may be momentarily blinded. There is a risk  
of accident, injury, and property damage. If  
adjustments have been made and the sen-  
sitivity has been modified, make sure that  
oncoming traffic is not momentarily blinded.  
Switch off the high-beam headlights man-  
ually if required.  
▷
In tight curves, on hilltops or in depressions,  
in crossing traffic or half-obscured oncom-  
ing traffic on highways.  
▷
▷
In poorly-lit towns and cities or in the pres-  
ence of highly reflective signs.  
When the windshield in the area in front  
of the interior mirror is fogged up, dirty or  
covered with stickers, etc.  
Functional requirements  
▷
▷
▷
Setting at standstill only.  
Drive-ready state is switched on.  
Light is turned off.  
Exterior lighting  
Overview  
Increasing sensitivity  
Push the turn signal lever to the front for ap-  
proximately 10 seconds.  
Buttons in the vehicle  
A Check Control message is displayed. The  
system responds more sensitively.  
Resetting the sensitivity  
Push the turn signal lever to the front again  
for approx. 10 seconds or switch off the drive-  
ready state.  
The sensitivity of the Automatic High Beam  
Assistant is reset to the factory settings.  
Icon  
Function  
Exterior lighting menu.  
System limits  
The Automatic High Beam Assistant cannot  
replace the driver's personal judgment of when  
to use the high-beam headlights. When appro-  
priate, dim the high beams manually.  
Automatic headlight control.  
Low-beam headlights.  
Exterior lighting off.  
The system may not be fully operational in  
the following situations, and driver intervention  
may be necessary:  
Exterior lighting off.  
168  
Light and view  
CONTROLS  
If the low-beam headlights are switched on  
manually, the automatic headlight control is  
deactivated.  
Functions via iDrive  
Icon  
Function  
Automatic headlight control.  
Activate automatic headlight control  
Press the button on the light switch.  
Low-beam headlights.  
Parking lights.  
The LED in the button illuminates.  
The indicator light in the instrument  
cluster is illuminated when the low-  
beam headlights are switched on.  
Exterior lighting off.  
System limits  
The automatic headlight control cannot re-  
place your personal judgment of lighting condi-  
tions.  
Left roadside parking light.  
Right roadside parking light.  
For example, the sensors are unable to detect  
fog or hazy weather. In these situations, turn  
the lights on manually.  
Buttons on the vehicle key  
Parking lights, low-beam  
headlights and roadside  
parking lights  
Icon  
Function  
Interior lighting.  
Parts of the exterior lighting.  
General information  
Pathway lighting.  
If the driver's door is opened when the drive-  
ready state is switched off, the exterior lighting  
is automatically switched off after a period of  
time.  
Driving lights automatic  
Parking lights  
Principle  
General information  
The parking lights can only be turned on at low  
speeds.  
The low-beam headlights are switched on and  
off automatically depending on the ambient  
brightness, for example in tunnels, in twilight  
or if there is precipitation.  
Turning on parking lights  
General information  
A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can  
cause the lights to be turned on.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
169  
Light and view  
CONTROLS  
3. "Exterior lighting"  
4. "Parking light"  
Turning off low-beam headlights  
Depending on the national-market version, the  
low-beam headlights can be turned off in the  
low speed range:  
The indicator light in the instrument  
cluster illuminates.  
The vehicle is illuminated on all sides.  
▷
Press the button on the light switch.  
Do not use the parking lights for extended pe-  
riods; otherwise, they might drain the vehicle  
battery and it would then be impossible to  
switch on drive-ready state.  
▷
▷
Press and hold the button on the  
light switch.  
Turn off light via iDrive.  
Turning off parking lights  
The following options are available to turn off  
the parking lights:  
Roadside parking lights  
When the vehicle is parked, a one-sided road-  
side parking light can be switched on.  
▷
▷
Press the button on the light switch.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Exterior lighting"  
Press and hold the button on the  
light switch.  
4. "Left roadside park. light" or "Right  
roadside park. light"  
▷
▷
Turn off light via iDrive.  
Turn on drive-ready state.  
After the drive-ready state is switched on,  
the automatic headlight control will be acti-  
vated.  
Welcome lights  
Principle  
The welcome light turns on automatically for  
a limited period of time when approaching or  
unlocking the vehicle.  
Low-beam headlights  
Turning on low-beam headlights  
Press the button on the light switch.  
General information  
Depending on the equipment, the exterior  
lighting of the vehicle can be set individually.  
The low-beam headlights illuminate when  
drive-ready state is switched on.  
Activating/deactivating welcome  
light  
The indicator light in the instrument  
cluster illuminates.  
1.  
Apps menu  
Press the button again to switch on the low-  
beam headlights when the standby state is  
switched on.  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Exterior lighting"  
4. If necessary, "Additional settings"  
5. Depending on the equipment, select the  
following setting:  
170  
Light and view  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
"Welcome and goodbye"  
ing the vehicle in order to illuminate the area  
surrounding the vehicle.  
When unlocking the vehicle, individual  
lighting functions are turned on.  
Switching pathway lighting on  
"BMW Iconic Glow"  
▷
After switching off the drive-ready state,  
briefly push the turn signal lever forward.  
The radiator grille lighting can only be  
adjusted when the vehicle is stationary  
and the drive-ready state is switched  
off.  
▷
Press and hold the button on the  
vehicle key for approx. 1 second.  
Turning on the welcome light  
▷
Automatically on approach.  
Setting the duration  
▷
During unlocking.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Exterior lighting"  
▷
Press the button on the vehicle key  
with the vehicle locked.  
4. If necessary, "Additional settings"  
5. "Pathway lighting"  
Depending on the settings, the interior  
lighting and parts of the exterior lighting will  
be turned on.  
6. Select the desired setting.  
The function is not available for the first  
10 seconds after locking.  
Daytime driving lights  
Welcome Light Carpet  
General information  
The daytime driving lights illuminate when  
drive-ready state is switched on.  
Activating/deactivating daytime  
driving lights  
In some countries, daytime driving lights are  
mandatory, so it may not be possible to deacti-  
vate the daytime driving lights in front.  
The light source is located in the position indi-  
cated.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
Keep the light source clean and unobstructed.  
3. "Exterior lighting"  
4. If necessary, "Additional settings"  
5. Depending on vehicle equipment or na-  
tional-market version:  
Pathway lighting  
▷
▷
▷
"Daytime driving lights"  
"Rear daytime driving lights"  
"BMW Iconic Glow"  
Principle  
For the pathway lighting, the exterior lighting  
turns on for a certain period of time after leav-  
171  
Light and view  
CONTROLS  
Adaptive lighting functions  
Adaptive headlight range  
control  
Principle  
The adaptive headlight range control feature  
balances out acceleration and braking proc-  
esses as well as the vehicle load conditions in  
order to avoid blinding oncoming traffic.  
Adaptive lighting functions enable dynamic il-  
lumination of the road.  
General information  
The adaptive lighting functions may consist of  
one system or multiple systems, depending on  
the equipment version:  
Instrument lighting  
▷
Cornering light.  
Functional requirement  
The brightness can only be adjusted in dark-  
ness and with turned on parking lights or low-  
beam headlights.  
Activating the adaptive lighting  
functions  
Press the button on the light switch.  
Setting the brightness  
1.  
Apps menu  
The LED in the button illuminates.  
2. "Vehicle"  
The adaptive lighting functions are active  
when the drive-ready state is switched on.  
3. "Interior lighting"  
4. "Cockpit brightness at night"  
5. Select the desired setting.  
Cornering light  
Interior lighting  
Principle  
In tight curves, for instance on mountainous  
roads or when turning, an additional cornering  
light is switched on that illuminates the inside  
of the curve when the vehicle is moving below  
a certain speed.  
General information  
Depending on the equipment version, interior  
lights, footwell lights, entry lights, ambient  
lighting, and speaker lighting are automatically  
controlled.  
General information  
The cornering light is automatically switched  
on depending on the steering-wheel angle or,  
where applicable, the use of turn signals.  
Overview  
When driving in reverse, the cornering lights  
may be automatically switched on regardless  
of the steering-wheel angle.  
172  
Light and view  
CONTROLS  
Reading lights  
Interior lights  
Ambient light  
General information  
Depending on the equipment version, lighting  
can be adjusted for some lights in the car's  
interior.  
Turning interior lights on/off  
Using the button:  
Activating/deactivating ambient  
light  
Press the button.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
To switch off permanently: press the button  
and hold for approx. 3 seconds.  
3. "Interior lighting"  
4. If necessary, "Ambience"  
5. "Ambient lighting"  
The interior lights in the rear of the vehicle  
can be switched on and off independently. The  
button is located in the rear headliner.  
Turning ambient light on/off  
Via iDrive:  
The ambient light is switched on when the ve-  
hicle is unlocked, and switched off when the  
vehicle is locked.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Interior lighting"  
4. "Reading light"  
If the ambient light was deactivated via iDrive,  
it will not be turned on when the vehicle is  
unlocked.  
5.  
Tap on the icon.  
Selecting the color  
Turning reading lights on/off  
Using the button:  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
Press the button.  
3. "Interior lighting"  
4. If necessary, "Ambience"  
5. "Color"  
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the read-  
ing lights are located next to the interior lights  
in the front and rear.  
6. Select the desired setting.  
Via iDrive:  
Setting the brightness  
1.  
Apps menu  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Interior lighting"  
4. "Reading light"  
5. Tap the desired seat.  
3. "Interior lighting"  
4. If necessary, "Ambience"  
5. "Brightness"  
6. Select the desired setting.  
173  
Light and view  
CONTROLS  
Dynamic light  
Turning speaker lighting on/off  
The speaker lighting is switched on when the  
vehicle is unlocked, and switched off when the  
vehicle is locked.  
Certain situations, for example incoming calls  
or obstacles detected when opening doors, are  
indicated by light effects. If the ambient light is  
disabled, the light effects are still displayed.  
1.  
Apps menu  
Window wiper system  
Safety information  
Warning  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Interior lighting"  
4. If necessary, "Ambience"  
5. "Lighting effects"  
6. Select the desired setting.  
If the wipers start moving in the folded away  
state, body parts can be jammed or damage  
may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is a  
risk of injury or risk of damage to property.  
Make sure that the vehicle is switched off  
when the wipers are in the folded-away state  
and the wipers are folded in when switching  
on.  
Reduced for night drive  
Some lights of the interior lighting are reduced  
when the vehicle is driven in the dark.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Interior lighting"  
4. If necessary, "Ambience"  
5. "Reduced for night driving"  
NOTICE  
The wiper blades can wear out or become  
damaged prematurely when wiping on a dry  
window for a longer period of time. The wiper  
motor can overheat. There is a risk of prop-  
erty damage. Do not use the wipers when the  
window is dry.  
Panoramic glass sunroof, lighting  
If the panoramic glass sunroof is opened or the  
sun protection is closed, the lighting in the area  
concerned is switched off.  
Speaker lighting  
NOTICE  
If the wipers are frozen to the windshield,  
the wiper blades can be torn off and the  
wiper motor can overheat when switching on.  
There is a risk of property damage. Defrost  
the windshield prior to switching the wipers  
on.  
Principle  
Some speakers in the vehicle are illuminated.  
General information  
When the speakers are muted, the speaker  
lighting is turned off. When the ambient light-  
ing effects are enabled, the speakers illuminate  
white.  
174  
Light and view  
CONTROLS  
Turning on window wiper system  
Rain sensor  
Principle  
The rain sensor automatically controls the  
wiper operation depending on the intensity of  
the rainfall.  
General information  
The sensor is located on the windshield, di-  
rectly in front of the interior mirror.  
Press the lever up until the desired position is  
reached.  
Safety information  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Rest position of the wipers, position 0.  
Rain sensor mode, position 1.  
Normal wiper speed, position 2.  
Fast wiper speed, position 3.  
NOTICE  
If the rain sensor is activated, the wipers  
can accidentally start moving in car washes.  
There is a risk of property damage. Deacti-  
vate the rain sensor in car washes.  
When the journey is interrupted with the win-  
dow wiper system turned on: when the journey  
continues, the wipers resume at their previous  
speed.  
Activating rain sensor  
Turning off the window wiper  
system and flick wipe  
Press lever up once from the 0 position, ar-  
row 1.  
Wiping operation is started.  
Press the lever down.  
The LED in the wiper lever is illuminated.  
▷
Turning off: press the lever down until it  
reaches the 0 position.  
In frosty conditions, wiping operation may not  
start.  
▷
Flick wipe: press the lever down from the 0  
position.  
Deactivating rain sensor  
Press lever back into the 0 position.  
The lever automatically returns to its 0 po-  
sition when released.  
175  
Light and view  
CONTROLS  
Adjusting the rain sensor sensitivity  
Cleaning the windshield  
Turn the knurled wheel to adjust the sensitivity  
of the rain sensor.  
Pull the lever.  
The washer fluid is sprayed on the windshield,  
and the wipers are turned on briefly.  
▷
▷
Upward: high rain sensor sensitivity.  
Downward: low rain sensor sensitivity.  
Windshield washer nozzles  
The windshield washer nozzles are automati-  
cally heated while standby state is switched  
on.  
Window washer system  
Safety information  
Rear wiper  
Warning  
The washer fluid can freeze onto the window  
at low temperatures and obstruct the view.  
There is a risk of accident. Only use the win-  
dow washer system when the washer fluid  
will not freeze. Use washer fluid with anti-  
freeze, if needed.  
Switching on the rear wiper  
NOTICE  
When the washer fluid reservoir is empty,  
the washer pump cannot work as intended.  
There is a risk of property damage. Do not  
use the washer system when the washer  
fluid reservoir is empty.  
Turn the outer switch upward.  
▷
▷
Resting position of wiper, position 0.  
Intermittent operation, arrow 1. When re-  
verse gear is engaged, the system switches  
to continuous operation.  
Clean the rear window  
Turn the outer switch in the desired direction.  
176  
Light and view  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
In rest position: Turn the switch downward,  
arrow 3. The switch returns to its rest posi-  
tion when released.  
Folding out the wipers  
1. Turn on standby state.  
2. Press and hold the wiper lever down until  
the wipers stop in a nearly vertical position.  
In intermittent operation: turn the switch  
further, arrow 2. The switch automatically  
returns to its interval position when re-  
leased.  
The function is deactivated if the washer fluid  
reservoir fill level is low.  
Fold-out position of the wipers  
Principle  
In the fold-out position, the wipers can be  
folded out from the windshield, which is impor-  
tant, for instance, when changing the wiper  
blades or for folding away under frosty condi-  
tions.  
3. Fold the wipers all the way out from the  
windshield.  
Safety information  
Warning  
If the wipers start moving in the folded away  
state, body parts can be jammed or damage  
may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is a  
risk of injury or risk of damage to property.  
Make sure that the vehicle is switched off  
when the wipers are in the folded-away state  
and the wipers are folded in when switching  
on.  
Folding in the wipers  
1. Fold the wipers back in onto the windshield.  
2. Switch on standby state and press and  
hold the wiper lever down again.  
Wipers return to their rest position and are  
ready again for operation.  
NOTICE  
If the wipers are frozen to the windshield,  
the wiper blades can be torn off and the  
wiper motor can overheat when switching on.  
There is a risk of property damage. Defrost  
the windshield prior to switching the wipers  
on.  
177  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
Safety  
available, or may become available in the fu-  
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.  
Vehicle features and options  
Additional information:  
This chapter describes model-specific equip-  
ment, systems, and functions that are currently  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
Airbags  
1
Front airbag, driver  
Front airbag, front passenger  
Head airbag  
4
5
Side airbag  
Knee airbag  
2
3
Front airbags  
Side airbag  
In the event of a side collision, the side airbag  
protects the side of the body in the chest and  
lap area.  
The front airbag helps protect the driver and  
front passenger in the event of a frontal impact  
in which the seat belts alone would not provide  
adequate protection.  
Depending on the national-market version:  
In the event of a side collision, the side airbag  
in the rear protects the chest and lap area on  
178  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
the side of the bodies of the occupants in the  
outer rear seats.  
3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions to keep the  
risk of injury to your hands or arms as low  
as possible when the airbag is deployed.  
Head airbag  
In the event of a side collision, the head airbag  
protects the head.  
▷
▷
Adjust seat and steering wheel so that  
hands can be crossed over the steering  
wheel. Select the settings so that the  
shoulder rests against the backrest when  
crossing the hands and the upper body  
is as far back as possible while still main-  
taining a comfortable grip on the steering  
wheel.  
Ejection Mitigation  
The head airbag system is designed as an  
ejection mitigation countermeasure to reduce  
the likelihood of ejections of vehicle occupants  
through side windows during rollovers or side  
collision events.  
Make sure that the front passenger is sit-  
ting correctly, i.e., with their feet and legs in  
the footwell, not resting on the dashboard.  
▷
▷
Make sure that occupants keep their heads  
away from the side airbag.  
Knee airbag  
Depending on the national-market version:  
There should be no additional persons, an-  
imals or objects between an airbag and a  
person.  
The knee airbag protects the legs in the event  
of a frontal impact.  
▷
▷
Dashboard and windshield on the pas-  
senger's side must stay clear - do not at-  
tach adhesive film or coverings and do not  
attach brackets or cables, for instance for  
navigation devices or mobile phones.  
Protective effect  
General information  
Airbags are not deployed in every impact sit-  
uation, e.g., in less severe accidents.  
Do not bond the airbag cover panels with  
adhesive, do not cover them or modify  
them in any way.  
Information on optimum protective  
effect of the airbags  
▷
▷
Do not use the cover of the front airbag on  
the passenger's side as a storage area.  
Warning  
Keep storage compartments near the air-  
bags closed, e.g., glove compartment or  
center armrest.  
If the seat position is incorrect, the seat  
belts are fastened incorrectly or the deploy-  
ment area of the airbags is impaired, the  
airbag system cannot provide protection as  
intended and may cause additional injuries  
due to deployment. There is a risk of injury  
or danger to life. Follow the information on  
achieving the optimum protective effect of the  
airbag system.  
▷
Do not place slip covers, seat cushions,  
or other objects on the front seats unless  
they are specifically designed for seats with  
integrated airbags.  
▷
▷
Do not hang pieces of clothing such as  
jackets over the backrests.  
Do not modify individual components or  
wiring. This also applies to steering wheel  
covers, the dashboard, and the seats.  
▷
▷
▷
Keep a distance from the airbags.  
Fasten the seat belts correctly.  
▷
Do not disassemble the airbag system.  
Always grasp the steering wheel on the  
steering wheel rim. Hold your hands at the  
179  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
Even when you follow all instructions very  
closely, injury from contact with the airbags  
cannot be fully ruled out in certain situations.  
Malfunction  
▷
Warning light does not illuminate  
when drive-ready state is turned on.  
The ignition and inflation noise may lead  
to short-term and, in most cases, temporary  
hearing impairment in sensitive occupants.  
▷
The warning light illuminates con-  
tinuously.  
The airbag system or the seat belt tension-  
ers may not be operational. Have the vehicle  
checked immediately by an authorized service  
center or another qualified service center or  
repair shop.  
Vehicle modifications for a person with disabil-  
ities may affect the air bag system; contact  
BMW Customer Relations for further informa-  
tion.  
Warnings and information on the airbags are  
also found on the sun visors.  
Setting the front seat positions  
Operational readiness of the airbag  
system  
The power that deploys the driver's/front  
passenger airbags depends on the position of  
the driver's/front passenger seat.  
Safety information  
To maintain the accuracy of this function, cali-  
brate the electrical front seats as soon as a re-  
spective message appears on the control dis-  
play.  
Warning  
Individual components can be hot after de-  
ployment of the airbag system. There is a risk  
of injury. Do not touch individual components.  
Additional information:  
Seats, refer to page 104.  
Automatic deactivation of  
the front passenger airbags  
Warning  
Improperly executed work can lead to failure,  
malfunction or unintentional deployment of  
the airbag system. In the case of a malfunc-  
tion, the airbag system might not deploy as  
intended despite the accident severity. There  
is a risk of injury or danger to life. Have the  
airbag system checked, repaired, disassem-  
bled, and scrapped by an authorized service  
center or another qualified service center or  
repair shop.  
Principle  
The system reads if the front passenger seat  
is occupied by measuring the human body's  
resistance.  
The front passenger airbags are activated or  
deactivated.  
General information  
Before transporting a child on the front pass-  
enger seat, refer to the safety information and  
instructions for children on the front passenger  
seat, see Children.  
Display in the instrument cluster  
When drive-ready state is turned on,  
the warning light in the instrument  
cluster illuminates briefly, thereby indi-  
cating the operational readiness of the entire  
airbag system and the seat belt tensioners.  
180  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
passenger's side are not ac-  
tivated.  
Safety information  
▷
The indicator light does not illuminate  
when, for instance, a correctly seated per-  
son of sufficient size is detected on the  
seat. The airbags on the passenger's side  
are activated.  
Warning  
To ensure the front passenger airbag func-  
tion, the system must be able to detect  
whether a person is sitting in the front pass-  
enger seat. The entire seat surface must be  
used for this purpose. There is a risk of injury  
or danger to life. Make sure that the front  
passenger keeps his or her feet in the foot-  
well.  
Fault of the automatic deactivation  
system  
When transporting older children and adults,  
the front passenger airbags may be deacti-  
vated in certain seat positions. In this case, the  
indicator light for the front passenger airbags  
illuminates.  
Functional requirements  
To enable accurate recognition of the occupied  
seat surface:  
In this case, change the seat position so that  
the front passenger airbags are activated and  
the indicator light goes out.  
▷
Do not attach covers, cushions, ball mats  
or other items to the front passenger seat  
unless they are specifically determined to  
be safe for use on the front passenger seat.  
If it is not possible to activate the airbags, have  
the person sit in the rear seat.  
▷
▷
Do not place objects under the seat that  
can press against the seat from below.  
Detected child restraint systems  
Do not place any electronic devices on the  
front passenger seat if a child restraint sys-  
tem is to be installed on it.  
The system generally detects children seated  
in a child restraint system, particularly in child  
restraint systems required by NHTSA at the  
point in time when the vehicle was manufac-  
tured. After installing a child restraint system,  
make sure that the indicator light for the front  
passenger airbags illuminates. This indicates  
that the child restraint system has been de-  
tected and the front passenger airbags are not  
activated.  
▷
No moisture in or on the seat.  
Indicator light for the front  
passenger airbags  
The indicator light for the front-seat passenger  
airbag in the headliner indicates the operating  
state of the front-seat passenger airbag.  
The light indicates whether the airbags are ei-  
ther activated or deactivated.  
Collision warning systems  
After drive-ready state is switched on, the light  
shortly illuminates and then indicates whether  
the airbags are either activated or deactivated.  
General information  
Depending on the equipment, the vehicle has  
different systems that can help prevent the risk  
of imminent collision.  
▷
The indicator light illuminates  
when a child is properly  
seated in a child restraint  
system or when the seat is  
empty. The airbags on the  
▷
Forward Collision Mitigation with brake in-  
tervention, refer to page 183.  
▷
Exit warning, refer to page 192.  
181  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
Lane departure warning, refer to page 193.  
Sensors  
Active Blind Spot Detection, refer to  
page 197.  
Depending on vehicle equipment, the Intelli-  
gent Safety systems are controlled by the fol-  
lowing sensors:  
▷
▷
Side collision mitigation, refer to page 200.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Camera behind the windshield.  
Front radar sensor.  
Rear-end collision preparation, refer to  
page 201.  
▷
Traffic Light And Sign Warning, refer to  
page 202.  
Radar sensors, side, front.  
Radar sensors, side, rear.  
▷
▷
▷
Wrong way warning, refer to page 204.  
Additional information:  
No Turn on Red function, refer to page 205.  
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35.  
Emergency Stop Assistant, refer to  
page 206.  
Turning on/turning off collision  
warning systems  
Depending on national-market version, some  
of the systems are automatically activated  
whenever you start driving.  
Safety information  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the  
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready  
to take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
The following functions are adjustable.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Safety and warnings"  
6. Select the desired settings.  
Resetting the settings  
The settings of the collision warning systems  
can be reset to the default settings at vehicle  
outbound delivery.  
Warning  
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a  
substitute for the driver’s personal judgment.  
Due to its limits, the system may not issue  
warnings or responses, or these may be is-  
sued late or in a manner that is not consis-  
tent with their normal use. There is a risk of  
accident, injury, and property damage. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch sur-  
rounding traffic closely and actively intervene  
where appropriate  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Safety and warnings"  
6. "Reset to recommended settings"  
182  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
System limits  
General information  
Depending on the equipment version, the For-  
ward Collision Mitigation system includes the  
following functions:  
Safety information  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Warning function in rear-end collision situa-  
tions, refer to page 186.  
Warning  
Because of system limitations, this system  
may either not respond, or respond too late,  
incorrectly, or without cause. There is a risk  
of accident, injury, and property damage. Ac-  
tively intervene as warranted. Refer to the in-  
formation in this Owner’s Manual regarding  
the scope of the system’s operation and limi-  
tations.  
Warning function for oncoming traffic, refer  
to page 187.  
Warning function for turning with oncoming  
traffic, refer to page 188.  
Warning function for pedestrians, refer to  
page 188.  
Warning function at intersections, refer to  
page 190.  
Detection capability  
Evasion Assistant, refer to page 191.  
The system's detection capability is limited.  
Safety information  
The system only takes into account objects  
that are located in the detection range of the  
installed sensors and are detected by the sys-  
tem.  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the  
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready  
to take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the area  
is monitored by cameras or radar sensors.  
Thus, a system response might not come or  
might come late.  
System limits of the sensors  
Additional information:  
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35.  
Forward Collision Mitigation  
with brake intervention  
Warning  
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a  
substitute for the driver’s personal judgment.  
Due to its limits, the system may not issue  
warnings or responses, or these may be is-  
sued late or in a manner that is not consis-  
tent with their normal use. There is a risk of  
accident, injury, and property damage. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch sur-  
rounding traffic closely and actively intervene  
where appropriate  
Principle  
The Forward Collision Mitigation can help  
prevent accidents. If an accident cannot be  
avoided, the system can help reduce the se-  
verity of the accident.  
The system can issue a warning of a possible  
risk of collision and activate the brakes inde-  
pendently, if needed.  
183  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
If necessary, the switch-off must be confirmed  
successively on the control display.  
Sensors  
Depending on the equipment, the system is  
controlled by the following sensors:  
1.  
Apps menu  
▷
▷
▷
Camera behind the windshield.  
Front radar sensor.  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Safety and warnings"  
6. "Forward Collision Mitigation"  
7. "Off"  
Radar sensors, side, front.  
Additional information:  
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35.  
Speed range  
The system issues a warning of a possi-  
ble risk of collision at speeds above approx.  
3 mph/5 km/h.  
Setting the warning time  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
If the vehicle speed exceeds approx.  
155 mph/250 km/h, the system is deactivated  
temporarily.  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Safety and warnings"  
6. "Forward Collision Mitigation"  
7. Select the desired setting.  
Some functions are deactivated earlier.  
The system is enabled as soon as the speed  
drops below these values again.  
The more sensitive the warning time is set to  
be, the more warnings will be displayed. The  
system can therefore also issue more early or  
unfounded warnings and reactions.  
Turning the Forward Collision  
Mitigation on/off  
Turning on the system automatically  
Depending on the national-market version, the  
system is automatically active after every de-  
parture.  
The system checks for visual impairments. De-  
pending on the vehicle equipment, the Driver  
Attention Camera in the instrument cluster  
captures the driver’s field of vision. Visibility  
and field of vision also affect the timing of the  
warnings.  
Turning on system manually  
The system is activated by setting the warning  
time.  
Display in the instrument cluster  
The following indicator lights and warning  
lights are shown on the instrument cluster and,  
depending on vehicle equipment, on the Head-  
up display:  
Additional information:  
Setting the warning time, refer to page 184.  
Turning system off manually  
Depending on national-market version, the ad-  
justment can only be made when the vehicle is  
at a standstill or in a very low speed range.  
184  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
Depending on the equipment and situation  
in case of risk of imminent collision, the  
system can also intervene with an auto-  
matic brake intervention and automatically  
decelerate the vehicle, if necessary, to a  
complete stop.  
Icon  
Meaning  
Risk of collision with a person, e.g., a  
pedestrian.  
Risk of collision, for instance with an  
oncoming or a vehicle driving ahead.  
When the brake pedal is depressed quickly and  
hard, the maximum brake power of the vehicle  
is used.  
Risk of collision, e.g., with a vehicle  
crossing from the right.  
Automatic brake intervention  
In case of a risk of collision, the system can  
assist with an automatic brake intervention, if  
necessary.  
Risk of collision, e.g., with a vehicle  
crossing from the left.  
General risk of collision.  
When the vehicle is traveling at a low speed,  
the vehicle may come to a complete stop.  
During automatic brake intervention, Dynamic  
Stability Control activates automatically.  
The corresponding indicator lights and warn-  
ing lights may display differently if the system  
detects multiple objects.  
A brake intervention can be canceled by de-  
pressing the accelerator pedal with sufficient  
force, releasing the brake pedal, or by actively  
steering.  
Warning function  
The Forward Collision Mitigation warns on dif-  
ferent warning levels, depending on the re-  
spective hazardous situation.  
Depending on the equipment and situation,  
the brake intervention can occur up to approx.  
155 mph/250 km/h.  
In the event of a prewarning, a warning light  
illuminates red. In the event of an acute warn-  
ing, a warning light flashes red and a warning  
tone sounds.  
At speeds above approx. 130 mph/210 km/h,  
only a brief brake intervention will occur.  
System limits  
In the event of a system warning, the driver  
must intervene immediately and in accordance  
with the situation.  
Safety information  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Red warning light illuminates:  
Warning  
A hazardous situation has been detected.  
Increased awareness is required.  
Because of system limitations, this system  
may either not respond, or respond too late,  
incorrectly, or without cause. There is a risk  
of accident, injury, and property damage. Ac-  
tively intervene as warranted. Refer to the in-  
formation in this Owner’s Manual regarding  
the scope of the system’s operation and limi-  
tations.  
Red warning light flashes:  
There is a risk of collision. Intervene imme-  
diately.  
A warning signal sounds:  
There is a risk of collision. Intervene imme-  
diately.  
Automatic brake intervention:  
185  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
Detection capability  
The system's detection capability is limited.  
General information  
The system only takes into account objects  
that are located in the detection range of the  
installed sensors and are detected by the sys-  
tem.  
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the area  
is monitored by cameras or radar sensors.  
Thus, a system response might not come or  
might come late.  
Sensors detect the traffic situation in their de-  
tection range.  
System limits of the sensors  
Additional information:  
The system issues a warning of a possible risk  
of collision with vehicles at speeds above ap-  
prox. 3 mph/5 km/h. The timing of warnings  
may vary with the current driving situation.  
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35.  
Functional limitations  
The system considers the driver’s vehicle han-  
dling when responding. If an active driving  
style is detected, warnings and brake interven-  
tions occur less frequently.  
The system may be limited in the following  
situations:  
▷
▷
In tight curves.  
With limitation of the driving stability control  
systems.  
Safety information  
Follow the safety information in Chapter “For-  
ward Collision Mitigation”.  
▷
Up to 10 seconds after turning on drive-  
ready state using the Start/Stop button.  
Also, do not use Forward Collision Mitigation  
when towing.  
Display in the instrument cluster  
If there is a risk of collision with a detected  
vehicle, a warning light is displayed.  
Warning function in forward  
collision situations  
Icon  
Meaning  
Forward Collision Warning with a de-  
tected vehicle.  
Principle  
The warning function in forward collision situa-  
tions warns of a possible risk of collision and  
may brake independently.  
General risk of collision.  
In the event of an accident, the system helps  
by reducing impact speed.  
Warning function  
The warning prompts the driver to intervene.  
Additional information:  
Forward Collision Mitigation, refer to page 183.  
186  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
prox. 3 mph/5 km/h. The timing of warnings  
may vary with the current driving situation.  
System limits  
General information  
Follow the system limits in the "Forward Colli-  
sion Mitigation" chapter.  
Safety information  
Follow the safety information in Chapter “For-  
ward Collision Mitigation”.  
Detection range  
The following situations may not be detected,  
or only detected with a delay, for instance:  
Display in the instrument cluster  
If there is a risk of collision with a detected  
vehicle, a warning light is displayed.  
▷
▷
▷
Vehicle driving slowly in front and being ap-  
proached at high speed.  
Icon  
Meaning  
Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of  
you, or strongly decelerating vehicles.  
Oncoming traffic warning when a ve-  
hicle is detected.  
Vehicles with unusual rear designs.  
General risk of collision.  
Warning function for  
oncoming traffic  
Warning function  
The warning prompts the driver to intervene.  
Principle  
In case of a possible risk of collision, a brake  
intervention is triggered.  
The warning function for oncoming traffic can  
warn of a possible risk of collision with oncom-  
ing vehicles and may brake independently.  
Additional information:  
In the event of an accident, the system helps  
by reducing impact speed.  
Forward Collision Mitigation, refer to page 183.  
System limits  
General information  
General information  
Follow the system limits in the "Forward Colli-  
sion Mitigation" chapter.  
Detection range  
The following situations may not be detected,  
for instance:  
▷
▷
Oncoming vehicles at a very high speed.  
Vehicles with an unusual front view.  
Sensors detect the traffic situation in their de-  
tection range.  
The system issues a warning of a possible risk  
of collision with vehicles at speeds above ap-  
187  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
Icon  
Meaning  
Warning function for turning  
with oncoming traffic  
Oncoming traffic warning when a ve-  
hicle is detected.  
Principle  
General risk of collision.  
There is a risk of an accident with oncom-  
ing vehicles when turning across the oncom-  
ing lane. The system can issue a warning of  
a possible risk of collision and activate the  
brakes independently, if needed.  
Warning function  
The warning prompts the driver to intervene.  
In the event of an accident, the system helps  
by reducing impact speed.  
Additional information:  
Forward Collision Mitigation, refer to page 183.  
General information  
System limits  
General information  
Follow the system limits in the "Forward Colli-  
sion Mitigation" chapter.  
Detection range  
The following situations may not be detected,  
for instance:  
▷
▷
▷
Oncoming vehicles at a very high speed.  
Vehicles that are hidden by other vehicles.  
Vehicles with an unusual front view.  
Sensors detect the traffic situation in their de-  
tection range.  
The system issues a warning of a possible risk  
of collision with oncoming vehicles at speeds  
from approx. 3 mph/5 km/h. The timing of  
warnings may vary with the current driving sit-  
uation.  
Upper speed limit  
The system is active when the own speed is  
below approx. 15 mph/25 km/h.  
Safety information  
Follow the safety information in Chapter “For-  
ward Collision Mitigation”.  
Warning function for  
pedestrians  
Display in the instrument cluster  
If there is a risk of collision with a detected  
vehicle, a warning light is displayed.  
Principle  
At speeds that are common in towns and cit-  
ies, the warning function warns the driver of a  
possible risk of collision with pedestrians and  
cyclists. The system may brake automatically.  
In the event of an accident, the system helps  
by reducing impact speed.  
188  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
General information  
Warning function  
The warning prompts the driver to intervene.  
Additional information:  
Forward Collision Mitigation, refer to page 183.  
System limits  
General information  
Follow the system limits in the "Forward Colli-  
sion Mitigation" chapter.  
Sensors detect the traffic situation in their de-  
tection range when on a straight line.  
Detection range  
Sensors detect the traffic situation in their de-  
tection range when turning.  
The detection range consists of the following  
parts:  
▷
▷
Area in front of the vehicle, arrow 1.  
The system issues a warning of a possible  
risk of collision with pedestrians or cyclists at  
speeds above approx. 3 mph/5 km/h.  
With side radar sensors in front: side areas,  
arrows 2.  
The following situations may not be detected,  
for instance:  
Safety information  
Follow the safety information in Chapter “For-  
ward Collision Mitigation”.  
▷
▷
Partially covered pedestrians or bikes.  
Pedestrians that are not detected as such  
because of their contour or posture.  
Display in the instrument cluster  
If there is a risk of collision with a detected pe-  
destrian or cyclist, a warning light is displayed.  
▷
Pedestrians who are too small for the sen-  
sors to detect.  
Icon  
Meaning  
Upper speed limit  
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the  
system responds to pedestrians and cyclists  
when your vehicle speed is less than approx.  
50 mph/80 km/h.  
Risk of collision with a person, e.g., a  
pedestrian.  
General risk of collision.  
189  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
Display in the instrument cluster  
If there is a risk of collision with a detected  
vehicle, a warning light is displayed.  
Warning function at  
intersections  
Icon  
Meaning  
Principle  
Risk of collision with vehicle crossing  
from the right.  
At speeds that are common in towns and cit-  
ies, the Intersection Collision Warning function  
can warn the driver of a possible risk of colli-  
sion with crossing traffic at intersections and  
junctions. The system may brake automati-  
cally.  
Risk of collision with vehicle crossing  
from the left.  
General risk of collision.  
In the event of an accident, the system helps  
by reducing impact speed.  
General information  
Warning function  
The warning prompts the driver to intervene.  
Additional information:  
Forward Collision Mitigation, refer to page 183.  
System limits  
General information  
Follow the system limits in the "Forward Colli-  
sion Mitigation" chapter.  
Sensors detect the traffic situation in their de-  
tection range.  
Detection range  
The following situations may not be detected,  
for instance:  
Vehicles crossing your driving direction can be  
detected by the system as soon as these vehi-  
cles enter into detection range of the sensors.  
▷
Crossing vehicles when they are hidden,  
e.g. by buildings.  
At intersections and junctions, a warning is is-  
sued when a risk of collision with crossing traf-  
fic is detected.  
▷
▷
Vehicles with an unusual side view.  
The system issues a warning of a possible risk  
of collision with vehicles at speeds above ap-  
prox. 3 mph/5 km/h.  
Vehicles in highly dynamic driving situa-  
tions.  
Upper speed limit  
The system responds to crossing vehicles  
when the vehicle speed is below approx.  
50 mph/80 km/h.  
The timing of warnings may vary with the cur-  
rent driving situation.  
Safety information  
Follow the safety information in Chapter “For-  
ward Collision Mitigation”.  
190  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
Display in the instrument cluster  
If there is a risk of collision with a detected  
vehicle or detected person, e.g., a pedestrian,  
a warning light is displayed.  
Evasion Assistant  
Principle  
The Evasion Assistant can help the driver per-  
form evasive maneuvers in certain situations,  
e.g., when obstacles or pedestrians appear  
suddenly.  
Icon  
Meaning  
Warning when a vehicle is detected.  
General information  
Risk of collision with a pedestrian.  
Risk of collision with unknown obsta-  
cle.  
Warning function with evasion  
support  
If the vehicle approaches another object at a  
high differential speed, a warning is displayed  
if there is an immediate risk of collision.  
The system issues a warning and intervenes  
to support the driver if a lateral evasive ma-  
neuver is possible.  
Intervene in case of a warning.  
Sensors monitor and detect the clearance in  
front of the vehicle. Depending on the vehicle  
equipment, the areas next to the vehicle are  
also monitored.  
The system is designed to provide assistance  
during evasive maneuvers when there is a risk  
of collision.  
A message in the instrument cluster and, de-  
pending on the equipment, in the Head-up dis-  
play signals the evasion support.  
If the system detects sufficient free space  
alongside the vehicle, it helps the driver per-  
form an evasive maneuver safely.  
System limits  
Safety information  
Follow the safety information in Chapter “For-  
ward Collision Mitigation”.  
General information  
Follow the system limits in the "Forward Colli-  
sion Mitigation" chapter.  
Functional requirements  
Detection range  
The following situations may not be detected,  
for instance:  
▷
Forward Collision Mitigation is active.  
▷
Sensors detect sufficient clearance around  
vehicle.  
▷
Vehicle driving slowly in front and being ap-  
proached at high speed.  
Speed range  
The Evasion Assistant helps the driver  
when the vehicle speed is between approx.  
19 mph/30 km/h to 100 mph/160 km/h.  
▷
Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of  
you, or strongly decelerating vehicles.  
191  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Vehicles with unusual rear designs.  
Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.  
Partially covered pedestrians or bikes.  
Safety information  
Follow the safety information in the "Forward  
Collision Mitigation" chapter.  
Pedestrians that are not detected as such  
because of their contour or posture.  
Sensors  
The system is controlled by the following sen-  
sors:  
▷
Pedestrians who are too small for the sen-  
sors to detect.  
▷
▷
Radar sensors, side, rear.  
Functional limitation  
The system is deactivated if the trailer power  
socket is occupied or trailer towing is activated,  
e.g., when using a trailer or rear bicycle rack.  
Depending on the equipment: radar sen-  
sors, side, front.  
Turning the exit warning on/off  
Turning on the system automatically  
The exit warning activates automatically after  
departure if the function was switched on at  
the completion of the last trip.  
Exit warning  
Principle  
The exit warning helps to avoid accidents.  
Turning system off manually  
The system can warn the occupants when  
they are opening the doors and a risk of colli-  
sion with approaching objects is detected.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Safety and warnings"  
6. "Exit warning"  
7. "Off"  
General information  
Adjusting the exit warning  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Safety and warnings"  
6. "Exit warning"  
Two radar sensors in the rear bumper monitor  
the area behind the vehicle.  
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the area  
around the vehicle in front of the vehicle is  
monitored as well. Two additional radar sen-  
sors are located in the front bumper.  
7. Select the desired setting.  
Turning the warning tone on/off  
The system monitors the vehicle's surround-  
ings for a limited time after you get in or park.  
1.  
Apps menu  
A possible risk of collision is indicated by vari-  
ous warning functions.  
2. "Vehicle"  
192  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Safety and warnings"  
6. "Exit warning"  
There is a risk of collision when opening the  
doors.  
System limits  
7. "Warning tone"  
General information  
Follow the system limits in the "Collision warn-  
ing systems" chapter.  
Displays  
Warning light in exterior mirror  
Detection range  
The following situations may not be detected,  
for instance:  
▷
▷
▷
Fully or partially hidden objects.  
Stationary or very slow objects.  
Pedestrians.  
Functional limitations  
The system may be limited in the following  
situations:  
The warning light in the exterior mirror warns  
of a possible collision with a detected vehicle.  
▷
The speed of an approaching vehicle is too  
fast or too slow.  
▷
▷
In curves.  
Ambient light  
Depending on the equipment, warnings are  
also indicated by the ambient light in the inte-  
rior.  
In case of fully or partially hidden objects.  
Lane Departure Warning  
with active return  
Warning function  
Prewarning  
Principle  
The lane departure warning alerts when the  
vehicle is about to run off the road or exit the  
lane.  
In the event of an advance warning, the warn-  
ing light in the exterior mirror illuminates. De-  
pending on the equipment, the ambient light  
also flashes.  
An automatic steering intervention helps to  
keep the vehicle in its lane.  
An object was detected in the opening area.  
Increased awareness is required.  
Acute warning  
In the event of an acute warning, the warn-  
ing light in the exterior mirror flashes, as does  
the ambient light, depending on vehicle equip-  
ment. In addition, a signal tone sounds.  
193  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch sur-  
rounding traffic closely and actively intervene  
where appropriate  
General information  
Functional requirement  
The camera must detect the lane boundaries  
for the lane departure warning to be active.  
The areas of the sensors must be clean and  
clear.  
Sensors detect the traffic situation in their de-  
tection range.  
Sensors  
Depending on the equipment, the system is  
controlled by the following sensors:  
The system issues a warning starting at a min-  
imum speed. The minimum speed is country-  
specific and displayed on the control display.  
▷
▷
▷
Camera behind the windshield.  
Front radar sensor.  
Warnings are displayed in the instrument clus-  
ter. In addition, the steering wheel vibrates.  
Radar sensor, side, front.  
The system does not provide a warning if the  
turn signal is set in the respective direction be-  
fore exiting the lane.  
Turning the Lane Departure  
Warning on/off  
Turning on the system automatically  
Depending on the national-market version, the  
system is automatically active after every de-  
parture.  
Safety information  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute  
for the driver’s personal judgment in assess-  
ing road and traffic situations. There is a  
risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic  
conditions. Watch surrounding traffic closely  
and actively intervene where appropriate Do  
not jerk the steering wheel in response to a  
warning.  
Turning on system manually  
The system is activated by the selected warn-  
ing setting.  
Additional information:  
Configuring the warning, refer to page 195.  
Turning system off manually  
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-  
market version, you must successively confirm  
the switch-off on the control display.  
Warning  
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a  
substitute for the driver’s personal judgment.  
Due to its limits, the system may not issue  
warnings or responses, or these may be is-  
sued late or in a manner that is not consis-  
tent with their normal use. There is a risk of  
accident, injury, and property damage. Adjust  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Safety and warnings"  
194  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
6. "Lane Departure Warning"  
7. "Off"  
6. "Vibration intensity"  
7. Select the desired setting.  
The setting is applied to all collision warning  
systems.  
Setting Lane Departure Warning  
Configuring the warning  
Depending on the national-market  
version: turning steering intervention  
on/off  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
1.  
Apps menu  
3. "Driving settings"  
2. "Vehicle"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Safety and warnings"  
6. "Lane Departure Warning"  
7. Select the desired setting.  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Safety and warnings"  
6. "Lane Departure Warning"  
7. "Steering intervention"  
▷
"Expanded"  
If the system detects that your vehicle  
is about to leave your lane or cross a  
lane marking, a warning is issued. The  
system performs a steering intervention.  
Depending on the national-market version, the  
steering intervention is automatically active af-  
ter every driving off.  
▷
"In dangerous situations"  
Display in the instrument cluster  
Different system statuses are displayed on  
the instrument cluster, depending on vehicle  
equipment and national-market version.  
Broken road lines: If the system detects  
that the vehicle is about to inadvertently  
cross a lane marking, or if the sensors  
detect an oncoming vehicle, a warning  
is issued and a steering intervention is  
performed.  
Icon  
Meaning  
Indicator light flashes green: System  
is performing a steering intervention.  
Depending on national-market version,  
with continuous lane markings: If the  
system detects that your vehicle is  
about to inadvertently leave your lane  
or cross a lane marking, a warning is is-  
sued and a steering intervention is per-  
formed.  
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-  
market version, information for the system is  
displayed in the Assisted View of the instru-  
ment cluster.  
Additional information:  
Setting the intensity of the steering  
wheel vibration  
Assisted View, refer to page 161.  
1.  
Apps menu  
Warning function  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Feedback via steering wheel"  
If you leave the lane  
If you leave the lane and if a lane boundary  
has been detected, the steering wheel vibrates  
195  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
in accordance with the steering wheel vibration  
setting.  
vention. Beginning with the third steering inter-  
vention, a continuous warning will sound.  
In addition, a Check Control message is dis-  
played.  
In addition, the indicator light flashes  
green.  
The warning signal and Check Control mes-  
sage advise to pay closer attention to the lane.  
When the turn signal is switched on in the cor-  
responding direction before changing the lane,  
a warning is not issued.  
The extended warning tone stops when the  
steering wheel is moved manually.  
Steering intervention  
With trailer towing  
Depending on the equipment and the national-  
market version: if a lane marking is crossed in  
the speed range up to 130 mph/210 km/h, the  
system intervenes with a brief active steering  
intervention in addition to vibrating. The sys-  
tem supports the driver in keeping the vehicle  
within the lane. The steering intervention can  
be noticed on the steering wheel and can be  
manually overridden at any time.  
If the trailer power socket is occupied or trailer  
towing is activated, for instance during opera-  
tion with trailer, no steering intervention takes  
place.  
If using a rear carrier on the trailer hitch, this  
restriction does not apply when trailer towing is  
activated on the control display.  
Additional information:  
Driving with trailer or rear carrier, refer to  
page 336.  
When steering intervention is active,  
the indicator light flashes green.  
End of warning  
For instance, the warning or an active steering  
intervention will be canceled in the following  
situations:  
For instance, the steering intervention will be  
suppressed in the following situations:  
▷
▷
▷
▷
With hard accelerating or braking.  
When flashing.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Automatically after a few seconds.  
When returning to your own lane.  
With hard accelerating or braking.  
With hazard warning system switched on.  
When flashing.  
With hazard warning system switched on.  
In driving situation with high driving dynam-  
ics.  
▷
While Dynamic Stability Control regulates  
driving stability.  
▷
▷
While Dynamic Stability Control is limited.  
While Dynamic Stability Control regulates  
driving stability.  
Immediately following a steering interven-  
tion by the vehicle systems.  
▷
Immediately following a steering interven-  
tion by the vehicle systems.  
Warning signal  
▷
▷
With manual steering intervention.  
Depending on the national-market version: in  
the event of multiple active steering interven-  
tions by the system within 3 minutes with-  
out the driver's intervention at the steering  
wheel during the steering intervention itself, an  
acoustic warning will sound. A short warning  
signal will sound at the second steering inter-  
When another driver assistance system is  
activated, if applicable.  
▷
▷
No lane boundaries detected.  
When the system limits are reached.  
196  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
System limits  
General information  
General information  
Follow the system limits in the "Collision warn-  
ing systems" chapter.  
Functional limitations  
The system may be limited in the following  
situations:  
▷
▷
In the event of missing, worn, poorly visible,  
merging, diverging, or multiple lane boun-  
daries such as in construction areas.  
Radar sensors monitor the area behind and  
next to the vehicle when traveling faster than a  
minimum speed.  
With lane boundaries that are covered in  
snow, ice, dirt or water.  
The minimum speed is country-specific and  
displayed in the Active Blind Spot Detection  
menu.  
▷
▷
In tight corners or on narrow roads.  
With lane boundaries that are covered by  
objects.  
The system indicates whether there are vehi-  
cles in your blind spot, arrow 1, or approaching  
from behind in an adjacent lane, arrow 2. The  
warning light in the exterior mirror illuminates  
dimly.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
When driving very close to the vehicle in  
front of you.  
Up to 10 seconds after turning on drive-  
ready state using the Start/Stop button.  
The system will warn in the previously named  
situations prior to a lane change. The warn-  
ing light in the exterior mirror flashes and the  
steering wheel vibrates.  
While Dynamic Stability Control regulates  
driving stability.  
While Dynamic Stability Control is limited.  
When turning at a speed of up to approx.  
12 mph/20 km/h, the steering wheel will not  
vibrate.  
A Check Control message may be displayed  
when the system is limited. A yellow warning  
light also illuminates, depending on national-  
market version.  
Safety information  
Follow the safety information in the "Forward  
Collision Mitigation" chapter.  
Active Blind Spot Detection  
with active return  
Sensors  
Principle  
The system is controlled by the following sen-  
sors:  
Active Blind Spot Detection detects vehicles  
in the blind spot or vehicles approaching from  
behind in the adjacent lane.  
▷
▷
▷
Camera behind the windshield.  
Radar sensors, side, rear.  
The warning light in the exterior mirror gives  
warnings at different levels.  
Depending on the equipment: radar sen-  
sors, side, front.  
An automatic steering intervention helps to  
keep the vehicle in its lane.  
197  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
Depending on the national-market  
version: turning steering intervention  
on/off  
Functional requirement  
The areas of the sensors must be clean and  
clear.  
1.  
Apps menu  
Turning Active Blind Spot Detection  
on/off  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
1.  
Apps menu  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Safety and warnings"  
6. "Active Blind Spot Detection"  
7. "Steering intervention"  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Safety and warnings"  
6. "Active Blind Spot Detection"  
7. Select the desired setting.  
Warning function  
Warning light in exterior mirror  
Adjusting the Active Blind Spot  
Detection  
Configuring the warning  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Safety and warnings"  
6. "Active Blind Spot Detection"  
7. Select the desired setting.  
The warning light in the exterior mirror warns  
of a possible collision with a detected vehicle.  
Prewarning  
Setting the intensity of the steering  
wheel vibration  
The dimmed warning light in the exterior mirror  
indicates when vehicles are in your blind spot  
or approaching from the rear.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
Acute warning  
When an acute warning occurs, the steering  
wheel vibrates briefly. The warning light in the  
exterior mirror flashes brightly.  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Feedback via steering wheel"  
6. "Vibration intensity"  
7. Select the desired setting.  
An acute warning is issued if the following con-  
ditions are met:  
The setting is applied to all collision warning  
systems.  
198  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
▷
Another vehicle is located in the critical  
area.  
System limits  
Your own vehicle is approaching the other  
lane.  
General information  
Follow the system limits in the "Collision warn-  
ing systems" chapter.  
Depending on the system setting when the  
turn signal is turned on.  
Upper speed limit  
If the vehicle speed exceeds approx.  
155 mph/250 km/h, the system is deactivated  
temporarily.  
The warning stops when the other vehicle has  
left the critical area.  
Steering intervention  
Depending on the national-market version:  
when there is no response to the vibration  
of the steering wheel at speeds of up to  
130 mph/210 km/h and the lane marking  
is crossed, the system engages the active  
steering intervention. The steering intervention  
helps return the vehicle into the lane. The  
steering intervention can be noticed on the  
steering wheel and can be manually overrid-  
den at any time.  
If the vehicle speed falls below approx.  
155 mph/250 km/h, the system is reactivated.  
Displaying warnings  
The number of warnings shown depends on  
how the settings are configured. However,  
there may also be an excess of unwarranted  
warnings of critical situations.  
Functional limitations  
The system may be limited in the following  
situations:  
The steering intervention is carried out from  
a minimum speed. The minimum speed is dis-  
played on the control display.  
▷
When a vehicle is approaching at a speed  
much faster than your own.  
With trailer towing  
▷
▷
In tight corners or on narrow roads.  
No steering intervention is performed when the  
trailer power socket is occupied or trailer tow-  
ing is activated. This system does not issue a  
pre-warning.  
The bumper is dirty, iced up or covered,  
for instance by stickers.  
Depending on the national-market version, the  
steering intervention e.g. in the following situa-  
tions:  
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-  
market version: An acute warning continues to  
be issued if there is a risk of collision.  
▷
In the event of missing, worn, poorly visible,  
merging, diverging, or multiple lane boun-  
daries such as in construction areas.  
The warning function may be restricted. Warn-  
ings can be displayed late or not at all, e.g., if  
the speed of the approaching vehicle is much  
higher than your own speed. An increased  
number of unwarranted warnings may occur.  
A Check Control message is displayed.  
▷
With lane boundaries that are covered in  
snow, ice, dirt or water.  
▷
▷
With lane boundaries that are not white.  
With lane boundaries that are covered by  
objects.  
Warning light flashing  
When the vehicle is unlocked, the warning light  
in the exterior mirror flashes for self-testing  
purposes.  
▷
When driving very close to the vehicle in  
front of you.  
199  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
If the camera is impaired.  
Functional requirement  
The camera behind the windshield determines  
the lane boundary positions.  
Up to 10 seconds after turning on drive-  
ready state using the Start/Stop button.  
A Check Control message may be displayed  
when the system is limited. A yellow warning  
light also illuminates, depending on national-  
market version.  
The camera must detect the lane markings for  
the side collision mitigation with steering inter-  
vention to be active.  
Sensors  
The system is controlled by the following sen-  
sors:  
Side collision mitigation  
▷
▷
▷
Camera behind the windshield.  
Radar sensors, side, front.  
Radar sensors, side, rear.  
Principle  
The side-collision warning helps to avoid an  
impending side collision.  
Turning the side collision warning  
on/off  
General information  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Safety and warnings"  
6. "Side collision warning"  
7. Select the desired setting.  
Radar sensors monitor the space next to the  
vehicle when traveling faster than a minimum  
speed and up to approx. 130 mph/210 km/h.  
Setting the intensity of the steering  
wheel vibration  
1.  
Apps menu  
The minimum speed is country-specific and  
displayed on the control display.  
2. "Vehicle"  
If, for example, another vehicle is detected next  
to your vehicle and there is a risk of collision  
with this vehicle, the system helps avoid a col-  
lision. For this purpose, the system issues a  
warning with a flashing LED in the exterior mir-  
ror, a Check Control message and a vibrating  
steering wheel. If necessary, an active steering  
intervention is performed by the system.  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Feedback via steering wheel"  
6. "Vibration intensity"  
7. Select the desired setting.  
The setting is applied to all collision warning  
systems.  
Safety information  
Follow the safety information in the "Forward  
Collision Mitigation" chapter.  
Display in the instrument cluster  
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-  
market version, information for the system is  
200  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
displayed in the Assisted View of the instru-  
ment cluster.  
Functional limitations  
The system may be limited in the following  
situations:  
Additional information:  
Assisted View, refer to page 161.  
▷
▷
In tight corners or on narrow roads.  
In the event of missing, worn, poorly visible,  
merging, diverging, or multiple lane boun-  
daries such as in construction areas.  
Warning function  
Warning light in exterior mirror  
▷
With lane boundaries that are covered in  
snow, ice, dirt or water.  
▷
▷
With lane boundaries that are not white.  
With lane boundaries that are covered by  
objects.  
▷
▷
When driving very close to the vehicle in  
front of you.  
Up to 10 seconds after turning on drive-  
ready state using the Start/Stop button.  
A Check Control message may be displayed  
when the system is limited.  
The warning light in the exterior mirror warns  
of a possible collision with a detected vehicle.  
The system is inactive when the trailer power  
socket is occupied or trailer towing is activated,  
e.g., when using a trailer or rear bicycle rack. A  
Check Control message is displayed.  
Acute warning  
If there is a risk of collision, the warning light  
in the exterior mirror flashes and the steering  
wheel starts vibrating.  
Rear-end collision  
preparation  
A Check Control message is displayed at the  
same time.  
Steering intervention  
Principle  
Depending on the national-market version,  
if necessary, the system engages the active  
steering intervention to prevent a collision and  
maintain the vehicle within its own lane. The  
steering intervention can be noticed on the  
steering wheel and can be manually overrid-  
den at any time.  
Depending on the equipment and national-  
market version, the rear-end collision prepara-  
tion can react to vehicles approaching from be-  
hind.  
System limits  
General information  
Follow the system limits in the "Collision warn-  
ing systems" chapter.  
201  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
General information  
System limits  
General information  
Follow the system limits in the "Collision warn-  
ing systems" chapter.  
Functional limitations  
This function may be restricted if the speed  
of the approaching vehicle is much higher or  
similar to your own speed.  
Radar sensors monitor the area behind the ve-  
hicle.  
Traffic Light And Sign  
Warning  
When a vehicle approaches from the rear at a  
certain speed, the system can react as follows:  
▷
Where applicable, the hazard warning  
flashers will be switched on.  
Principle  
▷
Where applicable, the PreCrash functions  
are triggered.  
The Traffic Light And Sign Warning provides  
support in situations in which the right-of-way  
needs to be yielded based on road signs or  
traffic lights.  
Safety information  
Follow the safety information in the "Forward  
Collision Mitigation" chapter.  
General information  
The system evaluates traffic signs and traffic  
lights using a camera behind the windshield.  
Sensors  
The navigation system directs information on  
the road layout to the system.  
The system is controlled by the radar sensors  
on the sides and rear.  
A warning is given if the right of way is about  
to be violated, e.g., in the following traffic situa-  
tions:  
Turning rear-end collision  
preparation on/off  
The system is automatically active when the  
vehicle is turned on.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
At an intersection.  
At a road entrance.  
On a highway entrance ramp.  
At a roundabout.  
The system is deactivated in the following sit-  
uations:  
▷
▷
When driving in reverse.  
With a red traffic light.  
When the trailer power socket is occupied  
or trailer towing is activated, e.g., when us-  
ing a trailer or rear bicycle rack.  
The system issues a warning as from a vari-  
able minimum speed and at speeds up to ap-  
prox. 60 mph/100 km/h.  
The following traffic signs are taken into ac-  
count for the Traffic Light And Sign Warning:  
202  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
Sign Meaning  
Give way signs:  
5. "Safety and warnings"  
6. "Traffic Light and Sign Warning"  
7. Select the desired setting.  
A pre-warning is issued for these  
road signs.  
The selected setting is saved and adopted for  
the next journey.  
Stop signs:  
A pre-warning is issued for these  
road signs.  
Warning function  
When traffic lights are red, a pre-  
warning and an acute warning will be  
issued.  
General information  
The system issues a two-phase warning:  
▷
▷
Prewarning: visual warning by an icon in  
the instrument cluster.  
Safety information  
Follow the safety information in the "Forward  
Collision Mitigation" chapter.  
Acute warning: visual warning by an icon  
in the instrument cluster and an additional  
acoustic signal.  
Functional requirement  
The right-of-way situation ahead of the vehicle  
must be clearly controlled by traffic signs or  
light signal systems.  
The timing of the warning varies with the ac-  
tual driving situation and the warning time set-  
ting.  
Prewarning  
If there is a risk that a right of way is about to  
be violated, one of the following icons appears  
in the instrument cluster:  
Sensors  
The system is controlled by a camera behind  
the windshield.  
Icon  
Meaning  
Turning the Traffic Light And Sign  
Warning on/off  
Give way.  
1.  
Apps menu  
Stop.  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Safety and warnings"  
6. "Traffic Light and Sign Warning"  
7. Select the desired setting.  
Red traffic light.  
When a prewarning is issued, intervene as  
appropriate for the situation; for example, by  
braking.  
Setting the warning time  
1.  
Apps menu  
Acute warning  
2. "Vehicle"  
If there is an acute risk that the right of way  
is about to be violated, an acoustic signal will  
3. "Driving settings"  
203  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
sound and one of the following icons will ap-  
pear in the instrument cluster:  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
If the traffic signs do not correspond to the  
standard.  
When traffic signs are detected that apply  
to a junction or parallel street.  
Icon  
Meaning  
Red traffic light.  
In the presence of country-specific road  
signs or road layouts.  
With intersections with flashing light signal  
systems.  
When an acute warning is issued, intervene as  
appropriate for the situation; for example, by  
braking.  
Up to 10 seconds after turning on drive-  
ready state using the Start/Stop button.  
In the case of navigation data that is inva-  
lid, outdated or not available.  
Display in the Head-up display  
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the  
warning is displayed simultaneously in the  
Head-up display and in the instrument cluster.  
In some regions, the system may not be  
available or only partially available.  
System limits  
Wrong way warning  
General information  
Follow the system limits in the "Collision warn-  
ing systems" chapter.  
Principle  
The wrong way warning warns the driver of  
an upcoming wrong entry onto roads, for in-  
stance onto freeways, roundabouts and one-  
way streets.  
No warning  
The system does not issue a warning in the  
following situations, for example:  
General information  
Depending on the equipment version, the sys-  
tem uses navigation data and traffic signs to  
check the traffic situation.  
▷
▷
In right-of-way situations without right-of-  
way signs, stop signs, or red light signal  
systems.  
With intersections with relevant traffic lights  
that are illuminated yellow or green.  
For example, the system takes the following  
traffic signs into account:  
▷
▷
▷
No entrance.  
Functional limitations  
The system may be limited in the following  
situations:  
Roundabout.  
Directional arrows: mandatory bypass.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
If road signs or light signal systems are un-  
clear.  
Safety information  
Follow the safety information in the "Forward  
Collision Mitigation" chapter.  
If traffic signs or light signal systems are  
fully or partially concealed or soiled.  
If traffic signs or light signal systems are  
difficult to read or rotated.  
Functional requirement  
The road layout ahead must be controlled  
clearly with traffic signs.  
If traffic signs or light signal systems are  
too small or too large.  
204  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
When traffic signs are detected that apply  
to a junction or parallel street.  
Sensors  
The system is controlled by a camera behind  
the windshield.  
In the presence of country-specific road  
signs or road layouts.  
Up to 10 seconds after turning on drive-  
ready state using the Start/Stop button.  
Turning wrong way warning on/off  
Depending on national-market version, the  
wrong way warning is automatically activated  
whenever you start driving.  
In the case of navigation data that is inva-  
lid, outdated or not available.  
It may not be possible to use the system in  
all regions.  
Warning function  
A warning is displayed and a signal  
tone sounds, for example when the ve-  
hicle is traveling in the wrong direction  
on a highway, roundabout or one-way street.  
No Turn on Red function  
Principle  
Warnings are displayed in the instrument clus-  
ter and, depending on the equipment, in the  
Head-up display.  
This function provides assistance to the driver  
at traffic lights where turning on red is prohib-  
ited.  
To do so, this function analyzes traffic lights  
and traffic signs using the camera behind the  
windshield. In addition, the navigation system  
data is used.  
System limits  
General information  
Follow the system limits in the "Collision warn-  
ing systems" chapter.  
Safety information  
Follow the safety information in the "Forward  
Collision Mitigation" chapter.  
No warning  
For example, the system does not issue a  
warnings for road layouts without traffic signs.  
Functional requirements  
▷
The system detects the right-of-way situa-  
tion ahead by analyzing traffic lights and  
traffic signs.  
Functional limitations  
The function may be limited in the following  
situations, for instance, and will either output  
an incorrect wrong way warning or no warning  
at all:  
▷
▷
Vehicle is less than approx. 164 ft/50 m  
from the traffic lights.  
Depending on vehicle equipment: the Traf-  
fic Light And Sign Warning is turned on.  
▷
▷
When the signage is not clear.  
If the traffic signs are fully or partially con-  
cealed or soiled.  
Sensors  
▷
If the traffic signs are poorly legible or ro-  
tated.  
The system is controlled by a camera behind  
the windshield.  
▷
▷
If the traffic signs are too small or too large.  
If the traffic signs do not correspond to the  
standard.  
205  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
Display in the instrument cluster  
Emergency Stop Assistant  
If the driver approaches a red traffic  
light with a traffic sign that prohibits  
a turn on red, an indicator light is dis-  
played on the instrument cluster.  
Principle  
If the driver can no longer drive the vehicle  
safely, the Emergency Stop Assistant helps to  
bring the vehicle to a safe standstill.  
The indicator light goes out automatically after  
you drive off at a speed greater than approx.  
9 mph/15 km/h.  
General information  
The Emergency Stop Assistant is triggered au-  
tomatically.  
System limits  
When the system is triggered, the vehicle is  
brought to a standstill in its own lane by use of  
lane keeping.  
General information  
Follow the system limits in the "Collision warn-  
ing systems" chapter.  
Safety information  
Functional limitations  
The system may be limited in the following  
situations:  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
one's physical state. An increasing lack of  
alertness or fatigue may not be detected or  
not be detected in time. There is a risk of  
accident, injury, and property damage. Make  
sure that the driver is rested and alert. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
If road signs or light signal systems are un-  
clear.  
If traffic signs or light signal systems are  
fully or partially concealed or soiled.  
If traffic signs or light signal systems are  
difficult to read or rotated.  
If traffic signs or light signal systems are  
too small or too large.  
If the traffic signs do not correspond to the  
standard.  
Functional requirements  
▷
▷
▷
The Emergency Stop Assistant is activated  
via iDrive.  
With intersections with flashing light signal  
systems.  
The system is activated from a speed of  
approx. 43 mph/70 km/h.  
In the case of navigation data that is inva-  
lid, outdated or not available.  
The Driver Attention Camera detects driver  
activity.  
In some regions, this function may not be  
completely available or not available at all.  
Triggering the Emergency Stop  
Assistant  
If the system detects that the driver is no  
longer driving the vehicle safely or ignores  
warnings, the Emergency Stop Assistant is  
triggered automatically. The triggered system  
is displayed in the instrument cluster.  
206  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
The Emergency Stop Assistant can also be  
triggered via voice input.  
▷
▷
If the system is interrupted on the control  
display.  
Additional information:  
When changing the selector lever position if  
the vehicle was already stationary.  
BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant, refer to  
page 53.  
At standstill  
As soon as the vehicle is stationary, the sys-  
tem will carry out the following settings:  
An immediate emergency call can be triggered  
on the control display.  
The following is performed automatically when  
the Emergency Stop Assistant is triggered:  
▷
▷
▷
The vehicle is secured against rolling away.  
The interior lights are switched on.  
▷
A display is shown on the instrument clus-  
ter.  
The central locking system is unlocked.  
▷
The system takes over vehicle handling un-  
til the vehicle comes to a standstill.  
Display in the instrument cluster  
▷
▷
The hazard warning system is switched on.  
Icon  
Status  
An emergency call is triggered when sta-  
tionary, depending on vehicle equipment.  
Emergency Stop Assistant is trig-  
gered.  
Activating/deactivating Emergency  
Stop Assistant  
System limits  
The system cannot replace the roadworthy  
driving performance of a driver.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Safety and warnings"  
6. "Emergency stop"  
7. Select the desired setting.  
The Emergency Stop Assistant may be re-  
stricted in the following situations:  
▷
When the Driver Attention Camera is cov-  
ered by the steering wheel.  
▷
With sunglasses with high protection from  
infrared light.  
Canceling Emergency Stop  
Assistant  
The driver can cancel the Emergency Stop As-  
sistant by actively taking control of the vehicle  
throughout the entire process.  
Cross Traffic Warning with  
Braking  
Principle  
For instance, the system will be canceled in the  
following situations:  
At blind driveway exits or when driving out of  
perpendicular parking spaces, road users ap-  
proaching from the side are detected sooner  
by the cross traffic warning than is possible  
from the driver's seat.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
With strong countersteering.  
When flashing.  
If the accelerator pedal is pressed hard.  
When switching off the hazard warning sys-  
tem.  
207  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
Radar sensors, side, rear.  
General information  
Depending on the equipment: radar sen-  
sors, side, front.  
Activating/deactivating Cross Traffic  
Warning  
The system must be activated on the control  
display for the Cross Traffic Warning and brake  
intervention to switch on automatically.  
1.  
Apps menu  
The area behind the vehicle is monitored by  
sensors.  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Parking"  
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the area  
around the vehicle in front of the vehicle is  
monitored as well.  
The system indicates approaching road users.  
6. Depending on the equipment, select the  
following setting:  
If there is a collision risk when reversing, the  
system will provide assistance by performing  
an automatic brake intervention.  
▷
▷
▷
"Rear warning"  
"Front and rear warning"  
"Brake intervention at rear"  
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-  
tance systems" chapter.  
Turning on the cross traffic warning  
automatically  
Safety information  
The system must be activated on the control  
display. The system turns on automatically as  
soon as Park Distance Control or a camera  
view activates and you engage a gear position.  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the  
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready  
to take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
If reverse gear is engaged, the rear system is  
switched on.  
Depending on the equipment, the front system  
is turned on when a gear position is engaged.  
Depending on the national-market version, the  
system is automatically active when the vehi-  
cle is started.  
Turning off the cross traffic warning  
automatically  
The system is automatically turned off in the  
following situations:  
Sensors  
The system is controlled by the following sen-  
sors:  
208  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
When the speed exceeds walking speed.  
Display in the Park Distance Control view  
When a certain distance covered is ex-  
ceeded.  
Warning function  
General information  
The control display shows the corresponding  
view, an acoustic signal may sound as neces-  
sary, and the warning light in the exterior mir-  
ror flashes.  
In the Park Distance Control view, the respec-  
tive boundary area flashes red if vehicles are  
detected by the sensors.  
In case of a brake intervention, a message is  
displayed on the control display and close after  
a brief period of time.  
Display in camera image  
Visual warning  
Warning light in exterior mirror  
Depending on the direction of travel, the view  
to the front or back is displayed in the camera  
image.  
The warning light in the exterior mirror flashes  
if the rear sensors detect other vehicles when  
the vehicle is reversing.  
The respective boundary area, arrow 1, in the  
camera image flashes red if vehicles are de-  
tected by the sensors.  
Yellow lines, arrow 2, mark the bumper of your  
own vehicle.  
Acoustic warning  
In addition to the visual warning, a signal tone  
sounds if your own vehicle moves into the re-  
spective direction.  
Depending on the national-market version, the  
signal tone will already sound when the gear  
position is engaged.  
209  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Date.  
System limits  
Time.  
System limits of the sensors  
Additional information:  
Vehicle speed.  
Global Positioning System coordinates.  
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35.  
Data protection  
Functional limitations  
The function can be limited, for instance in the  
following situations:  
The permissibility of recording and using video  
recordings is contingent upon the statutory  
regulations of the country in which the system  
is to be used. The user is responsible for the  
use of the system and compliance with respec-  
tive applicable regulations.  
▷
▷
In tight curves.  
Crossing objects are moving at a very slow  
or a very fast speed.  
The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends  
confirming there are no statutory or regulatory  
constraints on use of the system in your state  
or country prior to the initial use. In addition,  
the laws with respect to use of the system  
should be verified in regular intervals, espe-  
cially when borders are frequently crossed.  
▷
▷
Other objects that hide cross traffic are in  
the capture range of the sensors.  
If the trailer power socket is occupied or  
trailer towing is activated, the cross traffic  
warning is not available for the area behind  
the vehicle.  
Other drivers of the vehicle must be informed  
about the system. In addition, information  
about the system is required when handing off  
the vehicle.  
BMW Drive Recorder  
Principle  
The BMW Drive Recorder stores brief video  
recordings of the vehicle surroundings, e.g., to  
document surrounding traffic.  
Functional requirements  
▷
Standby state or drive-ready state is  
switched on.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
BMW Drive Recorder is activated.  
Privacy Policy was accepted.  
Recording type was selected.  
Recording time was selected.  
General information  
Video recordings can be saved in different  
ways:  
▷
Automatic storage of the recording.  
Theft notification:  
The function makes it possible to document  
the accident or theft of the vehicle with the  
corresponding recording type set.  
▷
The theft notification was activated in the  
Data Protection menu or in the Drive Re-  
corder menu.  
▷
Manual storage of the recording.  
▷
▷
Data transfer is activated.  
This function is used to document traffic sit-  
uations with the configured recording type.  
My BMW App is installed on the mobile de-  
vice.  
The assistance systems' cameras are used to  
record, e.g., Panorama View.  
▷
▷
My BMW App is linked with the Connected-  
Drive account.  
Additionally, the following parameters are  
stored for the trip:  
Privacy Policy was accepted.  
210  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
Manual recording  
Activating/deactivating the BMW  
Drive Recorder  
The BMW Drive Recorder must be activated  
before the first use of the recording function.  
Using the button  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "All apps"  
3. "Drive Recorder"  
4. Accept Privacy Policy.  
5. "Settings"  
6. "Allow recording"  
7. Select the desired setting.  
Press and hold this button.  
Recording functions  
Via iDrive  
Automatic recording  
The recording is automatically stored when the  
vehicle sensors detect an accident or theft.  
Start the recording:  
1.  
Apps menu  
▷
In case of accident:  
2. "All apps"  
The system saves recordings up to 30 sec-  
onds before and after storage is triggered.  
3. "Drive Recorder"  
4. "Recording"  
▷
In case of theft:  
5. "Start recording"  
Depending on the selected recording dura-  
tion, the system saves the recording after it  
has been triggered.  
Stop the recording: "Stop recording".  
The system saves recordings up to 30 sec-  
onds before and after storage is triggered.  
When the alarm system is triggered, a mes-  
sage is sent to the My BMW App.  
Recording playback and  
administration  
Stored video recordings can be played back,  
exported and deleted.  
After saving the recording, the reduced  
quality video can be downloaded to a mo-  
bile device.  
If the vehicle accelerates rapidly, an automatic  
recording may be taken.  
For your own safety, the video recording is  
only displayed on the control display up to ap-  
prox. 2 mph/3 km/h. In some national-market  
versions, the video recording is only displayed  
if the parking brake is engaged or if the selec-  
tor lever is in the P position.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "All apps"  
3. "Drive Recorder"  
4. "Recordings"  
211  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
5. Select desired recording.  
and Bluetooth audio, or a USB storage de-  
vice is connected.  
6. If necessary, select camera.  
▷
▷
▷
My BMW App is installed on the mobile de-  
vice.  
Settings  
My BMW App is linked with the Connected-  
Drive account.  
Recording type  
1.  
Apps menu  
The My BMW App is permitted to access  
your photo library.  
2. "All apps"  
3. "Drive Recorder"  
4. "Settings"  
Recording  
The recording can be started and stopped  
manually.  
5. Select the desired setting.  
Start the recording:  
Recording time  
1.  
Apps menu  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "All apps"  
2. "All apps"  
3. "Drive Recorder"  
4. "Recording"  
3. "Drive Recorder"  
4. "Settings"  
5. "Start recording"  
Stop the recording: "Stop recording".  
5. Select the desired setting.  
Recording on a mobile device  
Cameras  
Principle  
Different cameras can be selected.  
Depending on the equipment version, video  
recordings can be stored directly on a mobile  
device such as a smartphone or USB storage.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "All apps"  
3. "Drive Recorder"  
4. "Settings"  
General information  
The length of the video that can be stored de-  
pends on the available memory capacity on  
the mobile device.  
5. "Cam. selection"  
6. Select desired camera.  
System limits  
Functional requirements  
In the event of serious accidents, it may not  
be possible to store recordings if the damage  
on the vehicle is too great or the power supply  
was interrupted.  
▷
Privacy Policy was accepted.  
▷
BMW Drive Recorder is activated.  
To transfer recordings to a mobile device:  
If you repeatedly overwrite a USB drive, it may  
not be possible to export recordings correctly.  
▷
Depending on vehicle equipment, a mobile  
device is connected to the vehicle via Wi-Fi  
The preferred file system for USB storage is  
NTFS. Other file systems may have limitations.  
212  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
In case of theft, the recording is only stored au-  
tomatically when the anti-theft warning system  
has been triggered.  
Safety information  
Warning  
If the internet connection is weak or cannot be  
established, theft alerts and video downloads  
may be restricted or not available.  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment. Due to the  
system limits, critical situations might not be  
detected reliably or in time. There is a risk  
of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic con-  
ditions. Watch surrounding traffic closely and  
actively intervene where appropriate  
The quality of the Wi-Fi connection affects  
whether recordings can be saved on your  
smartphone. This function may be restricted or  
not available if the connection is weak.  
Active Protection  
Function  
Depending on the equipment and require-  
ments, the following individual functions are  
active in accident-critical driving situations:  
Principle  
Active Protection prepares occupants and the  
vehicle for a possible accident in critical driving  
or collision situations.  
▷
▷
▷
Automatic closing of the windows.  
The windows remain open with a small  
gap.  
General information  
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-  
market version, Active Protection consists of  
various PreCrash functions.  
The glass sunroof/panoramic glass sunroof  
closes automatically.  
The sun protection is also closed.  
Automatic positioning of the backrest for  
the front passenger seat.  
The system is used to detect certain critical  
driving situations that might lead to an acci-  
dent. This includes the following critical driving  
situations:  
Systems can be returned to the desired set-  
tings following a critical driving situation with-  
out accident.  
▷
▷
▷
Emergency braking.  
Severe understeering.  
Severe oversteering.  
PostCrash iBrake  
Certain functions of several systems can,  
within the system limits, lead to Active Protec-  
tion triggering:  
Principle  
In certain accident situations, the PostCrash  
iBrake can automatically bring the vehicle to a  
standstill without intervention by the driver.  
▷
Forward Collision Mitigation: automatic  
brake intervention.  
▷
▷
Forward Collision Mitigation: brake booster.  
General information  
The PostCrash iBrake can reduce the risk of a  
further collision and its consequences.  
Rear-end collision preparation: detection of  
impending rear-end collisions.  
213  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
accident, injury, and property damage. Make  
sure that the driver is rested and alert. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions.  
At standstill  
After coming to a halt, the brake is released  
automatically.  
Harder vehicle deceleration  
In certain situations, it may be necessary to  
bring the vehicle to a stop more quickly than  
automatic braking with PostCrash iBrake.  
Break recommendation  
Function  
After starting the trip, the system is trained to  
the driver, so that decreasing alertness or fati-  
gue can be detected.  
To do this, quickly apply extra force to the  
brake. The brake pressure will then be higher  
than the brake pressure generated by auto-  
matic braking. Automatic braking with Post-  
Crash iBrake is canceled.  
This procedure takes, for example, the follow-  
ing criteria into account:  
▷
▷
▷
Personal driving style, for instance steering  
behavior.  
Abort automatic braking  
It may be necessary to cancel PostCrash  
iBrake automatic braking in certain situations,  
e.g., when making an evasive maneuver.  
Driving conditions, for instance time, length  
of trip.  
Depending on the equipment: attention  
of the driver through the Driver Attention  
Camera.  
Abort automatic braking:  
▷
By depressing the brake pedal for slightly  
longer.  
The system is active starting at ap-  
prox. 43 mph/70 km/h and can also display a  
break recommendation.  
▷
By pressing the accelerator pedal for  
slightly longer.  
Setting break recommendation  
The break recommendation can be switched  
on, off and adjusted via iDrive.  
Fatigue alert  
1.  
Apps menu  
Principle  
2. "Vehicle"  
The Fatigue Alert break recommendation fea-  
ture can detect when the driver is fatigued or  
less alert during long, monotonous trips, for in-  
stance on highways. The system recommends  
a break.  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Safety and warnings"  
6. "Fatigue Alert"  
7. Select the desired setting.  
Safety information  
Despite this function being off, some driver as-  
sistance systems may issue break recommen-  
dations.  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
one's physical state. An increasing lack of  
alertness or fatigue may not be detected or  
not be detected in time. There is a risk of  
Display  
If the driver becomes less alert or fatigued,  
a message is displayed in the control display  
with the recommendation to take a break.  
214  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
During the display, various settings can be se-  
lected.  
Overview  
The system is reset approx. 45 minutes after  
parking the vehicle. A break recommendation  
can only be displayed again after this time has  
elapsed.  
System limits  
The Fatigue Alert system may be limited. If  
the system is limited, either no warning may  
be issued or an unwarranted warning may be  
issued.  
Depending on vehicle equipment, the instru-  
ment cluster may have some infrared light  
sources. Depending on the light conditions,  
these light sources can be visible when the  
vehicle is in standby mode.  
The break recommendation function may be  
limited in the following situations:  
▷
▷
If the time is set incorrectly.  
At a predominantly driven speed below ap-  
prox. 43 mph/70 km/h.  
System limits  
The Driver Attention Camera may not be fully  
operational in the following situations:  
▷
▷
With a sporty driving style such as during  
rapid acceleration or when cornering fast.  
▷
When the Driver Attention Camera is cov-  
ered by the steering wheel.  
In active driving situations such as when  
changing lanes frequently.  
▷
With sunglasses with high protection from  
infrared light.  
▷
▷
When the road condition is poor.  
In the event of strong side winds.  
Driver Attention Camera  
Principle  
A camera in the instrument cluster monitors  
the driver’s activity and, depending on the  
equipment, the driver’s viewing direction.  
General information  
The assistance systems help drivers by ana-  
lyzing whether they are paying attention, e.g.,  
by evaluating their head position and eyes.  
For full operability, make sure that the field of  
view of the Driver Attention Camera is not ob-  
structed.  
215  
Driving stability control systems  
CONTROLS  
Driving stability control systems  
Vehicle features and options Brake assistant  
This chapter describes model-specific equip-  
ment, systems, and functions that are currently  
available, or may become available in the fu-  
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.  
The brake assistant automatically applies  
maximum braking assistance when the brake  
pedal is depressed quickly. This reduces the  
braking distance to a minimum for full braking.  
Additional information:  
To make full use of braking assistance, do not  
reduce the pressure on the brake pedal during  
full braking.  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
Antilock Braking System  
Dynamic Stability Control  
Principle  
Principle  
The Antilock Braking System prevents locking  
of the wheels during the braking process.  
Dynamic Stability Control helps keep the vehi-  
cle on a steady course in critical driving situa-  
tions. The drive power is reduced depending  
on the situation, and wheels can be braked  
individually.  
You remain able to steer your vehicle even dur-  
ing full braking, which increases active driving  
safety.  
General information  
The Antilock Braking System is ready after  
each time drive-ready state is turned on.  
General information  
The system detects the following unstable  
driving conditions, for instance:  
▷
▷
Skidding, which can lead to oversteering.  
Malfunction  
Loss of adhesion of the front wheels, which  
can lead to understeering.  
The warning light on the instrument  
cluster illuminates.  
A Check Control message is displayed.  
Safety information  
Warning  
▷
▷
The Antilock Braking System is not availa-  
ble.  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the  
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready  
Steerability is limited during full braking.  
Have the vehicle checked immediately by an  
authorized service center or another qualified  
service center or repair shop.  
216  
Driving stability control systems  
CONTROLS  
to take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
Activating/deactivating the system  
1.  
Press the button to open the menu.  
2. "DSC OFF"  
Warning  
Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated.  
When driving with a roof load, e.g., roof bars,  
the vehicle's center of gravity is higher. This  
increases the risk of the vehicle tipping in crit-  
ical driving situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, or property damage. Drive with  
roof load only with activated Dynamic Stabil-  
ity Control.  
3.  
Press the button again to reactivate  
Dynamic Stability Control.  
Displays in the instrument cluster  
View when Dynamic Stability  
Control is deactivated.  
Overview  
Button in the vehicle  
Indicator light illuminates: Dynamic  
Stability Control is deactivated.  
Warning light flashes: Dynamic Stabil-  
ity Control is regulating the driving and  
brake power. The vehicle is stabilized.  
Reduce speed and modify your driving style to  
the driving circumstances.  
Warning light illuminates: Dynamic Sta-  
bility Control has failed or is initializing.  
Driving stabilization is restricted or has  
failed.  
Dynamic Stability Control  
If the warning light illuminates continuously,  
have the vehicle checked immediately by an  
authorized service center or another qualified  
service center or repair shop.  
Activating/deactivating Dynamic  
Stability Control  
General information  
Dynamic Stability Control is automatically acti-  
vated whenever drive-ready state is switched  
on.  
Automatic program change  
Dynamic Stability Control can be activated au-  
tomatically by Forward Collision Mitigation de-  
pending on the situation. Deactivate Forward  
Collision Mitigation as necessary.  
If Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated, driv-  
ing stability is limited when accelerating and  
cornering.  
Additional information:  
To support driving stability, reactivate Dynamic  
Stability Control as soon as possible.  
Forward Collision Mitigation with brake inter-  
vention, refer to page 183.  
217  
Driving stability control systems  
CONTROLS  
Activating/deactivating the Dynamic  
Traction Control  
Dynamic Traction Control  
Principle  
1.  
Press the button to open the menu.  
The Dynamic Traction Control is a variant of  
the Dynamic Stability Control where the drive  
power is optimized.  
2. "Traction"  
Dynamic Traction Control is activated and  
Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated.  
The system ensures maximum drive power  
on unusual road conditions, for instance unp-  
lowed snow covered roads or loose road surfa-  
ces, but with somewhat limited driving stability.  
3.  
Press the button again to reactivate  
Dynamic Stability Control.  
General information  
Displays in the instrument cluster  
The vehicle has maximum traction when Dy-  
namic Traction Control is on. Driving stability  
is limited during acceleration and when corner-  
ing.  
View when Dynamic Traction  
Control is activated.  
A brief activation of the Dynamic Traction Con-  
trol may be useful in the following situations:  
Indicator light illuminates: Dynamic  
Traction Control is activated.  
▷
▷
▷
When driving in slush or on uncleared,  
snow-covered roads.  
When driving off from deep snow or loose  
ground.  
Automatic program change  
In certain situations, Dynamic Stability Control  
is activated automatically:  
When driving with snow chains.  
Overview  
▷
▷
When the Distance Control is activated.  
In case of a brake intervention by For-  
ward Collision Mitigation. Deactivate For-  
ward Collision Mitigation as necessary.  
Button in the vehicle  
▷
▷
If the suspension control system fails.  
The vehicle has a flat tire.  
Additional information:  
Forward Collision Mitigation with brake inter-  
vention, refer to page 183.  
BMW xDrive  
Dynamic Stability Control  
Principle  
BMW xDrive is the all-wheel-drive system of  
the vehicle. Concerted action by the BMW  
xDrive and other suspension control systems  
218  
Driving stability control systems  
CONTROLS  
such as Dynamic Stability Control further opti-  
mizes traction and driving dynamics.  
Hill Descent Control  
Principle  
General information  
Hill Descent Control is a downhill control fea-  
ture that adjusts the vehicle speed on steep  
downhill gradients, e.g., when driving on un-  
paved roads.  
BMW xDrive variably distributes the drive  
forces to the front and rear axles as required  
by the driving situation and road conditions.  
With the xOFFROAD package, the all-wheel-  
drive system is also adjusted to the respective  
xOFFROAD driving mode.  
General information  
When the system is active, the vehicle moves  
at the speed set by the driver, without the  
driver having to depress the brake pedal.  
Display on the control display  
In the Live Vehicle menu, information about  
BMW xDrive can be displayed under the fol-  
lowing view:  
While Hill Descent Control is adjusting the  
speed, the system automatically distributes the  
brake power to the individual wheels. This im-  
proves driving stability and steerability. If nec-  
essary, the Antilock Braking System prevents  
the wheels from locking.  
"xVIEW"  
The following information is displayed:  
▷
▷
Distribution of drive torque to the wheels.  
Hill Descent Control can be enabled at speeds  
below approx. 25 mph/40 km/h.  
Indication of longitudinal inclination in per-  
cent.  
Speeds can be set between approx.  
2 mph/3 km/h and approx. 20 mph/30 km/h.  
When the vehicle is driving downhill, the sys-  
tem reduces the speed to the set value, within  
the physical limits.  
▷
▷
▷
Indication of lateral inclination in percent.  
Graph of wheel angle.  
Level adjustment of the two-axle ride level  
control.  
▷
With navigation system: elevation for the  
current position.  
Hill Descent Control provides assistance when  
driving in selector lever positions D, N, and R.  
Additional information:  
Overview  
Live Vehicle, refer to page 146.  
Button in the vehicle  
M sport differential  
The M Sport differential provides for continu-  
ously variable locking of the rear axle differen-  
tial, depending on the driving situation. This  
prevents spinning of a single rear wheel and  
thereby provides optimal traction in any driving  
situation.  
The driver is responsible adapting his or her  
driving style to the situation.  
Hill Descent Control  
219  
Driving stability control systems  
CONTROLS  
Enabling/disabling Hill Descent  
Control  
Increasing or decreasing vehicle  
speed  
Activating the system  
Using the rocker button for cruise  
control  
Press the button.  
The set speed can be changed using the  
cruise control rocker button on the steering  
wheel.  
Speeds between approx.  
2 mph/3 km/h and approx.  
20 mph/30 km/h are adopted as the set  
speed.  
While Hill Descent Control is regulating the ve-  
hicle speed, the following functions are deacti-  
vated:  
▷
▷
Forward Collision Mitigation.  
Emergency braking function of Active Park  
Distance Control.  
Additional information:  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Press rocker button up: Speed increases  
gradually.  
▷
Forward Collision Mitigation, refer to  
page 183.  
Press rocker button up and hold: Speed in-  
creases while the rocker button is pressed.  
▷
Active Park Distance Control, refer to  
page 264.  
Press rocker button down: Speed de-  
creases gradually.  
Deactivating the system  
Press rocker button down and hold: Speed  
decreases while the rocker button is  
pressed.  
Press the button again.  
The system is automatically deacti-  
vated above approx. 25 mph/40 km/h.  
Using the brake pedal  
While Hill Descent Control is adjusting the  
speed, the target speed set can be reduced by  
depressing the brake pedal.  
Display in the instrument cluster  
An icon and the selected set  
speed are displayed.  
▷
Indicator green: Hill Descent  
Control is active. The system  
is actively braking the vehi-  
cle.  
Malfunction  
If a malfunction occurs, a Check Control mes-  
sage is displayed on the instrument cluster.  
▷
Indicator gray: Hill Descent Control is on  
standby.  
Servotronic  
Display in the Head-up display  
The status of Hill Descent Control can also be  
shown on the Head-up display.  
Principle  
Servotronic is a speed-dependent steering  
support.  
220  
Driving stability control systems  
CONTROLS  
The system provides the steering force with  
Using snow chains  
more support at low speeds than at higher  
ones. This makes it easier to park, for instance,  
and makes steering firmer when driving at  
faster speeds.  
In order to guarantee free movement of the  
wheels when operating with snow chains,  
rear-wheel steering must be turned off when  
snow chains are mounted.  
Additional information:  
Setting  
Rear-wheel steering during operation with  
snow chains, refer to page 362.  
The steering force adapts to the drive mode  
to convey a firm, sporty feel or a comfortable  
steering response.  
Malfunction  
The warning light on the instrument  
cluster illuminates.  
Integral Active Steering  
A Check Control message is displayed.  
Principle  
The steering system may not be operational.  
Integral Active Steering assistance may no lon-  
ger be provided.  
The Integral Active Steering increases the ma-  
neuverability of the vehicle and makes a more  
direct steering response possible. Driving sta-  
bility is also increased at high speeds.  
▷
▷
▷
Larger steering movements are required at  
low speeds.  
The response of the vehicle is more sensi-  
tive in higher speed ranges.  
General information  
Integral Active Steering combines variable  
sport steering with active rear-wheel steering.  
Proceed cautiously and practice anticipa-  
tory driving.  
The rear-wheel steering acts to increase ma-  
neuverability at low speeds by turning the rear  
wheels slightly in the opposite direction to the  
front wheels.  
Have the vehicle checked by an authorized  
service center or another qualified service cen-  
ter or repair shop.  
At higher speeds, the rear wheels are turned  
in the same direction as the front wheels. For  
instance, this results in a harmonious lane  
change.  
In critical driving situations, integral active  
steering can stabilize the vehicle by automat-  
ically steering the rear wheels, for example e.g.  
when oversteering.  
Setting  
The system offers several different settings.  
With the Driving Experience Control driving  
modes, the system can be set to comfortable  
or dynamic.  
Additional information:  
Driving Experience Control, refer to page 138.  
221  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Driver assistance systems  
Vehicle features and options Speed Limit Info  
This chapter describes model-specific equip-  
ment, systems, and functions that are currently  
Speed Limit Info  
available, or may become available in the fu-  
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.  
Principle  
Speed Limit Info shows the currently valid  
speed limit in the instrument cluster and, if  
necessary, the Head-up display.  
Additional information:  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
General information  
The camera in the area of the interior mirror  
detects traffic signs at the edge of the road as  
well as overhead sign posts.  
Speed warning  
Principle  
The speed warning can be used to set a speed  
limit. A warning will be issued when this speed  
limit is exceeded.  
Traffic signs with extra icons are considered  
and compared with the vehicle's onboard data.  
The traffic sign will then be either displayed  
or ignored depending on the situation in the  
instrument cluster and the Head-up display.  
General information  
The system may also show speed limits that  
apply to routes that are not signposted if the  
navigation system has current map data.  
Another speed warning is given when the set  
speed limit is exceeded again after it has drop-  
ped by 3 mph/5 km/h.  
For Speed Limit Info to function correctly, cur-  
rent map data for the country in which the ve-  
hicle is operated must be downloaded.  
Settings  
The Speed Limit Warning can be activated or  
deactivated. In addition, the speed limit for the  
warning can be configured.  
For information on the current map version  
and map updates, see Map update in the Nav-  
igation system chapter.  
1.  
Apps menu  
Without map data, the system is subject to  
certain technical limitations. Traffic signs with  
speed limitations are detected and displayed  
only. Speed limits due to entering towns/cities,  
highway signs, etc., are not displayed. Speed  
limits with extra traffic signs are always dis-  
played.  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Safety and warnings"  
6. "Speed warning"  
7. Select the desired setting.  
Speed limits for trailer towing will be displayed  
when the trailer power socket is occupied or  
trailer towing was activated via iDrive.  
Depending on the equipment, an approved  
maximum speed can be set up for trailer tow-  
222  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
ing, which will be taken into account for the  
display of speed limits.  
Warning signals  
Depending on the settings, an acoustic signal  
sounds if the detected speed limit is exceeded  
or the speed limit changes. The display also  
flashes if the detected speed limit is exceeded.  
Additional information:  
▷
▷
Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertain-  
ment, and Communication, refer to page 6.  
Trailer towing, refer to page 334.  
Settings  
Individual settings can be configured for Speed  
Limit Info, e.g., warnings issued if the speed is  
exceeded or the permissible maximum speed  
changes.  
Safety information  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the  
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready  
to take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Driving"  
6. "Speed Limit Assistant"  
7. Select the desired setting.  
System limits  
Sensors  
System limits of the sensors  
Additional information:  
The system is controlled by a camera behind  
the windshield.  
▷
Camera, refer to page 35.  
Display  
Functional limitations  
The system function may be limited and may  
provide incorrect information in the following  
situations:  
Speed Limit Info  
Icon  
Description  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Traffic signs are fully or partially concealed  
by objects, stickers, or paint.  
Current speed limit.  
Depending on the national-  
market version, it is possible  
to switch between the units of  
measurement.  
Traffic signs do not comply with the stand-  
ard.  
In areas that are not included in the naviga-  
tion system map data.  
No data on current speed limit  
available.  
If navigation system map data is invalid,  
outdated, or unavailable.  
When roads deviate from the navigation  
such as due to changes in road layout.  
Speed Limit Info not available.  
223  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
When driving very close to the vehicle in  
front of you.  
Safety information  
When passing buses or trucks with traffic  
signs applied to them.  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the  
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready  
to take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
▷
▷
In case of electronic traffic signs.  
When traffic signs that are valid for a paral-  
lel road are detected.  
▷
In the presence of country-specific road  
signs or road layouts.  
Speed control systems  
Principle  
The speed control systems provide support  
when driving.  
Overview  
Buttons on the steering wheel  
Button Function  
General information  
Depending on the equipment, the speed con-  
trol systems include the following individual  
systems.  
Turn last active speed control sys-  
tem on/off.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Cruise control, refer to page 226.  
Distance Control, refer to page 229.  
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 235.  
Select the desired speed control  
system.  
Assisted Driving Mode Plus, refer to  
page 240.  
Store current speed.  
Speed Limit Assistant: accept sug-  
gested speed manually.  
Depending on the equipment and national-  
market version, the individual systems are en-  
hanced with additional functions.  
Resume speed control systems with  
the stored setting.  
Some functions can be operated via voice con-  
trol.  
Interrupt speed control systems.  
Set speed.  
Additional information:  
BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant, refer to  
page 53.  
224  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
While Dynamic Traction Control is acti-  
vated.  
Turning on/selecting speed control  
systems  
When performing a manual braking proc-  
ess.  
1.  
Turn on: press the button.  
Interrupting speed control systems  
manually  
2.  
Select: when the system is active,  
press the button repeatedly until the de-  
sired speed control system is displayed in  
the toolbar in the instrument cluster.  
Press the button.  
Icon  
Speed control system  
Continuing speed control systems  
Cruise control.  
Press the button.  
Distance control.  
Turning off speed control systems  
automatically  
The speed control systems turn off automati-  
cally when the drive-ready state is turned off.  
Assisted Driving Mode: Cruise Control  
with Distance Control, Steering Assis-  
tance with lane keeping.  
Turning off speed control systems  
manually  
The activated system is shown in green.  
The system is shown in white when the sys-  
tem can be activated.  
Press the button.  
The speed control systems are turned  
off and the displays extinguish.  
The system is grayed out if the system has  
failed or if the functional requirements are not  
met.  
Adjusting speed values  
Interrupting speed control systems  
automatically  
Depending on the system, speed control  
systems are interrupted automatically, for in-  
stance in the following situations:  
Repeatedly press the rocker button on  
the steering wheel up or down until the  
desired value is set.  
▷
▷
Each time the rocker button is pressed  
to the resistance point, the set speed in-  
creases or decreases by 1 mph/1 km/h.  
▷
▷
▷
When moving from selector lever position D  
to P, N, or R.  
Each time the rocker button is pressed past  
the resistance point, the set speed changes  
by a maximum of 5 mph/10 km/h.  
While Dynamic Stability Control regulates  
driving stability.  
While Dynamic Stability Control is disabled.  
225  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Display in the instrument cluster  
Safety information  
Marking on speedometer  
Warning  
A mark for the set speed ap-  
pears on the speedometer.  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the  
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready  
to take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
▷
Green marking: system is ac-  
tive.  
▷
Gray marking: system is in-  
terrupted.  
▷
No marking: system is switched off.  
Notifications  
In addition to the respective indicator lights,  
notifications are displayed for some functions.  
Warning  
The scope of notifications can be set.  
The use of the system can lead to an in-  
creased risk of accidents in the following sit-  
uations, for instance:  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Driving"  
▷
▷
▷
On winding roads.  
With high traffic volume.  
On slippery roads, in fog, snow, or wet  
conditions, or on a loose road surface.  
6. "Notifications"  
7. Select the desired setting.  
There is a risk of accident, injury, and prop-  
erty damage. Only use the system if driving  
at constant speed is possible.  
Cruise Control  
Principle  
Warning  
With the Cruise Control, a set speed can be ad-  
justed using the buttons on the steering wheel.  
The system maintains the set speed. The sys-  
tem accelerates and brakes automatically as  
needed.  
The set speed can be incorrectly adjusted or  
called up by mistake. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust the  
set speed to the traffic conditions. Watch sur-  
rounding traffic closely and actively intervene  
where appropriate  
General information  
The system can be activated starting at  
20 mph/30 km/h.  
Depending on the vehicle setting, the Cruise  
Control settings can change under certain  
conditions. For instance, the acceleration can  
change depending on the driving mode.  
226  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
The indicator lights on the instrument cluster  
illuminate and the mark on the speedometer is  
set to the current speed.  
Overview  
Buttons on the steering wheel  
Button Function  
The driving mode changes or Dynamic Sta-  
bility Control activates when cruise control is  
switched on.  
Turn last active speed control sys-  
tem on/off.  
Turning the speed control system  
off/interrupting  
The speed control system can be turned off or  
canceled automatically or manually.  
Select the desired speed control  
system.  
Store current speed.  
Additional information:  
Speed Limit Assistant: accept sug-  
gested speed manually.  
Speed control systems, refer to page 224.  
Adjusting the speed  
Resume speed control systems with  
the stored setting.  
Store/maintain speed  
Interrupt speed control systems.  
Set speed.  
Press the rocker button up or down  
once while the system is stopped.  
When the system is switched on, the current  
speed is maintained and stored as the set  
speed.  
The saved speed is shown on the speedome-  
ter.  
Turning on the Cruise Control  
In vehicles with distance control: change the  
mode of the Cruise Control to Cruise Control  
without distance control.  
When the Speed Limit Assistant is not active,  
the current speed can also be stored by press-  
ing a button:  
Additional information:  
Press the button.  
Distance Control, refer to page 229.  
In vehicles without distance control: turn on the  
Cruise Control with the buttons on the steering  
wheel.  
Changing the speed  
Repeatedly press the rocker button up  
or down until the desired speed is set.  
1.  
If necessary, press the button.  
If active, the displayed speed is stored  
and the vehicle reaches the stored speed  
when the road is clear.  
2.  
If necessary, press the button re-  
peatedly until the Cruise Control is selected.  
The maximum speed that can be set depends  
on the vehicle.  
Cruise control is active. The current speed is  
maintained and stored as desired speed.  
227  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Press rocker button to resistance point and  
hold: The vehicle accelerates or decelerates  
without the accelerator pedal being pressed.  
Speed Limit Assistant: at the  
suggested speed  
When a speed is suggested, press the  
button to accept the Cruise Control at  
the suggested speed.  
After the rocker button is released, the vehicle  
maintains the final speed achieved. Pressing  
the switch beyond the resistance point causes  
the vehicle to accelerate more rapidly.  
Displays in the instrument cluster  
Continuing cruise control  
Marking on speedometer  
▷
Green marking: system is ac-  
tive, the marking indicates  
the desired speed.  
At the stored speed  
Warning  
▷
Gray marking: system is in-  
terrupted, the marking indi-  
cates the stored speed.  
The set speed can be incorrectly adjusted or  
called up by mistake. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust the  
set speed to the traffic conditions. Watch sur-  
rounding traffic closely and actively intervene  
where appropriate  
▷
No marking: system is switched off.  
Indicator light  
An interrupted cruise control can be continued  
by calling up the stored speed. The difference  
between the current speed and the stored  
speed should be as little as possible.  
Icon  
Description  
Indicator light green: system is active.  
Press the button with the system inter-  
rupted.  
Gray indicator light: the system has  
been interrupted.  
Cruise control is continued with the stored val-  
ues.  
Displays in the Head-up display  
Depending on the equipment, some system  
information can also be displayed in the Head-  
up display.  
In the following cases, the stored speed value  
is deleted and cannot be called up again:  
▷
▷
When the system is switched off.  
When drive-ready state is switched off.  
System limits  
The set speed is also maintained downhill. The  
speed may not be maintained on uphill grades  
if the drive power is insufficient.  
At the current speed  
Press the rocker button up or down to  
continue cruise control at the current  
speed.  
Depending on the driving mode, the vehicle  
may exceed or drop below the set desired  
speed in some situations; for instance, on  
downhill or uphill grades.  
Do not use Cruise Control when towing.  
228  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Distance control  
Warning  
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and  
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident,  
injury, or property damage. Before leaving  
the vehicle, secure the vehicle against rolling  
away.  
Principle  
With the distance control, a distance to a vehi-  
cle driving ahead can be adjusted in addition to  
the Cruise Control.  
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured  
against rolling away, follow the following:  
General information  
The system maintains the set speed on clear  
roads. The vehicle accelerates or brakes auto-  
matically.  
▷
▷
Set the parking brake.  
On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,  
turn the front wheels in the direction of  
the curb.  
If a vehicle is driving ahead of you, the system  
adjusts the speed of the vehicle so that the set  
distance to the vehicle ahead is maintained.  
The speed is adjusted as far as the given sit-  
uation allows.  
▷
On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,  
also secure the vehicle, for instance with  
a wheel chock.  
The distance can be adjusted at several levels.  
For safety reasons, it depends on the respec-  
tive speed.  
Warning  
The set speed can be incorrectly adjusted or  
called up by mistake. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust the  
set speed to the traffic conditions. Watch sur-  
rounding traffic closely and actively intervene  
where appropriate  
If the vehicle ahead of you brakes to a stand-  
still and then drives off again within a brief pe-  
riod, the system is able to detect this within the  
given system limits.  
Otherwise, drive off independently such as by  
stepping on the accelerator pedal or by press-  
ing the button for the speed setting on the  
steering wheel.  
Warning  
Risk of accident is greater when there is a  
high speed differential to other vehicles, for  
instance in the following situations:  
Safety information  
Warning  
▷
▷
▷
When approaching a slowly moving ve-  
hicle at speed.  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the  
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready  
to take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
Vehicle suddenly swerving into own  
lane.  
When approaching stationary vehicles at  
speed.  
There is a risk of injury or danger to life.  
Watch surrounding traffic closely and actively  
intervene where appropriate  
229  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Overview  
Turning on Cruise Control with  
Distance Control  
Buttons on the steering wheel  
1.  
If necessary, press the button.  
Button Function  
Turn last active speed control sys-  
tem on/off.  
2.  
If necessary, press the button re-  
peatedly until distance control is selected.  
Select the desired speed control  
system.  
Cruise Control with Distance Control is active.  
The current speed is maintained and stored as  
desired speed.  
Store current speed.  
The selected distance to a vehicle driving  
ahead is maintained.  
Speed Limit Assistant: accept sug-  
gested speed manually.  
The indicator lights on the instrument cluster  
illuminate and the mark on the speedometer is  
set to the current speed.  
Resume speed control systems with  
the stored setting.  
The driving mode changes or Dynamic Stabil-  
ity Control activates when Distance Control is  
switched on.  
Interrupt speed control systems.  
Set speed.  
Adjusting the speed  
The speed can be set using the rocker button  
on the steering wheel.  
Additional information:  
Sensors  
Cruise control, refer to page 226.  
The system is controlled by the following sen-  
sors:  
Interrupting Cruise Control with  
Distance Control automatically  
The system is stopped automatically in the fol-  
lowing situations, for example:  
▷
▷
Camera behind the windshield.  
Front radar sensor.  
Additional information:  
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35.  
▷
When performing a manual braking proc-  
ess.  
Application range  
The system is best used on well-maintained  
roads.  
▷
▷
▷
Selector lever position D is disengaged.  
While Dynamic Stability Control is disabled.  
While Dynamic Traction Control is acti-  
vated.  
The maximum speed that can be set is limited  
and depends, for example, on the vehicle and  
the vehicle equipment.  
▷
▷
While Dynamic Stability Control regulates  
driving stability.  
The system can also be activated when sta-  
tionary.  
Driver's seat belt and driver's door are  
opened.  
Do not use Cruise Control and Distance Control  
when towing.  
230  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
▷
The system has not detected objects for  
The mark on the speedometer  
illuminates gray.  
an extended period, for instance on a  
road with very little traffic without curb or  
shoulder markings.  
▷
▷
The detection range of the radar is im-  
paired, for instance by contamination or  
heavy precipitation.  
The indicator light illuminates green.  
After a longer stationary period when the  
vehicle has been braked to a stop by the  
system.  
Cruise control can be continued as follows:  
▷
Pressing the accelerator pedal.  
Turning the speed control system  
off/interrupting  
The speed control system can be turned off or  
canceled automatically or manually.  
▷
Press the rocker button on the left  
side of the steering wheel.  
▷
▷
Press the button on the left side of  
the steering wheel.  
Additional information:  
Speed control systems, refer to page 224.  
Press the button on the left side of  
the steering wheel.  
Continuing cruise control while  
driving  
Distance  
Warning  
The set speed can be incorrectly adjusted or  
called up by mistake. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust the  
set speed to the traffic conditions. Watch sur-  
rounding traffic closely and actively intervene  
where appropriate  
Safety information  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment. Due to the  
system limits, deceleration can be late. There  
may be a risk of accidents or risk of dam-  
age to property. Be aware of the surround-  
ing traffic situation at all times. Adjust the  
distance to the traffic and weather conditions  
and maintain the prescribed safety distance,  
possibly by braking.  
An interrupted cruise control can be continued  
by calling up the stored speed. The difference  
between the current speed and the stored  
speed should be as little as possible.  
Additional information:  
Cruise control, refer to page 226.  
Continuing cruise control while  
vehicle is stationary  
Adjusting the distance  
1.  
Apps menu  
In certain situations, this system requires the  
driver to confirm their intention to drive off.  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
The displays show the following:  
231  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
5. "Driving"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
6. "Distance control"  
7. "Distance"  
5. "Driving"  
6. "Distance control"  
8. Select the desired setting.  
7. "Switch to Cruise Control"  
The setting is reset when the vehicle is parked.  
Automatic adaptation of the distance  
Depending on the equipment and national-  
market version: the system can be set so that  
the distance to the vehicle in front is automati-  
cally adjusted within the set distance. The sys-  
tem takes into account the traffic situation and  
ambient conditions, e.g. poor visibility.  
Displays in the instrument cluster  
General information  
Depending on the equipment version, the dis-  
plays in the instrument cluster may vary.  
1.  
Apps menu  
Marking on speedometer  
2. "Vehicle"  
▷
Green marking: system is ac-  
tive, the marking indicates  
the desired speed.  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Driving"  
▷
Gray marking: system is in-  
terrupted, the marking indi-  
cates the stored speed.  
6. "Distance control"  
7. "Situational distance control"  
▷
No marking: system is switched off.  
Changing between Cruise Control  
with/without Distance Control  
Indicator lights and warning lights  
Icon  
Description  
Safety information  
White indicator light:  
No Distance Control because acceler-  
ator pedal is being pressed.  
Warning  
The system does not react to traffic driv-  
ing ahead of you, but instead maintains the  
stored speed. There is a risk of accident,  
injury, and property damage. Adjust the set  
speed to the traffic conditions and brake as  
needed.  
Indicator light illuminates green:  
Vehicle has been detected ahead of  
you.  
The vehicle icon goes out if no vehicle  
has been detected ahead of you.  
Indicator light flashes green:  
Changing over the Cruise Control mode  
Preceding vehicle has driven off.  
Turning Cruise Control without distance control  
on or off:  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
232  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
Distance too short.  
Speed greater than approx.  
40 mph/70 km/h.  
Icon  
Description  
Indicator light illuminates gray:  
The system is interrupted.  
Indicator light flashes gray:  
System limits  
Conditions are not adequate for the  
system to work.  
System limits of the sensors  
Additional information:  
The system was deactivated but ap-  
plies the brakes until you actively  
resume control by pressing on the  
brake pedal or accelerator pedal.  
▷
▷
Cameras, refer to page 35.  
Radar sensors, refer to page 36.  
Detection range  
Warning light flashes red and acous-  
tic signal sounds:  
Brake and make an evasive maneu-  
ver, if necessary.  
Assisted View  
Depending on the equipment and national-  
market version, information for the system is  
displayed in the Assisted View in the central  
display area of the instrument cluster.  
Sensors detect the traffic situation in their de-  
tection range.  
Additional information:  
Assisted View, refer to page 161.  
The detection capability of the system and the  
automatic braking performance are limited.  
Displays in the Head-up display  
For instance, two-wheeled vehicles may not be  
detected.  
Set speed  
Depending on the equipment, some system  
information can also be displayed in the Head-  
up display.  
Deceleration  
The system does not decelerate in the follow-  
ing situations:  
Distance information  
▷
For pedestrians or similarly slow-moving  
road users.  
The icon is displayed when the dis-  
tance from the vehicle traveling ahead  
is too short.  
▷
▷
For cross traffic.  
For oncoming traffic.  
The distance information is active in the fol-  
lowing situations:  
▷
Cruise Control with Distance Control  
switched off.  
▷
Display in the Head-up display selected.  
Head-up display, refer to page 147.  
233  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Merging vehicles  
When you approach a curve the system may  
briefly report vehicles in the next lane due  
to the bend of the curve. If the system decel-  
erates you may compensate for it by briefly  
accelerating. After releasing the accelerator  
pedal the system is reactivated and controls  
speed independently.  
If a vehicle driving ahead of you suddenly  
merges into your lane, the system may not be  
able to automatically restore the selected dis-  
tance. It may not be possible to restore the se-  
lected distance in certain situations, including if  
you are driving significantly faster than vehicles  
driving ahead of you, for instance when rapidly  
approaching a truck. When a vehicle driving  
ahead of you is reliably detected, the system  
requests that the driver intervene by braking  
and making an evasive maneuver, if needed.  
Driving off  
In some situations, the vehicle cannot drive off  
automatically; for example:  
▷
▷
▷
On steep uphill grades.  
In front of bumps in the road.  
With a heavy trailer.  
Cornering  
In these cases, step on the accelerator pedal.  
Weather  
The following restrictions can occur under un-  
favorable weather or light conditions:  
▷
▷
Poorer vehicle detection.  
Short-term interruptions for vehicles that  
are already recognized.  
When the set speed is too high for a curve,  
the speed is reduced slightly. Because curves  
may not be anticipated in advance, drive into a  
curve at an appropriate speed.  
Drive attentively, and react to the current sur-  
rounding traffic situation. If necessary, inter-  
vene actively, for instance by braking, steering  
or making an evasive maneuver.  
The system has a limited detection range. Sit-  
uations can arise in tight curves where a vehi-  
cle driving ahead will not be detected or will be  
detected very late.  
Drive power  
The set speed is also maintained downhill. The  
speed may not be maintained on uphill grades  
if the drive power is insufficient.  
Depending on the driving mode, the vehicle  
may exceed or drop below the set desired  
234  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
speed in some situations; for instance, on  
downhill or uphill grades.  
▷
▷
Cruise control, refer to page 226.  
Distance Control, refer to page 229.  
Overview  
Assisted Driving Mode  
Buttons on the steering wheel  
Button Function  
Principle  
Assisted Driving Mode enhances Distance  
Control with Steering Assistance and lane  
keeping. The system assists the driver in keep-  
ing the vehicle within the lane. For this pur-  
pose, the system executes supporting steering  
movements, for instance when cornering.  
Turn last active speed control sys-  
tem on/off.  
Select the desired speed control  
system.  
General information  
Depending on the speed, the system orients  
itself according to the lane boundaries or vehi-  
cles in front.  
Store current speed.  
Speed Limit Assistant: accept sug-  
gested speed manually.  
Resume speed control systems with  
the stored setting.  
Sensors in the steering wheel detect whether  
the steering wheel is being touched.  
Depending on the vehicle equipment and  
national-market version, the Driver Attention  
Camera in the instrument cluster monitors the  
driver's attention.  
Interrupt speed control systems.  
Set speed.  
Safety information  
Sensors  
Warning  
The system is controlled by the following sen-  
sors:  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the  
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready  
to take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
▷
▷
▷
Camera behind the windshield.  
Front radar sensor.  
Depending on the equipment:  
Radar sensors, side, front.  
Depending on the equipment:  
Radar sensors, side, rear.  
Sensors in steering wheel.  
▷
▷
▷
Depending on the vehicle equipment and  
national-market version: Driver Attention  
Camera  
The Cruise Control and Distance Control alerts  
also apply.  
Additional information:  
Additional information:  
235  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35.  
Driver Attention Camera, refer to page 215.  
When the system is switched on, the Forward  
Collision Mitigation and, depending on the  
equipment, the side-collision warning are ac-  
tive.  
Functional requirements  
▷
Depending on the equipment: speed below  
130 mph/210 km/h or 110 mph/180 km/h.  
Stopping Assisted Driving Mode  
automatically  
The system interrupts the supporting steering  
movements automatically, for example in the  
following situations:  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Sufficient lane width.  
Hands on the steering wheel rim.  
Sufficiently wide curve radius.  
Drive in the center of the lane.  
▷
Depending on the equipment: at a  
speed above 130 mph/210 km/h or  
110 mph/180 km/h.  
The sensor system calibration process is  
complete.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
After releasing the steering wheel.  
With strong steering intervention.  
When leaving own lane.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Distance control is active.  
Seat belt on the driver's side fastened.  
Forward Collision Mitigation is active.  
Depending on the equipment:  
Side-collision warning is active.  
When the turn signal is switched on or, de-  
pending on the vehicle equipment, when  
the driver turns the steering wheel while the  
turn signal is switched on.  
▷
With trailer hitch: You must set on the con-  
trol display that you are using a trailer or  
rear carrier, respectively.  
▷
▷
When the lane is too narrow.  
If a lane boundary is not detected and there  
is no vehicle driving in front.  
Driving with trailer or rear carrier, refer to  
page 336.  
▷
▷
The Cruise Control with Distance Control is  
interrupted.  
Switching on Assisted Driving Mode  
The seat belt on the driver's side is unfas-  
tened.  
1.  
If necessary, press the button.  
Indicator light illuminates gray.  
The system is on standby and does not  
manipulate steering movements.  
2.  
If necessary, press the button re-  
peatedly until Assisted Driving Mode is se-  
lected.  
System activates automatically as soon as all  
function conditions are fulfilled.  
Indicator light illuminates gray.  
The system is on standby and does not  
manipulate steering movements.  
System activates automatically as soon as all  
function conditions are fulfilled.  
The indicator light illuminates green.  
The system is active and helps to keep  
the vehicle in the lane.  
236  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Displays in the instrument cluster  
Icon  
Description  
Warning light illuminates yellow:  
Icon  
Description  
Hands are not grasping the steering  
wheel. The system is still active.  
Indicator light illuminates gray:  
The system is ready.  
Grab the steering wheel with your  
hands.  
Indicator light illuminates green:  
The system is activated.  
Warning light illuminates red, acous-  
tic signal sounds:  
The system supports the driver in  
keeping the vehicle within the lane.  
The hands are not on the steering  
wheel or, depending on the vehicle  
equipment and national-market ver-  
sion, the driver's line of sight is not di-  
rected at the surrounding traffic. Sys-  
tem interruption is imminent.  
Warning light flashes yellow and  
steering wheel vibrates:  
A lane boundary has been crossed.  
Warning light illuminates yellow and  
acoustic signal sounds:  
The system reduces the speed to a  
standstill if applicable.  
System interruption is imminent.  
It is possible that the system will  
not execute any supporting steering  
movements.  
Warning light flashes red and acous-  
tic signal sounds:  
The system is switched off or will be  
interrupted very soon.  
Immediately grasp the steering wheel  
with your hands and pay attention to  
the surrounding traffic.  
Depending on the vehicle equipment and na-  
tional-market version, a Check Control mes-  
sage is displayed if the Driver Attention Cam-  
era detects that the driver is inattentive.  
Depending on the equipment and national-  
market version, information for the system is  
displayed in the Assisted View in the central  
display area of the instrument cluster.  
Additional information:  
Assisted View, refer to page 161.  
237  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Displays on the steering wheel  
System limits  
General information  
The system cannot be activated or meaning-  
fully used in certain situations, e.g., when tow-  
ing a trailer.  
Safety information  
Warning  
Similar to the instrument cluster views, the two  
LEDs above the keypads illuminate.  
Because of system limitations, this system  
may either not respond, or respond too late,  
incorrectly, or without cause. There is a risk  
of accident, injury, and property damage. Ac-  
tively intervene as warranted. Refer to the in-  
formation in this Owner’s Manual regarding  
the scope of the system’s operation and limi-  
tations.  
The steering wheel displays can be turned on/  
off.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Feedback via steering wheel"  
6. "Light elements"  
The Cruise Control and Distance Control alerts  
also apply.  
Additional information:  
7. Select the desired setting.  
▷
▷
Cruise control, refer to page 226.  
Distance Control, refer to page 229.  
Displays in the Head-up display  
Depending on the equipment, the system in-  
formation can also be displayed in the Head-  
up display.  
System limits of the sensors  
Additional information:  
▷
▷
▷
Cameras, refer to page 35.  
Radar sensors, refer to page 36.  
Driver Attention Camera, refer to page 215.  
Setting the intensity of the steering  
wheel vibration  
1.  
Apps menu  
Hands on the steering wheel  
The sensors cannot detect hand-steering  
wheel contact in the following situations:  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Feedback via steering wheel"  
6. "Vibration intensity"  
7. Select the desired setting.  
▷
▷
Driving with gloves.  
Protective covers on the steering wheel.  
Weather  
The following restrictions can occur under un-  
favorable weather or light conditions:  
This setting is applied to all collision warning  
systems.  
238  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
Poorer recognition of vehicles and lane  
boundaries.  
Functional requirements  
▷
The functional requirements for Assisted  
Driving Mode have been met.  
Short-term interruptions in case of already  
detected vehicles and lane boundaries.  
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 235.  
Drive attentively, and react to the current sur-  
rounding traffic situation. If necessary, inter-  
vene actively, for instance by braking, steering  
or making an evasive maneuver.  
▷
▷
Driving on a road without pedestrians or cy-  
clists and with physical barriers to oncom-  
ing traffic such as crash barriers.  
A vehicle has been detected at a sufficient  
distance behind your own vehicle since be-  
ginning the drive.  
Lane Change Assistant  
▷
▷
Crossable lane boundaries are detected.  
Maximum speed approx.  
110 mph/180 km/h.  
Principle  
The Lane Change Assistant also assists when  
changing lanes on multi-lane roads.  
▷
▷
The minimum speed is country-specific.  
With trailer hitch: You must set on the con-  
trol display that you are using a trailer or  
rear carrier, respectively.  
General information  
The system uses the Assisted Driving Mode  
sensors.  
Driving with trailer or rear carrier, refer to  
page 336.  
Safety information  
Turning on/turning off Lane Change  
Assistant  
Warning  
1.  
Apps menu  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the  
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready  
to take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Driving"  
6. "Assisted Driving"  
7.  
▷
"Lane Change Assistant": Turning the  
Lane Change Assistant on/off.  
▷
"Active Lane Change": Depending on  
vehicle equipment and national-market  
version, lane changes can be done au-  
tomatically.  
Federal, state, or local laws may differ, and  
the use of this function may be prohibited or  
limited. Before use, check federal, state, and  
local laws.  
Changing lanes  
1. Ensure that the traffic situation permits  
changing lanes.  
The Assisted Driving Mode alerts also apply.  
Additional information:  
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 235.  
2. Start the lane change.  
239  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
▷
To initiate the lane change, press the  
turn signal lever in the desired direction  
to the resistance point.  
displayed in the Assisted View in the central  
display area of the instrument cluster.  
Additional information:  
Depending on the vehicle equipment,  
the turn signal lever can also be pressed  
beyond the resistance point.  
Assisted View, refer to page 161.  
System limits  
The limits of the Assisted Driving Mode system  
apply.  
Depending on vehicle equipment, after  
receiving a lane change suggestion,  
an automatic lane change can be initi-  
ated once the driver checks their field  
of vision to ensure that traffic permits  
the lane change. For this case, Lane  
Change Assistant must clearly recog-  
nize the driving situation and the Driver  
Attention Camera must clearly recog-  
nize the driver's line of sight.  
The limits of the Driver Attention Camera sys-  
tem also apply to automatic lane changes.  
Additional information:  
▷
▷
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 235.  
Driver Attention Camera, refer to page 215.  
After a short time, Lane Change Assistant ini-  
tiates a lane change.  
Assisted Driving Mode Plus  
After the lane change, the system helps keep  
the vehicle in the new lane.  
Principle  
Assisted Driving Mode Plus provides assis-  
tance when driving on highways.  
Canceling a lane change  
The lane change can be canceled by steering  
movement into the opposite direction or by op-  
erating the turn signal in the opposite direction.  
The system increases driving comfort in suita-  
ble driving situations.  
Sensors in the steering wheel detect whether  
the steering wheel is being touched.  
Different versions of this function are available  
depending on vehicle equipment and national-  
market version.  
Displays in the instrument cluster  
Icon  
Description  
▷
Version for speeds up to approx.  
40 mph/60 km/h, e.g., traffic jam.  
Steering wheel icon and lane change  
arrow icon are green:  
▷
Version for speeds up to approx.  
85 mph/135 km/h.  
The system carries out a lane  
change.  
Steering wheel icon is green and line  
for lane marking on respective side is  
gray:  
General information  
For versions up to 85 mph/135 km/h, the fol-  
lowing applies:  
The system detected the lane change  
request. Lane change not currently  
possible.  
Assisted Driving Mode Plus will be active at the  
time of vehicle delivery and will only be avail-  
able for a limited period. Information about  
the duration of availability for Assisted Driving  
Mode Plus will be available prior to and at  
the time of vehicle sale. Assisted Driving Mode  
Plus may be terminated earlier due to techni-  
Depending on the equipment and national-  
market version, information for the system is  
240  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
cal or legal requirements. Further information  
Overview  
about the availability of Assisted Driving Mode  
Plus can be requested from an authorized  
service center.  
Sensors  
The system is controlled by the following sen-  
sors:  
Safety information  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Camera behind the windshield.  
Front radar sensor.  
Warning  
Side radar sensors, front.  
Side radar sensors, rear.  
The sensors in the steering wheel.  
Driver Attention Camera.  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the  
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready  
to take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
The version up to 85 mph/135 km/h addition-  
ally uses the following sensors:  
▷
▷
▷
Front camera.  
Exterior mirror cameras.  
Rearview camera.  
Additional information:  
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35.  
Warning  
This system is only intended for use on  
roads with structural separation from oncom-  
ing traffic, e.g., highways. Because of the  
system limits, the system can also remain ac-  
tive on roads without structural separations  
and may not react as expected. There is  
a risk of accident, injury, and property dam-  
age. Deactivate the system if it is enabled on  
roads without structural separations.  
Functional requirements  
The following functional requirements apply to  
Assisted Driving Mode Plus:  
▷
Assisted Driving Mode Plus must be avail-  
able in the country in which the vehicle is  
driven.  
▷
The functional requirements for Assisted  
Driving Mode have been met.  
Assisted Driving Mode is active and the  
LED displays on the steering wheel are  
switched on.  
Federal, state, or local laws may differ, and  
the use of this function may be prohibited or  
limited. Before use, check federal, state, and  
local laws.  
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 235.  
▷
Driving on a highway-like road without pe-  
destrians or cyclists and with physical barri-  
ers to oncoming traffic, e.g., guard rails.  
The Assisted Driving Mode alerts also apply.  
Additional information:  
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 235.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Lane boundaries are detected.  
Sufficient lane width.  
Sufficiently wide curve radius.  
The navigation system must clearly identify  
the road and vehicle position.  
241  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
▷
This function must be available on the road  
on which the vehicle is driving.  
and all functional requirements for Assisted  
Driving Mode Plus have been met.  
Antennas located in the roof must not be  
covered, e.g., by roof loads or snow.  
Two green LED lights are illuminated on the  
steering wheel.  
The Driver Attention Camera in the instru-  
ment cluster detects that the driver is pay-  
ing attention to the surrounding traffic.  
The indicator light in the instrument cluster is  
shown in green.  
The system begins to assist the driver with  
vehicle control.  
▷
With trailer hitch: You must set on the con-  
trol display that you are using a trailer or  
rear carrier, respectively.  
When the system is switched on, the following  
functions are enabled:  
Driving with trailer or rear carrier, refer to  
page 336.  
▷
▷
▷
Forward Collision Mitigation.  
Side collision mitigation.  
For the version up to 40 mph/60 km/h, the fol-  
lowing additional functional requirements ap-  
ply:  
For the version up to 85 mph/135 km/h:  
Some speed control systems, e.g., adjust-  
ing speed to course of road.  
▷
▷
A vehicle has been detected ahead of you.  
Speed below approx. 40 mph/60 km/h.  
Displays in the instrument cluster  
For the version up to 85 mph/135 km/h, the  
following additional functional requirements  
apply:  
Icon  
Description  
Indicator light green: system is active.  
▷
Assisted Driving Mode Plus is enabled in  
the vehicle.  
▷
▷
The navigation data must be up to date.  
Indicator light gray: the system has  
been interrupted and will activate au-  
tomatically as soon as all functional  
requirements are met.  
Vehicle speed is less than approx.  
85 mph/135 km/h.  
▷
The systems in the vehicle, e.g., the At-  
tention Assistant and the Driver Attention  
Camera recognize that the driver is rested.  
White indicator light: the system can  
be activated.  
Switching Assisted Driving Mode  
Plus on/off  
Depending on the equipment and national-  
market version, information for the system is  
displayed in the Assisted View in the central  
display area of the instrument cluster.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
Additional information:  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Driving"  
Assisted View, refer to page 161.  
6. "Assisted Driving"  
7. "Assisted Driving Plus"  
Assisted Driving Mode Plus is automatically  
offered when Assisted Driving Mode is active  
242  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
For version up to 85 mph/135 km/h: Fati-  
gue Alert  
Displays on the steering wheel  
Sensors of the vehicle.  
Additional information:  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 235.  
Driver Attention Camera, refer to page 215.  
Fatigue alert, refer to page 214.  
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35.  
The two LEDs above the keypads illuminate  
depending on the situation.  
Speed Limit Assistant  
▷
▷
Green: the system is active.  
Principle  
Yellow: system will be interrupted.  
Grab the steering wheel with your hands.  
Red: system will be deactivated.  
Speed Limit Assistant supports driving at the  
speed limit. A suggested speed can be ap-  
plied.  
▷
Grab the steering wheel immediately with  
your hands.  
General information  
When the systems in the vehicle, e.g., Speed  
Limit Info, detect a change of the speed limit,  
this new speed value can be applied for the  
following systems:  
Additional information:  
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 235.  
Displays in the Head-up display  
Depending on the equipment, the system in-  
formation can also be displayed in the Head-  
up display.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Cruise control.  
Distance control.  
Assisted Driving Mode.  
Assisted Driving Mode Plus.  
Navigation system displays  
The speed value is suggested as the new de-  
sired speed to be applied. To apply the speed  
value, the corresponding system must be acti-  
vated.  
For the version up to 85 mph/135 km/h, roads  
on which Assisted Driving Mode Plus supports  
vehicle control can be displayed on the naviga-  
tion system.  
Depending on the equipment, destination sys-  
tem and national-market version, the value  
can be applied automatically.  
1.  
Navigation menu  
2. "Suggestions"  
3. Select the desired setting.  
Safety information  
System limits  
The system limits of the following systems ap-  
ply:  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
▷
▷
Assisted Driving Mode.  
Driver Attention Camera.  
243  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the  
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready  
to take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
▷
"Adjust automatically": depending on  
the equipment, detected speed limits  
are applied automatically.  
▷
▷
"Adjust manually": detected speed limits  
can be applied manually.  
"Show current limit": current speed lim-  
its are displayed without being applied  
in the instrument cluster.  
Warning  
▷
"Off": depending on the national-market  
version, Speed Limit Info and Speed  
Limit Assistant will be turned off.  
The set speed can be incorrectly adjusted or  
called up by mistake. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust the  
set speed to the traffic conditions. Watch sur-  
rounding traffic closely and actively intervene  
where appropriate  
If necessary, other anticipatory comfort  
functions will be turned off.  
Additional information:  
Speed Limit Info, refer to page 222.  
Overview  
Displays in the instrument cluster  
A message is displayed in the instrument clus-  
ter when the system and a speed control sys-  
tem are activated.  
Buttons on the steering wheel  
Button Function  
Icon  
Function  
Accept suggested speed manually.  
Detected change of a speed limit with  
immediate effect.  
Set speed, refer to Cruise Control.  
Depending on the national-market  
version, it is possible to switch be-  
tween the units of measurement.  
Indicator light illuminates green: the  
detected speed limit can be applied  
with the SET button.  
Turning Speed Limit Assistant  
on/off  
1.  
Apps menu  
After it has been applied, a green  
checkmark is displayed.  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Driving"  
Automatic adoption  
"Adjust automatically": Distance Control auto-  
matically adopts any detected speed limits  
when driving on roads with barriers separating  
traffic in opposing directions.  
6. "Speed Limit Assistant"  
7. "Speed limits"  
8. Select the desired setting:  
It may not be possible to use this function  
when driving with a trailer.  
244  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
After an automatic adoption, the button  
can be pressed to switch back to the  
last set value of the desired speed.  
tolerance for speed limits up to  
40 mph/60 km/h.  
System limits  
Speed Limit Assistant is based on the Speed  
Limit Info system.  
Manual adoption  
A detected speed limit can be applied man-  
ually to the active speed control system.  
Consider the system limits of Speed Limit Info.  
Cruise Control without Distance Control: for  
system related reasons, the speed limits can-  
not be applied automatically.  
When the SET icon is displayed, press  
the button.  
With trailer hitch: speed values to be adopted  
are limited to the value set on the control dis-  
play for trailer operation.  
Speed adjustment  
Principle  
Additional information:  
It can be adjusted whether the speed limit is  
applied exactly or with a tolerance.  
▷
▷
▷
System limits of Speed Limit Info, refer to  
page 223.  
System limits of the sensors, refer to  
page 35.  
General information  
A speed adaptation for all speed limits and an  
additional speed adaptation for speed limits up  
to 40 mph/60 km/h can be set up.  
Driving with trailer or rear carrier, refer to  
page 336.  
The additional speed adaptation for speed lim-  
its up to 40 mph/60 km/h can be activated or  
deactivated.  
Adapting the speed to the  
route  
Setting the speed adjustment  
Principle  
1.  
Apps menu  
The system can be configured so that with  
active distance control, the vehicle adapts the  
speed automatically to the route.  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Driving"  
For instance, the speed will be reduced in the  
following situations as necessary:  
6. "Speed Limit Assistant"  
7. Select the desired setting:  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Before making turns.  
Before a roundabout.  
Before a curve.  
▷
"Adjust speed limits": set the tolerance  
for speed adjustments, which applies to  
all speed limits.  
In front of an exit ramp on highways or  
highway-like roads.  
▷
▷
"2nd adjustm. up to": activate or deacti-  
vate additional speed adaptation.  
"Adjust speed limits": with activated  
additional speed adjustment, set the  
245  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Safety information  
Adapting speed automatically to  
route  
1.  
Apps menu  
Warning  
2. "Vehicle"  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the  
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready  
to take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Driving"  
6. "Route and intersection assistant"  
7. "Automatically adjust speed to route"  
Adjusting the cornering speed  
The cornering speed can be adjusted depend-  
ing on national-market version.  
The Cruise Control, Distance Control, Assisted  
Driving Mode, and Speed Limit Assist alerts  
also apply.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
Additional information:  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Driving"  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Cruise control, refer to page 226.  
Distance Control, refer to page 229.  
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 235.  
Speed Limit Assistant, refer to page 243.  
6. "Route and intersection assistant"  
7. "Cornering speed"  
8. Select the desired setting.  
Functional requirements  
▷
Cruise Control and distance control are acti-  
vated.  
Displays in the instrument cluster  
Depending on the equipment and national-  
market version, information for the system is  
displayed in the Assisted View in the central  
display area of the instrument cluster.  
▷
▷
Driving on a highway or highway-like road.  
With navigation system: guidance is acti-  
vated.  
The use of navigation software via Apple  
CarPlay or Android Auto may lead to func-  
tional limitations, for instance deviations  
with navigation instructions.  
Additional information:  
Assisted View, refer to page 161.  
System limits  
Depending on the national-market version or  
country in which the vehicle is currently being  
driven, the function may not be available.  
▷
▷
The function must be available in the coun-  
try in which the vehicle is driven.  
With trailer hitch: You must set on the con-  
trol display that you are using a trailer or  
rear carrier, respectively.  
The system does not react or reacts to a lim-  
ited extent to the route ahead in the following  
situations:  
Driving with trailer or rear carrier, refer to  
page 336.  
246  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
If the vehicle location cannot be clearly de-  
termined by the navigation system.  
The Cruise Control, Distance Control, and As-  
sisted Driving alerts also apply.  
On wintry roads.  
Additional information:  
Additionally, the limits for Cruise Control, Dis-  
tance Control, Assisted Driving, and Speed  
Limit Assist systems apply.  
▷
▷
▷
Cruise control, refer to page 226.  
Distance Control, refer to page 229.  
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 235.  
Additional information:  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Cruise control, refer to page 226.  
Functional requirements  
Distance Control, refer to page 229.  
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 235.  
Speed Limit Assistant, refer to page 243.  
▷
Cruise Control and Distance Control are ac-  
tivated.  
▷
▷
Driving on a highway or highway-like road.  
A situation-dependent minimum speed has  
been reached.  
Lane change with active  
guidance  
▷
▷
▷
The system detects a sufficiently large gap  
in traffic in the adjacent lane.  
A crossable lane boundary on the side of  
the desired lane change is detected.  
Principle  
Destination guidance is active on the navi-  
gation system.  
Lane change with active guidance assists the  
driver when lane changes are necessary to  
reach a destination. A notice is also displayed  
on the instrument cluster. A slight jolt can also  
be felt on the steering wheel, depending on  
national-market version and settings.  
The function is not available when using  
navigation software via Apple CarPlay or  
Android Auto.  
▷
▷
The function must be available in the coun-  
try in which the vehicle is driven.  
General information  
The system uses the Assisted Driving Mode  
sensors.  
The Driver Attention Camera in the instru-  
ment cluster detects that the driver is pay-  
ing attention to the surrounding traffic.  
▷
With trailer hitch: You must set on the con-  
trol display that you are using a trailer or  
rear carrier, respectively.  
Safety information  
Driving with trailer or rear carrier, refer to  
page 336.  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the  
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready  
to take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
Switching lane change on/off with  
active destination guidance  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Driving"  
247  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
6. "Route and intersection assistant"  
7. "Lane Guiding with Navigation"  
started by, e.g., operating the turn signal or  
looking toward the lane to check it.  
5. If necessary, the system automatically  
starts additional lane changes.  
Switching the steering wheel jerk  
on/off  
You can switch the steering wheel jerk assis-  
tance on/off.  
Display in the instrument cluster  
Icon  
Function  
1.  
Apps menu  
Indicates a necessary lane change.  
The icon varies depending on the  
traffic situation.  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Driving"  
A green checkmark on the icon indi-  
cates that the function is active.  
A red cross on the icon indicates that  
the system cannot assist with the  
lane change.  
6. "Route and intersection assistant"  
7. "Steering wheel impulse"  
Changing lanes  
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-  
market version, the traffic situation is displayed  
in Assisted View on the instrument cluster.  
If lane changes are necessary to reach a nav-  
igation destination, a corresponding notice is  
displayed on the instrument cluster. In addi-  
tion, a slight jerk can be felt on the steering  
wheel.  
Additional information:  
Assisted View, refer to page 161.  
To change lanes, follow the instructions on the  
instrument cluster.  
System limits  
The limits of the Cruise Control, Distance Con-  
trol, and Assisted Driving Mode systems and  
Driver Attention Camera apply.  
1.  
The system detects a suitable gap  
in the flow of traffic in the adjacent lane. A  
green checkmark is displayed on the lane  
change icon on the instrument cluster. The  
system prepares for the lane change.  
Additional information:  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Cruise control, refer to page 226.  
Distance Control, refer to page 229.  
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 235.  
Driver Attention Camera, refer to page 215.  
2. When a suitable gap is detected, the speed  
is adapted so that the vehicle remains level  
with the opening.  
3. A Check Control message indicates a lane  
change suggestion.  
4. When the traffic situation permits a lane  
change, the driver can steer the vehicle into  
the next lane.  
For vehicles equipped with Lane Change  
Assistant: Once the Check Control message  
appears, the Lane Change Assistant can be  
248  
Parking  
CONTROLS  
Parking  
▷
Automatic Parking Assistant, refer to  
page 266.  
Vehicle features and options  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Maneuver Assistant, refer to page 271.  
Remote Control Parking, refer to page 275.  
Back-up Assistant, refer to page 276.  
Trailer Assistant, refer to page 338.  
This chapter describes model-specific equip-  
ment, systems, and functions that are currently  
available, or may become available in the fu-  
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.  
Additional information:  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
Safety information  
Warning  
Parking assistance systems  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the  
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready  
to take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
General information  
The parking assistance systems include differ-  
ent individual systems. The individual systems  
help the driver when parking, maneuvering, or  
reversing by providing various assistance func-  
tions, sensors, and camera views.  
Additional information:  
▷
▷
Rearview camera, refer to page 254.  
Semi-automatic camera perspective, refer  
to page 255.  
Overview  
▷
Automatic camera perspective, refer to  
page 255.  
Button in the vehicle  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Side view, refer to page 256.  
3D view, refer to page 256.  
Trailer hitch view, refer to page 257.  
Car wash view, refer to page 257.  
Panorama View, refer to page 258.  
Automatic activation of panorama view, re-  
fer to page 258.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Door opening angle, refer to page 259.  
Remote 3D View, refer to page 260.  
Park Distance Control, refer to page 261.  
Park assistance button  
Active Park Distance Control, refer to  
page 264.  
▷
Drive-off monitoring, refer to page 265.  
249  
Parking  
CONTROLS  
systems help you park, maneuver, and reverse  
your vehicle.  
Sensors  
The parking assistance systems are controlled  
by the following sensors:  
General information  
Depending on the equipment, one or more  
cameras capture the area from different se-  
lectable perspectives.  
▷
Ultrasonic sensors in the front/rear bump-  
ers.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Ultrasonic sensors, side.  
Front camera.  
Depending on the view, the vehicle's surround-  
ings or a part of it is depicted.  
Top view cameras.  
Rearview camera.  
Depending on the national-market version, ei-  
ther the automatic or the semi-automatic cam-  
era perspective is displayed.  
Additional information:  
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35.  
Turning display on/off  
Operating concept  
The camera-based individual systems are op-  
erated with the function bars on the control  
display. The camera views can be viewed by  
selecting the appropriate icon.  
General information  
The parking assistance systems view switches  
off automatically when driving forwards or if a  
certain distance or speed is exceeded.  
In the Parking menu, some parking assistance  
systems can be configured individually.  
With reverse gear  
Some parking assistance systems can be  
started by voice control as needed, e.g., driving  
in/out of a parking space with the Automatic  
Parking Assistant.  
When drive-ready state is switched on, the dis-  
play is automatically switched on if selector  
lever position R is engaged.  
Additional information:  
With the Park Assist key  
BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant, refer to  
page 53.  
Press the button.  
Calling up Park menu  
Via iDrive  
1.  
Apps menu  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Parking"  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Parking"  
Display in the instrument cluster  
The instrument cluster shows displays of some  
parking assistance systems such as Park Dis-  
tance Control or Automatic Parking Assistant.  
6. Select the desired settings.  
Display  
Principle  
With the Park Distance Control display and  
various camera views, the parking assistance  
250  
Parking  
CONTROLS  
Parking view  
1
Status of parking assistance systems  
Assisted View  
2
3
1
Toolbar, left  
Selection menu  
2
3
4
5
6
7
Camera image  
Selection window  
Display on the control display  
Automatic camera perspective  
Semi-automatic camera perspective  
Side view  
General information  
Depending on vehicle equipment and on the  
activated parking assistance system, the con-  
trol display will vary.  
Toolbar, right  
Toolbar, left  
Assistance view  
Different views and settings can be selected  
via the left toolbar depending on the equip-  
ment:  
▷
"Parking view"  
Depending on vehicle equipment, camera  
views or the Park Distance Control view are  
displayed.  
▷
"Assist view"  
A stylized top view of the vehicle is dis-  
played.  
1
Toolbar, left  
▷
▷
"Panorama view"  
The cross traffic view is displayed.  
"More"  
2
3
4
Camera image  
Vehicle top view  
Toolbar, right  
▷
▷
▷
"3D view"  
A three-dimensional view of the vehicle  
is displayed.  
"Trailer coupling view"  
The view shows the zoom onto the  
trailer hitch.  
"Car wash view"  
251  
Parking  
CONTROLS  
Your own lane can be displayed to make  
it easier to drive into a car wash.  
Icon  
Meaning  
No search for parking assistance  
system offers.  
▷
"Settings"  
Settings can be entered in the Park  
menu.  
No other parking assistance sys-  
tems available.  
Parking assistance systems have  
failed.  
Toolbar, right  
The Parking Assistant functions are displayed  
in the right toolbar.  
Search for parking assistance sys-  
tem offers is active.  
▷
▷
Status of the parking assistance systems.  
Available parking methods of the Automatic  
Parking Assistant.  
White: an available maneuver is se-  
lected but is not being performed.  
Functional requirements have not  
been met or the functions transfer  
has been completed.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Functions of the Back-up Assistant.  
Functions of the Maneuver Assistant.  
Trailer Assistant functions.  
Green: parking assistance system is  
active. Functions are controlled de-  
pending on the system activated.  
Additional information in case of malfunc-  
tions.  
Maneuver Assistant records the  
maneuver to be stored.  
Status of parking assistance  
systems  
The status of parking assistance systems is  
indicated by icons on the toolbar on the right of  
the control display, in the status area on the in-  
strument cluster, and on the Head-up display,  
depending on vehicle equipment. In addition  
to this icon, text also appears on the control  
display.  
Additional displays  
General information  
Additional displays can be shown in the cam-  
era image of the display of the parking assis-  
tance systems, e.g., parking aid lines, to make  
parking and maneuvering easier.  
The following parking assistance systems are  
displayed:  
Several additional displays can be active at the  
same time.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Automatic Parking Assistant.  
Maneuver Assistant.  
Back-up Assistant.  
Turning additional displays on/off  
1.  
Apps menu  
Trailer Assistant.  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Parking"  
6. Select the desired setting.  
252  
Parking  
CONTROLS  
Using parking aid lines  
Parking aid lines  
1. Position the vehicle so that the red turning  
circle line leads to within the limits of the  
parking space.  
Pathway lines  
2. Turn the steering wheel to the point where  
the green pathway line covers the corre-  
sponding turning circle line.  
Obstacle marking  
Pathway lines help you to estimate the space  
required when parking and maneuvering on  
level roads.  
Lane lines are displayed in front of or behind  
the vehicle depending on the gear engaged.  
The pathway lines are continuously adjusted  
to the steering movements depending on the  
steering-wheel angle.  
Obstacles are detected by the sensors.  
The obstacles detected by the Park Distance  
Control are shown by marks in the camera im-  
age.  
Turning circle lines  
Colored gradients for the obstacle markings in  
green, yellow and red indicate the distances.  
Functional limitations  
The system can be used only to a limited ex-  
tent in the following situations:  
▷
▷
▷
With a door open.  
With open cargo area.  
With exterior mirrors folded in.  
Turning circle lines can only be superimposed  
on the camera image together with pathway  
lines.  
Areas with gray hatching with an icon in the  
camera image identify areas that are currently  
not shown such as an open door.  
The lines show the course of the smallest pos-  
sible turning circle on a level road.  
Only one turning circle line is displayed after  
the steering wheel is turned past a certain an-  
gle.  
253  
Parking  
CONTROLS  
System limits  
Rearview camera  
Safety information  
Principle  
The rearview camera helps when reverse  
parking and maneuvering. The area behind the  
vehicle is shown on the control display.  
Warning  
Because of system limitations, this system  
may either not respond, or respond too late,  
incorrectly, or without cause. There is a risk  
of accident, injury, and property damage. Ac-  
tively intervene as warranted. Refer to the in-  
formation in this Owner’s Manual regarding  
the scope of the system’s operation and limi-  
tations.  
Additional views can be shown on the display,  
e.g., parking aid lines and obstacle markings.  
General information  
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-  
tance systems" chapter.  
Functional requirements  
System limits of the sensors  
Additional information:  
▷
The cargo area is fully closed.  
▷
The camera area is clean and clear.  
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35.  
Turning the rearview camera on/off  
Field of view  
Turning the camera view on  
automatically  
Because of the camera angle, the areas under  
the vehicle cannot be viewed by the cameras.  
When drive-ready state is switched on, the  
rearview camera is automatically switched on  
if selector lever position R is engaged.  
Detection of objects  
Very low obstacles as well as high, protruding  
objects such as ledges may not be detected by  
the system.  
Turning the camera view off  
automatically  
The rearview camera turns off automatically  
when driving forward or when a certain dis-  
tance or speed is exceeded.  
Objects shown on the control display may be  
closer than they appear. Do not estimate the  
distance to the objects on the control display.  
The camera's detection range can be limited  
by protruding cargo, a rear carrier, or a trailer.  
Turning the camera view on/off  
manually  
Malfunction  
A camera failure is displayed on the control  
display.  
1.  
Press the button.  
The malfunctioning camera's detection range  
is shown by the shaded area on the control  
display.  
2. Engage selector lever position R.  
Depending on vehicle equipment: The  
icon in the selection window is selected au-  
tomatically.  
254  
Parking  
CONTROLS  
To exit rearview camera view, select an-  
other camera view in the selection window  
or press the button again.  
General information  
As soon as obstacles are detected, the view  
changes to a fixed display of the area in front  
of or behind the bumper, or switches to side  
Park Distance Control as necessary.  
Deactivated rearview camera  
When the rearview camera is deactivated, for  
instance when the cargo area is open, the  
camera image is displayed with gray shading.  
When reverse gear is engaged, the automatic  
camera perspective is, if necessary, exited and  
the system uses a semi-automatic camera  
perspective to the rear. If necessary, select the  
automatic camera perspective when reverse  
gear is engaged. The automatic camera per-  
spective will then be maintained for the current  
parking operation.  
Semi-automatic camera  
perspective  
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-  
tance systems" chapter.  
Principle  
Depending on the parking direction and en-  
gaged selector lever position, a fixed camera  
perspective is displayed with the areas in front  
of or behind the vehicle.  
Turning the automatic camera  
perspective on/off  
Turning the camera view on/off  
automatically  
When the parking assistance systems' display  
is turned on, automatic camera perspective is  
selected automatically.  
General information  
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-  
tance systems" chapter.  
Turning the semi-automatic camera  
perspective on/off  
The icon in the selection window is selected  
automatically.  
To exit the steering-dependent camera view,  
select another camera view in the selection  
window.  
1.  
Press the button.  
2.  
Select the icon in the selection window.  
To exit the fixed camera view, select an-  
other camera view in the selection window.  
Turning the camera view on/off  
manually  
Automatic camera  
perspective  
1.  
Press the button.  
2.  
The icon in the selection window is se-  
lected automatically.  
Principle  
To exit the steering-dependent camera  
view, select another camera view in the se-  
lection window or press the button again.  
The automatic camera perspective shows a  
steering-dependent view in the respective driv-  
ing direction.  
This perspective adapts to the respective driv-  
ing situation.  
255  
Parking  
CONTROLS  
Side protection  
Side view  
Principle  
Principle  
The side Park Distance Control is automati-  
cally displayed when the automatic camera  
perspective is turned on. The function shows  
obstacles located next to the vehicle.  
Side view shows the vehicle's side surround-  
ings, making it easier to position the vehicle at  
the curb or with other obstacles on the side.  
The side view looks from rear to front and, in  
case of danger, focuses automatically on pos-  
sible obstacles.  
General information  
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-  
tance systems" chapter.  
General information  
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-  
tance systems" chapter.  
Display  
Turning the side view on/off  
The selection window lets you choose the side  
view for the left or right side of the vehicle.  
1.  
Press the button.  
2.  
Select the icon for the desired vehicle  
side in the selection window.  
To protect the sides of the vehicle, obstacle  
markings are displayed on the sides of the ve-  
hicle.  
To exit the side view, select another cam-  
era view in the selection window.  
▷
▷
No markings: no obstacles detected.  
Color marks: warning against detected ob-  
stacles.  
3D view  
Principle  
System limits  
The system only displays stationary obstacles  
that were previously detected by sensors while  
passing them.  
With 3D view, a circle is displayed around the  
vehicle top view in the selection window.  
Specified perspectives can be selected on the  
circle.  
The system does not detect whether an obsta-  
cle moves later on. For this reason, at stand-  
still, the marks are not shown anymore in the  
display after a certain time. The area next to  
the vehicle must be newly captured.  
General information  
The current perspective is marked with a cam-  
era icon.  
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-  
tance systems" chapter.  
256  
Parking  
CONTROLS  
A docking line dependent on the steering-  
wheel angle helps with aiming for the trailer  
with the trailer hitch.  
Turning the 3D view on/off  
1.  
Press the button.  
2. "More"  
Car wash view  
3. "3D view"  
To exit the 3D view, select another camera  
view on the left toolbar.  
Principle  
The car wash view assists when entering a car  
wash.  
Trailer hitch view  
General information  
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-  
tance systems" chapter.  
Principle  
To make it easier to attach a trailer, you can  
zoom in on the view of the trailer hitch.  
Turning the car wash view on/off  
General information  
When zooming in, remember that the view  
may no longer show certain obstacles.  
1.  
Press the button.  
2. "More"  
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-  
tance systems" chapter.  
3. "Car wash view"  
To exit the car wash view, select a different  
camera view in the left toolbar.  
Turning the trailer hitch view on/off  
Display  
1.  
Press the button.  
2. "More"  
3. "Trailer coupling view"  
To exit the trailer hitch view, select another  
camera view in the left toolbar.  
Display  
Your own lane is displayed for easier driving  
into a car wash.  
This view can be used to position the vehicle  
correctly within the washing system guide rails.  
In a car wash, the vehicle must be able to roll  
freely forward.  
Additional information:  
Two static circular segments help to estimate  
the distance of the trailer to the trailer hitch.  
257  
Parking  
CONTROLS  
Rolling or pushing the vehicle, refer to  
page 134.  
Display  
Panorama View  
Principle  
The panoramic view gives you an earlier view  
of crossing traffic at blind driveway exits and  
intersections.  
Yellow lines on the screen display identify the  
bumpers of your own vehicle.  
General information  
Road users concealed by obstacles to the left  
and right of the vehicle can only be detected  
relatively late from the driver's seat. To pro-  
vide greater visibility, the front camera and, de-  
pending on vehicle equipment, rearview cam-  
era cover the side of the vehicle.  
When reverse gear is engaged, the reversing  
camera view is displayed. Depending on ve-  
hicle equipment, the front camera view is dis-  
played when forward gear is engaged.  
Depending on vehicle equipment, this func-  
tion can turn on automatically when activation  
points are saved.  
Automatic activation of  
panorama view  
The camera image shows different levels of  
distortion in some areas and is thus not suita-  
ble for distance estimations.  
Principle  
Positions at which panorama view should  
switch on automatically can be saved as acti-  
vation points.  
Depending on vehicle equipment, the function  
can be used when driving forward or in re-  
verse.  
General information  
Up to ten activation points can be stored.  
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-  
tance systems" chapter.  
The activation points can be used when driv-  
ing forward and, depending on national-mar-  
ket version, when reversing.  
Sensors  
The system is controlled by the following cam-  
eras:  
Follow instructions in the Parking assistance  
systems chapter.  
▷
▷
Rearview camera.  
Depending on the equipment: front camera.  
Functional requirements  
Turning the panoramic view on/off  
▷
A GPS signal must be received.  
▷
Depending on national-market version: A  
BMW ID or driver profile must be activated.  
1.  
Press the button.  
2. "Panorama view"  
To exit panorama view, select another  
camera view on the left toolbar.  
258  
Parking  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
The reversing camera and front camera  
must be installed.  
Editing activation points  
You can rename or delete specific activation  
points or all of them.  
The direction of travel, selector lever posi-  
tion, and vehicle angle must correspond to  
a stored activation point.  
1.  
Press the button.  
Storing activation points  
1. Drive your vehicle to the location where you  
want the system to turn on, then stop.  
2. "Panorama view"  
3. "Manage points"  
A list of all saved activation points is dis-  
played.  
2.  
Press the button.  
4. Select the desired setting.  
3. "Panorama view"  
4. "Activation point"  
Door opening angle  
The current position is displayed.  
5. "Save activation point"  
Principle  
Activation points are saved with the following  
information, for example:  
Depending on vehicle equipment, the door  
opening angle display is shown automatically  
when stationary.  
▷
▷
▷
With the city/town.  
With the city/town and the street.  
With the GPS coordinates.  
This display helps estimate how far the doors  
can be opened when parking.  
If obstacle marking is activated, the parking  
view indicates fixed obstacles that obstruct the  
opening angles of the doors.  
You can rename the location and street infor-  
mation created automatically.  
Using activation points  
The use of activation points can be switched  
on and off.  
General information  
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-  
tance systems" chapter.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
Display  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Parking"  
6. "GPS-based"  
The maximum opening angle of the doors is  
displayed in selector lever position P.  
259  
Parking  
CONTROLS  
Data protection, refer to page 67.  
System limits  
The system does not provide a warning of ap-  
proaching road users.  
▷
▷
The My BMW App must be installed on the  
mobile end device.  
ConnectedDrive countries: a BMW ID with  
an existing ConnectedDrive account must  
be activated.  
The vehicle's surroundings are distorted in the  
display for technical reasons.  
Even if the door opening angle indicator on the  
control display does not overlap with any other  
objects, it is necessary to park carefully next to  
other objects.  
BMW ID/driver profiles, refer to page 68.  
Activating/deactivating Remote 3D  
View  
The function can be activated or deactivated  
individually or together with other functions.  
Because of the perspective, higher, protruding  
objects may be closer than they appear on the  
control display.  
1.  
Apps menu  
Remote 3D View  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "System settings"  
4. "Data privacy"  
Principle  
The My BMW App and camera views in park-  
ing view such as automatic camera perspec-  
tive enable you to display the vehicle’s sur-  
roundings on a mobile device.  
5. Select the desired setting.  
After activation, Remote 3D View can be  
accessed using the My BMW App.  
The function displays a snapshot of the situa-  
tion.  
Functional limitations  
The system may not be fully operational or  
may not be available in the following situa-  
tions:  
General information  
For reasons of data protection, the function  
can only be used three times within two hours.  
▷
With a door or the cargo area open. Dark  
fields in the display indicate areas that are  
not recorded by the system.  
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-  
tance systems" chapter.  
▷
▷
With manually folded-in exterior mirrors.  
When other camera functions are being  
performed in the vehicle.  
Sensors  
The system is controlled by the following cam-  
eras:  
▷
▷
The vehicle moves faster than walking  
speed.  
▷
▷
▷
Front camera.  
In case of missing or weak Internet connec-  
tion.  
Top view cameras.  
Rearview camera.  
Functional requirements  
▷
Data transfer must be activated.  
260  
Parking  
CONTROLS  
Avoid approaching an object too fast. Avoid  
driving off quickly while Park Distance Control  
is not yet active.  
Park Distance Control  
Principle  
Park Distance Control assists with parking.  
Acoustic and visual warnings signal obstacles  
in front of or behind the vehicle.  
Sensors  
The system is controlled by the following sen-  
sors:  
Obstacles that are detected by the side ultra-  
sonic sensors can also be reported.  
▷
Ultrasonic sensors in the front/rear bump-  
ers.  
General information  
▷
Ultrasonic sensors, side.  
The range of the system, depending on obsta-  
cles and environmental conditions, is approx.  
6 ft/2 m.  
Turning Park Distance Control  
on/off  
An acoustic warning sounds in case of an im-  
pending collision at a distance to the object of  
approx. 27 in/70 cm.  
Turning on the system automatically  
The system switches on automatically in the  
following situations:  
For objects behind the vehicle, the acoustic  
warning is issued as early as a distance to the  
object of approx. 5 ft/1.50 m.  
▷
When drive-ready state is switched on  
when selector lever position R is engaged.  
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-  
tance systems" chapter.  
▷
While approaching detected obstacles  
if the speed is lower than approx.  
2.5 mph/4 km/h. The activation distance  
depends on the situation in question.  
Safety information  
The automatic activation of detected obstacles  
can be activated or deactivated.  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the  
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready  
to take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Parking"  
6. "Automatic PDC activation"  
Turning off the system automatically  
When driving forward, the system turns off au-  
tomatically as needed when a certain distance  
or speed is exceeded.  
Warning  
Due to high speeds when the Park Distance  
Control is activated, the warning can be de-  
layed due to physical circumstances. There is  
a risk of injury or risk of damage to property.  
Turning the system on/off manually  
Press the button.  
261  
Parking  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
On: the LED illuminates.  
Off: the LED goes out.  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Parking"  
6. "PDC signal volume"  
7. Set the desired value.  
If the system is manually switched on when  
the reverse gear is engaged, the rearview  
camera image is displayed.  
Depending on national-market  
version: Turn off acoustic warning  
Depending on national-market version, the  
acoustic warning can be turned off while per-  
forming a parking maneuver.  
Depending on the national-market version, the  
system cannot be turned off manually when  
the reverse gear is engaged.  
Acoustic warning  
Press  
the icon in the status field at the top  
General information  
of the control display.  
An intermittent tone indicates when the vehicle  
is approaching an object. E.g., when an object  
is detected at the rear left of the vehicle, a  
sound is heard from the rear left speaker.  
When the Park Distance Control is switched  
on again, the acoustic warning is automatically  
switched on again.  
Visual warning  
The shorter the distance to the object, the  
shorter the intervals of the intermittent tones.  
General information  
The approach to an object is displayed on the  
control display and in the instrument cluster as  
soon as the system is activated.  
When the distance to a detected object is less  
than approx. 8 in/20 cm, a continuous tone is  
sounded.  
When there are objects in front of and behind  
the vehicle at the same time, at a distance  
smaller than approx. 8 in/20 cm, an alternating  
continuous tone will sound between the front  
and rear speakers.  
Objects that are farther away are already dis-  
played before a signal sounds.  
Depending on the view, pathway lines, turning  
circle lines and obstacle markings are shown  
for a better estimation of the space required.  
The intermittent tones and the continuous tone  
are turned off when selector lever position P is  
engaged.  
Depending on vehicle equipment, the sensor  
detection range is shown by the shaded, ring-  
shaped area. Green, yellow, and red markings  
indicate when obstacles are detected within  
the detection range.  
Depending on national-market version, the in-  
termittent tones are switched off after a short  
time when the vehicle is stationary.  
If an object approaches when the vehicle is  
stationary, the acoustic signal is reactivated.  
If vehicle is equipped with Cross Traffic Warn-  
ing: A warning is also shown on the display for  
vehicles approaching from the side at the rear  
and front.  
Adjusting the volume  
To protect the sides of the vehicle, obstacle  
markings are displayed on the sides of the ve-  
hicle.  
The volume of the acoustic warning can be  
adjusted.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
262  
Parking  
CONTROLS  
The system does not detect whether an obsta-  
cle moves later on. When the vehicle is station-  
ary, the gray shaded areas on the sides are  
hidden after a certain time. The area on the  
side of the vehicle must be newly captured.  
Display  
Depending on vehicle equipment, warnings  
may be displayed in front of, next to, and be-  
hind the vehicle.  
Also follow the information on system limits in  
the "Parking assistance systems" chapter.  
Trailer towing  
The rear functions of Park Distance Control are  
switched off with a trailer attached or when the  
trailer socket is occupied.  
Depending on vehicle equipment, the sensor  
detection range is shown by the shaded area  
on the control display.  
Example display of warnings behind the vehi-  
cle.  
Obstacles next to the vehicle are not displayed.  
Depending on the national-market version, the  
rear functions of Park Distance Control remain  
switched on when trailer towing is enabled.  
An icon is displayed on the control dis-  
play.  
Additional information:  
Towing a trailer, refer to page 336.  
Example display of warnings next to the vehi-  
cle.  
Unwarranted warnings  
Reaching the system limits can cause unwar-  
ranted warnings.  
▷
▷
Shaded area: Sensor detection range.  
Gray shaded area: No obstacles have been  
detected within the detection range.  
To prevent unwarranted warnings, for instance  
in car washes, turn off automatic Park Dis-  
tance Control activation on obstacle detection.  
▷
▷
Colored marks in shaded area: Obstacles  
have been detected within the detection  
range.  
Malfunction  
Shaded area interrupted: the area next to  
the vehicle has not yet been detected.  
An icon is displayed on the control dis-  
play.  
Depending on vehicle equipment: The  
sensor detection range may not be shown on  
the control display.  
System limits  
General information  
A Check Control message is displayed.  
The function for protecting the vehicle sides  
only shows stationary obstacles that were pre-  
viously detected by the sensors when passing  
by.  
Park Distance Control malfunction. Have the  
vehicle checked by an authorized service cen-  
263  
Parking  
CONTROLS  
ter or another qualified service center or repair  
shop.  
to take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
Active Park Distance Control  
Warning  
When using the trailer hitch, the assistance  
system cannot react correctly because the  
sensors are concealed. There may be a risk  
of accidents or risk of damage to property. Do  
not use the driver assistance system while  
towing a trailer or when using the trailer hitch,  
e.g., for a rear bicycle rack.  
Principle  
The Park Distance Control brake function ini-  
tiates emergency braking if there is an acute  
risk of collision.  
General information  
Due to system limits, a collision cannot be pre-  
vented under all circumstances.  
Sensors  
The function is available below walking speed  
when driving in reverse or rolling backward.  
The system is controlled by the following sen-  
sors:  
Pressing the accelerator pedal interrupts the  
brake intervention. Emergency braking is not  
performed.  
▷
▷
Ultrasonic sensors in the rear bumpers.  
Ultrasonic sensors, side.  
After emergency braking to a stop, further  
creeping toward an obstacle is possible. Pro-  
ceed with caution. To move forward, lightly  
press the accelerator pedal and release as  
needed.  
Deactivating Active Park Distance  
Control temporarily  
After emergency braking, the function can be  
temporarily deactivated on the control display.  
A corresponding message is displayed.  
If the accelerator pedal is depressed longer,  
the vehicle drives off. Manual braking is possi-  
ble at any time.  
1. "Configure"  
2. "Deactivate temporarily"  
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-  
tance systems" chapter.  
During continued driving in this surrounding  
situation, no further emergency braking will  
occur.  
Safety information  
The function is automatically reactivated when  
Park Distance Control is switched on again.  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the  
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready  
Settings  
It is possible to set which areas on the vehicle  
will be protected by the system.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Parking"  
264  
Parking  
CONTROLS  
6. "Active PDC emergency braking"  
7. Select the desired setting.  
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-  
tance systems" chapter.  
Safety information  
Display  
As soon as the system engages, an  
icon is displayed with a corresponding  
message.  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the  
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready  
to take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
System limits  
General information  
Follow the system limits in the "Parking assis-  
tance systems" chapter.  
Functional limitations  
The system cannot be used in the following  
situations, for example:  
Warning  
▷
While Hill Descent Control is regulating the  
vehicle speed, emergency braking is deacti-  
vated.  
When using the trailer hitch, the assistance  
system cannot react correctly because the  
sensors are concealed. There may be a risk  
of accidents or risk of damage to property. Do  
not use the driver assistance system while  
towing a trailer or when using the trailer hitch,  
e.g., for a rear bicycle rack.  
Hill Descent Control, refer to page 219.  
When driving with a trailer.  
▷
If applicable, turn off the system temporarily, if  
needed.  
Drive-off monitoring  
Sensors  
The system is controlled by the following sen-  
sors:  
Principle  
In case of a risk of collision, the start-up mon-  
itoring reduces the drive power when driving  
off.  
▷
Ultrasonic sensors in the front/rear bump-  
ers.  
▷
Ultrasonic sensors, side.  
General information  
Functional requirements  
When obstacles are detected in close range in  
front of the vehicle, the acceleration will be re-  
duced. If necessary, this permits timely manual  
braking.  
▷
Selector lever position D or R is engaged  
when the vehicle is stationary.  
▷
Obstacles in the immediate vicinity are de-  
tected in front of or behind the vehicle.  
When obstacles are detected behind the vehi-  
cle, the system will brake.  
265  
Parking  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
The accelerator pedal is heavily applied,  
nearly to the end point.  
System limits  
The accelerator pedal is immediately ap-  
plied after engaging the selector lever posi-  
tion and obstacle detection.  
General information  
Follow the system limits in the "Parking assis-  
tance systems" chapter.  
Turning drive-off monitoring on/off  
Trailer towing  
The system is deactivated if the trailer power  
socket is occupied or trailer towing is activated,  
e.g., when using a trailer or rear bicycle rack.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Parking"  
Automatic Parking Assistant  
6. "Drive off monitoring"  
7. "Drive off monitoring"  
Principle  
Automatic Parking Assistant provides support  
when parallel parking and parking transverse  
to the road.  
A Check Control message is displayed where  
applicable.  
Depending on the national-market version, the  
system is automatically turned on again at the  
next drive.  
In addition, the system makes it easier to  
park out of parallel and perpendicular parking  
spaces.  
Canceling reduced drive power  
The reduction of the drive power is canceled in  
the following situations:  
The ultrasonic sensors measure both sides of  
the vehicle when driving slowly forward. Suita-  
ble parking spaces are calculated based on the  
objects detected, e.g., parking vehicles. The  
system status is displayed.  
▷
▷
The accelerator pedal is released.  
After the accelerator pedal has been de-  
pressed completely twice.  
The system calculates the best possible park-  
ing line for driving in or out of parking spaces,  
and takes control of the vehicle while parking.  
▷
A specific distance has been traveled.  
If the reduction in drive power is canceled by  
covering a certain distance, the drive power is  
released gradually.  
The operating principle and operation of the  
system is divided into the following steps:  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Parking space search.  
Turning on.  
Display  
Parking.  
As soon as the system engages, an  
icon is displayed with a corresponding  
message.  
Driving out of parking spaces.  
The parking manoeuver while parking is per-  
formed automatically.  
When driving out of parallel parking spaces,  
the vehicle maneuvers automatically until it  
reaches a position where it can be driven out  
of the parking space without further steering  
movements.  
266  
Parking  
CONTROLS  
When driving out of perpendicular parking  
spaces, the vehicle is maneuvered out of the  
parking space to enable continued driving in  
the desired direction.  
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready  
to take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
The Automatic Parking Assistant Professional  
increases the comfort and range of uses of  
the Automatic Parking Assistant. In addition to  
the parking methods of the Automatic Parking  
Assistant, parking in parking spaces that are  
marked with lines is possible.  
Warning  
When using the trailer hitch, the assistance  
system cannot react correctly because the  
sensors are concealed. There may be a risk  
of accidents or risk of damage to property. Do  
not use the driver assistance system while  
towing a trailer or when using the trailer hitch,  
e.g., for a rear bicycle rack.  
With Park Assist Professional, the parking ma-  
neuver can also be performed using Remote  
Control Parking on a smartphone.  
Vehicle features and options  
This system may not be available in the  
owned vehicle, e.g. due to the selected op-  
tional equipment, the national-market version  
or the option for later enabling and software  
updates. This also applies to individual func-  
tions of the system.  
Warning  
The system can steer the vehicle over or  
onto curbs. There is a risk of injury or risk  
of damage to property. Watch surrounding  
traffic closely and actively intervene where  
appropriate  
For information on whether a function is cur-  
rently available in the vehicle or when the func-  
tion can be installed in the vehicle, contact an  
authorized service center or another qualified  
service center or repair shop.  
Parking methods  
Park Assist supports the following functions:  
Additional information:  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
General information  
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-  
tance systems" chapter.  
Safety information  
Parallel parking: reverse parking parallel to the  
road.  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the  
267  
Parking  
CONTROLS  
Sensors  
The Automatic Parking Assistant is controlled  
by the following sensors:  
▷
Ultrasonic sensors in the front/rear bump-  
ers.  
▷
Ultrasonic sensors, side.  
The Automatic Parking Assistant Professional  
is additionally controlled by the following cam-  
eras:  
Perpendicular parking: reverse or forward  
parking perpendicular to the road.  
▷
▷
▷
Front camera.  
Top view cameras.  
Rearview camera.  
Functional requirements  
Measurement of parking spaces  
▷
Maximum speed while driving forward ap-  
prox. 22 mph/35 km/h.  
▷
Maximum distance to row of parked vehi-  
cles: 5 ft/1.5 m.  
Driving out of parallel parking spaces.  
Suitable parking space  
Longitudinal parking:  
▷
▷
Minimum length of a detected object, e.g., a  
parking vehicle: approx. 3 ft/1 m.  
Minimum length of gap between two ob-  
jects: own vehicle length plus approx.  
2.6 ft/0.8 m.  
▷
Minimum depth: approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.  
Driving out of perpendicular parking spaces.  
Perpendicular parking:  
▷
▷
▷
Minimum length of a detected object, e.g., a  
parking vehicle: approx. 3 ft/1 m.  
Minimum width of the gap: own vehicle  
width plus approx. 2.3 ft/0.7 m.  
Minimum depth: own vehicle length.  
The depth of perpendicular parking spaces  
must be estimated by the driver. Due to  
technical limitations, the system is only able  
to approximate the depth of perpendicular  
parking spaces.  
Park Assist Professional: Parking in parking  
spaces with parking lines.  
Parking lines for Park Assist Professional:  
268  
Parking  
CONTROLS  
The parking space must be clearly marked  
with lines.  
Turning parking operation display  
on/off  
When the Automatic Parking Assistant is ac-  
tive, the parking operation is displayed in the  
camera image on the control display.  
Parking operation  
▷
Doors and cargo area are closed.  
▷
Driver's seat belt is fastened.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
Leaving parking spaces  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Parking"  
▷
The vehicle was parked using the Auto-  
matic Parking Assistant, and an object has  
been detected in the area around the vehi-  
cle.  
6. "Show assistance info"  
▷
The vehicle was manually parked in re-  
verse, and objects have been detected in  
the immediate vicinity of the vehicle. The  
distance to a detected curb is at least 6 in-  
ches/15 cm.  
Turning the signal tone on/off  
The signal tone for suitable parking spaces  
can be turned on and off.  
1.  
Apps menu  
▷
The parking space is at least 2.6 ft/0.8 m  
longer than the vehicle.  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Parking"  
Displays  
General information  
6. "Sound when available"  
The current status of parking assistance sys-  
tems is shown on the right-hand toolbar, on  
the instrument cluster, and on the Head-up  
display, depending on vehicle equipment.  
Parking using the Automatic  
Parking Assistant  
Different icons are shown on the control dis-  
play for selecting the parking method.  
1. For the parking space search when driving  
past parked vehicles at a speed of up to  
approx. 22 mph/35 km/h and a distance of  
max. 5 ft/1.5 m.  
The sequence of the displayed icons corre-  
sponds to the prioritized parking option.  
The parking space search is activated.  
The direction of the arrow changes for the  
icons for parking methods for driving out of a  
parking space.  
2. Press the  
gear.  
button or engage reverse  
Icon  
Meaning  
The parking assistance systems view is  
displayed.  
Reverse lengthwise parking, right.  
Reverse lengthwise parking, left.  
Reverse perpendicular parking.  
Forward perpendicular parking.  
The status of the parking space search and  
possible parking spaces are displayed on  
the control display and in the instrument  
cluster.  
269  
Parking  
CONTROLS  
3. On the control display: Select one of the  
parking maneuvers offered. You can switch  
to another parking maneuver as necessary.  
The speed can be reduced with the brake.  
Other interventions will cancel the system.  
A message will be displayed at the end of  
the maneuver.  
In the instrument cluster: select suggested  
parking method with the knurled wheel on  
the steering wheel.  
5. Make sure that the traffic situation permits  
driving out of parking space and driving off  
as usual.  
Green: the system takes control of the  
parking operation.  
The Automatic Parking Assistant is turned  
off automatically.  
4. Follow the instructions on the control dis-  
play or in the instrument cluster.  
Canceling Automatic Parking  
Assistant manually  
The Automatic Parking Assistant can be can-  
celed manually at any time, e.g.:  
The speed can be reduced with the brake.  
Other interventions will cancel the system.  
Depending on national-market version, an  
intermittent or continuous tone sounds for  
Park Distance Control.  
▷
Step lightly on the accelerator pedal twice  
in succession.  
At the end of the parking operation, selec-  
tor lever position P is set.  
▷
Step lightly on the accelerator pedal and  
move the steering wheel slightly at the  
same time.  
The end of the parking operation is indi-  
cated on the control display and in the in-  
strument cluster.  
▷
Depress the brake pedal and operate the  
selector lever at the same time.  
5. Adjust the parking position yourself, if  
needed.  
The Automatic Parking Assistant is canceled  
without engaging selector lever position P.  
Driving can continue immediately.  
Driving out of a parking space using  
the Automatic Parking Assistant  
1. Turn on drive-ready state.  
Canceling Automatic Parking  
Assistant automatically  
The system automatically cancels in situations  
such as the following:  
2.  
With the vehicle at a standstill, press  
button or engage reverse gear.  
▷
When the driver grasps the steering wheel  
or takes over steering.  
The parking assistance systems view is  
displayed.  
▷
When operating the accelerator pedal or  
the selector lever.  
3. On the control display: select the desired  
parking method.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
When setting the parking brake.  
When unfastening the driver's seat belt.  
With open cargo area.  
In the instrument cluster: select suggested  
parking method with the knurled wheel on  
the steering wheel.  
4. Follow the instructions on the control dis-  
play or in the instrument cluster.  
With open hood.  
With the doors open.  
Green: the system takes control of ma-  
neuvering.  
During activation or intervention by driver  
assistance systems.  
270  
Parking  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
When changing over to another function on  
the control display.  
▷
▷
Automatic Parking Assistant: for parking  
spaces that are only marked with lines on  
the ground. The system orients itself ac-  
cording to objects.  
When the view on the control display is  
overlaid with messages.  
For special parking spaces, e.g., metered  
parking spaces with automatic locking  
mechanisms, or mechanical parking sys-  
tems.  
▷
▷
▷
On snow-covered or slippery road.  
On steep uphill or downhill grades.  
When there are obstacles that are hard to  
overcome such as curbs.  
▷
▷
▷
When there are obstacles that suddenly ap-  
pear.  
Functional limitations  
The system may be limited in the following  
situations:  
With insufficient distances, which are indi-  
cated by Park Distance Control.  
▷
On bumpy road surfaces such as gravel  
roads.  
When a maximum number of parking at-  
tempts or the time taken for parking is ex-  
ceeded.  
▷
▷
▷
On slippery ground.  
On steep uphill or downhill grades.  
When the system is automatically aborted, se-  
lector lever position P is engaged.  
With accumulations of leaves/snow in the  
parking space.  
A Check Control message is displayed where  
applicable.  
▷
▷
▷
In case of changes to an already-measured  
parking space.  
With ditches or edges, for instance an edge  
of a port.  
Continuing the parking operation  
If parking or leaving a parking space has been  
interrupted, the operation can be continued, if  
needed.  
Parking spaces that are not suitable may  
be detected or suitable parking spaces may  
not be detected at all.  
Turn the Automatic Parking Assistant on again  
and follow the instructions on the control dis-  
play or in the instrument cluster.  
Malfunction  
A Check Control message is displayed.  
The Automatic Parking Assistant has malfunc-  
tioned. Have the vehicle checked by an author-  
ized service center or another qualified service  
center or repair shop.  
System limits  
General information  
Follow the system limits in the "Parking assis-  
tance systems" chapter.  
Maneuver Assistant  
No parking assistance  
The Automatic Parking Assistant does not of-  
fer assistance in the following situations:  
Principle  
The Maneuver Assistant provides support for  
recurring parking and maneuvering situations.  
▷
▷
▷
In tight curves.  
For diagonal parking spaces.  
When towing a trailer.  
Parking and maneuvering operations can be  
recorded and then carried out automatically by  
the system.  
271  
Parking  
CONTROLS  
to take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
Vehicle features and options  
This system may not be available in the  
owned vehicle, e.g. due to the selected op-  
tional equipment, the national-market version  
or the option for later enabling and software  
updates. This also applies to individual func-  
tions of the system.  
Warning  
When using the trailer hitch, the assistance  
system cannot react correctly because the  
sensors are concealed. There may be a risk  
of accidents or risk of damage to property. Do  
not use the driver assistance system while  
towing a trailer or when using the trailer hitch,  
e.g., for a rear bicycle rack.  
For information on whether a function is cur-  
rently available in the vehicle or when the func-  
tion can be installed in the vehicle, contact an  
authorized service center or another qualified  
service center or repair shop.  
Additional information:  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
Warning  
The system can steer the vehicle over or  
onto curbs. There is a risk of injury or risk  
of damage to property. Watch surrounding  
traffic closely and actively intervene where  
appropriate  
General information  
A recurring maneuver is driven manually and  
thereby recorded.  
When the vehicle reaches the activation area  
for the distance covered by the stored maneu-  
ver, the maneuver can be activated on the con-  
trol display or in the instrument cluster.  
Detection range  
After the activation, the system takes control  
of the vehicle and carries out the maneuver  
automatically.  
In addition, the parking maneuver can be per-  
formed using Remote Control Parking on a  
smartphone.  
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-  
tance systems" chapter.  
Safety information  
The detection range for a maneuver is divided  
into the following areas:  
▷
Proximity range, arrow 1: the system will  
begin with the localization in the back-  
ground within a range of approx. 26 ft/8 m  
around the distance covered of a stored  
maneuver.  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the  
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready  
▷
Close range, arrow 2: in a range of ap-  
prox. 6 ft/2 m around the distance covered,  
272  
Parking  
CONTROLS  
a stored maneuver can be displayed on the  
control display.  
Recording maneuver  
1. Drive the vehicle to the starting point from  
which a maneuver must be recorded and  
stop.  
▷
Activation range, arrow 3: the stored  
maneuver on the control display can be ac-  
tivated within a range of approx. 3.5 ft/1 m.  
After the activation, the system takes con-  
trol of the vehicle and carries out the ma-  
neuver automatically.  
2.  
Press the button.  
The parking assistance systems view is  
displayed.  
3.  
"Record new path"  
Sensors  
4. Drive the vehicle to the desired end posi-  
tion.  
The system is controlled by the following sen-  
sors and cameras:  
The maneuver is recorded.  
▷
Ultrasonic sensors in the front/rear bump-  
ers.  
When recording a route, do not drive faster  
than 9 mph/15 km/h.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Ultrasonic sensors, side.  
Front camera.  
While recording, the distance covered will  
be displayed.  
Top view cameras.  
Rearview camera.  
When the maximum distance covered or  
the maximum speed is reached, a message  
will be displayed and a signal tone will  
sound.  
Recording maneuver  
5. With a stationary vehicle: "Save recording"  
6. "Name:"  
General information  
Up to ten maneuvers can be recorded at differ-  
ent locations.  
If necessary, enter the desired name for the  
recorded maneuver.  
Up to four overlapping maneuvers can be re-  
corded.  
7. "Save recording"  
Do not move the vehicle until the recording  
has been stored.  
Identical maneuvers under different ambient  
conditions can be recorded such as light condi-  
tions.  
Performing stored maneuver  
For each maneuver, a maximum distance cov-  
ered of 656 ft/200 m is possible.  
1. Drive the vehicle into the activation range  
and stop. The control display and instru-  
ment cluster indicate that a stored maneu-  
ver can be activated.  
In total, a distance covered of approx.  
1,969 ft/600 m distributed to the ten possible  
maneuvers can be recorded.  
2.  
: activate stored maneuver.  
Maneuvers with a distance covered of less  
than 20 ft/6 m cannot be recorded.  
Green: after activation, the system takes  
control of the vehicle and performs the ma-  
neuver automatically. If applicable, follow  
the instructions on the control display or in  
the instrument cluster.  
The speed can be reduced with the brake.  
Other interventions will cancel the system.  
273  
Parking  
CONTROLS  
At the end of the parking operation, selec-  
tor lever position P is set.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
On snow-covered or slippery road.  
When the lane is too narrow.  
On steep uphill or downhill grades.  
With trailer towing.  
Canceling the Maneuver Assistant  
manually  
The vehicle can be controlled manually during  
an active maneuver by taking the following ac-  
tions:  
In the event of an automatic cancellation of  
the system, the vehicle is decelerated to a  
complete stop and selector lever position P is  
engaged.  
▷
Step lightly on the accelerator pedal twice  
in succession.  
An interrupted maneuver can be continued, if  
needed. Turn the Maneuver Assistant on again  
and follow the instructions on the control dis-  
play or in the instrument cluster.  
▷
Step lightly on the accelerator pedal and  
move the steering wheel slightly at the  
same time.  
▷
Depress the brake pedal and operate the  
selector lever at the same time.  
Editing stored maneuvers  
Individual or all maneuvers can be deleted or  
renamed.  
The Maneuver Assistant is canceled without  
engaging selector lever position P. Driving can  
continue immediately.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
Canceling the Maneuver Assistant  
automatically  
The system automatically cancels in situations  
such as the following:  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Parking"  
6. "Recorded paths"  
7. Select the desired setting.  
▷
When the driver grasps the steering wheel  
or takes over steering.  
▷
When operating the accelerator pedal or  
the selector lever.  
System limits  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
When the driver's seat belt is not fastened.  
With open cargo area.  
General information  
Follow the system limits in the "Parking assis-  
tance systems" chapter.  
With open hood.  
With the doors open.  
Functional limitations  
The system does not provide support when  
towing a trailer.  
During activation or intervention by driver  
assistance systems.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
When the system limits of the ultrasonic  
sensors and cameras are reached.  
System limits can cause functional limitations  
such as in the following situations:  
When changing over to another function on  
the control display.  
▷
▷
▷
With poor GPS reception.  
On steep uphill or downhill grades.  
When the view on the control display is  
overlaid with messages.  
In case of recorded maneuvers where the  
system minimum distance to objects can-  
not be maintained.  
In case of obstacles.  
274  
Parking  
CONTROLS  
▷
Greatly deviating conditions when storing  
and driving the distance covered, for in-  
stance other tires or changed ambient con-  
ditions like light conditions or weather.  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
General information  
Note the information in the Automatic Parking  
Assistant and Maneuver Assistant chapter.  
▷
▷
Delayed display of overlapping stored ma-  
neuvers when driving into the activation  
area.  
Protect the smartphone against unauthorized  
use.  
In multi-story parking garages, for record-  
ings at different parking levels, or for re-  
cordings that run over several parking lev-  
els.  
The low-beam headlights are switched on for  
the duration of the maneuver.  
A parking maneuver offered by Park Assist  
Professional is only available for Remote Con-  
trol Parking for a short time after exiting the  
vehicle.  
Remote Control Parking  
Functional requirements  
Principle  
▷
▷
▷
All occupants have left the vehicle.  
With Remote Control Parking, the vehicle can  
be driven remotely when parking and maneu-  
vering using the Maneuver Assistant and Park  
Assist Professional.  
Doors and cargo area are closed.  
The smartphone is compatible with Re-  
mote Control Parking.  
The maneuver is performed independently,  
outside the vehicle, using a smartphone. This  
makes it easy to get in and out of the vehicle.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
The My BMW App must be installed on a  
compatible smartphone.  
The My BMW App must be linked to a Con-  
nectedDrive account.  
When parking in a suitable spot, e.g., a garage,  
you can correct the parking position with Re-  
mote Control Parking by maneuvering slightly.  
Bluetooth must be enabled on the smart-  
phone.  
A maneuver that has already been started can  
be continued at any time with Remote Control  
Parking.  
The distance between vehicle and smart-  
phone is no greater than approx. 19 ft/6 m.  
A valid digital key must be set up for the  
vehicle, then recognized without issue.  
Vehicle features and options  
Additional information:  
This system may not be available in the  
owned vehicle, e.g. due to the selected op-  
tional equipment, the national-market version  
or the option for later enabling and software  
updates. This also applies to individual func-  
tions of the system.  
BMW Digital Key, refer to page 86.  
Parking with Remote Control  
Parking  
1. Engage selector lever position P.  
For information on whether a function is cur-  
rently available in the vehicle or when the func-  
tion can be installed in the vehicle, contact an  
authorized service center or another qualified  
service center or repair shop.  
2. Leave the vehicle and close the doors and  
cargo area.  
3. Open Remote Control Parking in the My  
BMW app and maneuver forward or back-  
ward, or select the desired parking method.  
Additional information:  
4. Follow the instructions on the smartphone.  
275  
Parking  
CONTROLS  
Stop the vehicle manually if obstacles are  
present.  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
General information  
Depending on the option selected in the My  
BMW app, the vehicle is either parked at  
the end of the parking maneuver or you can  
take control of the vehicle again.  
The vehicle stores the driving movements of  
the last distance covered. This stored distance  
can be driven in reverse with automated steer-  
ing.  
System limits  
The system takes over the steering. The driver  
must control the speed using the accelerator  
and brake pedals.  
Due to ambient conditions, e.g., impaired Blue-  
tooth connection transmission due to external  
faults, Remote Control Parking may be inter-  
rupted.  
Back-up Assistant: a maximum of 164 ft/50 m  
are stored.  
If the power supply of the vehicle battery is  
not sufficiently ensured, e.g., due to excessive  
discharge, Remote Control Parking may not  
be available. Follow the instructions in the My  
BMW App.  
Reversing Assistant Professional: a maximum  
of 656 ft/200 m are stored.  
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-  
tance systems" chapter.  
It may not be easy to maneuver into a parking  
space. This function is offered on the My BMW  
app but cannot be used due to ambient condi-  
tions.  
Safety information  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the  
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready  
to take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
Back-up assistant  
Principle  
The Back-up Assistant helps when reversing,  
e.g., when pulling out of tight or unclear park-  
ing or road situations.  
Vehicle features and options  
This system may not be available in the  
owned vehicle, e.g. due to the selected op-  
tional equipment, the national-market version  
or the option for later enabling and software  
updates. This also applies to individual func-  
tions of the system.  
Warning  
When using the trailer hitch, the assistance  
system cannot react correctly because the  
sensors are concealed. There may be a risk  
of accidents or risk of damage to property. Do  
not use the driver assistance system while  
towing a trailer or when using the trailer hitch,  
e.g., for a rear bicycle rack.  
For information on whether a function is cur-  
rently available in the vehicle or when the func-  
tion can be installed in the vehicle, contact an  
authorized service center or another qualified  
service center or repair shop.  
Additional information:  
276  
Parking  
CONTROLS  
In case of obstacles, stop immediately and  
take over control of the vehicle. Follow the  
instructions for Park Distance Control.  
Warning  
The system can steer the vehicle over or  
onto curbs. There is a risk of injury or risk  
of damage to property. Watch surrounding  
traffic closely and actively intervene where  
appropriate  
5. Right before the end of the stored distance  
covered, a signal tone will sound and a  
message is displayed.  
Stop no later than when normal road traffic  
is reached and take control of the vehicle  
such as by shifting to forward gear.  
Functional requirements  
▷
Drive forward without interruption to store  
the distance covered.  
Canceling the Back-up Assistant  
manually  
The assisted reversing by the Back-up Assis-  
tant can be canceled manually:  
▷
To store the distance covered, do not drive  
faster than 22 mph/35 km/h.  
▷
▷
No trailer towing.  
▷
▷
"Cancel"  
Press the button.  
Back-up Assistant Professional: sufficiently  
bright light conditions on the saved route.  
▷
Back-up Assistant Professional: the cam-  
eras on the vehicle must be clean and clear.  
Canceling the Back-up Assistant  
automatically  
The system automatically cancels in situations  
such as the following:  
Driving in reverse with automated  
steering  
1. Turn on drive-ready state.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
When the driver grasps the steering wheel  
or takes over steering.  
2.  
3.  
With the vehicle at a standstill, press  
button or engage reverse gear.  
When shifting from reverse gear to another  
selector lever position.  
The parking assistance systems view is  
displayed.  
During activation or intervention by driver  
assistance systems.  
"Start back-up Assistant"  
After an extended period of time when the  
vehicle is stationary.  
The length of the distance covered is dis-  
played on the control display and in the in-  
strument cluster.  
When exiting the stored lane when revers-  
ing, for instance with maximum steering-  
wheel angle.  
If applicable, follow the instructions on the  
control display or in the instrument cluster.  
▷
When the view on the control display is  
overlaid with messages.  
4. Take your hands off the steering wheel and  
carefully drive in reverse with the accelera-  
tor pedal and the brake.  
▷
▷
In case of a slippery surface.  
When the vehicle is rolling such as on a  
slope.  
Green: the system takes control of  
steering.  
▷
In case of changed ambient conditions.  
When driving in reverse, observe the vehi-  
cle's surroundings.  
277  
Parking  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
▷
When the trailer power socket is occupied  
or when trailer towing is activated.  
If the vehicle speed exceeds approx.  
6 mph/10 km/h.  
Reversing Assistant Professional: if sensor  
functionality is limited beyond approx. 164  
ft/50 m.  
System limits  
▷
The maximum speed when reversing is  
limited to approx. 6 mph/10 km/h.  
A warning is issued at a speed of approx.  
4 mph/7 km/h.  
If the maximum speed is exceeded, the  
function is interrupted.  
Different influences can lead to side deviations  
when driving the stored distance covered in re-  
verse. For example, this includes the following  
factors:  
▷
Steering movements when the vehicle is  
stationary while storing the distance cov-  
ered.  
▷
▷
▷
The speed is not adapted to the distance  
covered.  
Certain road characteristics such as gradi-  
ents, inclines or slippery road surface.  
Greatly deviating conditions when storing  
and driving the route, for instance other  
tires or changed ambient conditions like  
weather.  
▷
Reversing Assistant Professional: for  
changed light conditions.  
Also follow the information on system limits in  
the "Parking assistance systems" chapter.  
278  
Driving comfort  
CONTROLS  
Driving comfort  
Vehicle features and options Active roll stabilization  
This chapter describes model-specific equip-  
ment, systems, and functions that are currently  
available, or may become available in the fu-  
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.  
Active roll stabilization provides increased driv-  
ing comfort while improving vehicle agility and  
stability. Among other things, the system en-  
ables a more dynamic response to steering  
movements and reduces the body's tendency  
to roll when cornering quickly or making quick  
evasive maneuvers. This means that, e.g., the  
lateral head movements of the occupants are  
reduced.  
Additional information:  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
Executive Drive Pro  
Two-axle ride level control  
Principle  
Executive Drive Pro is an actively controlled  
chassis. The system increases driving comfort  
and minimizes the roll tendency when corner-  
ing.  
Principle  
The two-axle self-leveling suspension uses air  
springs to ensure the best possible driving  
comfort. Regardless of the load, the vehicle will  
be maintained at the configured vehicle level.  
General information  
For active control, this system uses the avail-  
able information, for instance from the naviga-  
tion system, the Driving style analysis and the  
camera-based look-ahead data.  
General information  
The shock absorbers can be set from comfort-  
able to sporty via the Driving Experience Con-  
trol drive modes.  
This information influences the control of the  
following systems:  
Depending on the driving situation, the vehicle  
level can be set to different levels:  
▷
▷
Active roll stabilization.  
Integral Active Steering.  
▷
Entry height:  
This further increases the agility and comfort of  
the vehicle.  
Lowest vehicle level setting.  
When the vehicle is stationary, the following  
options are available for setting the entry  
height:  
The function may be restricted if the naviga-  
tion data is invalid, outdated or not available,  
for example.  
▷
With the rocker button on the center  
console.  
Depending on the equipment, the rear axle  
lock differential will be adjusted for the traction  
conditions as needed.  
▷
▷
With the button in lower trunk lid  
With the My BMW app.  
The vehicle will be raised according to the  
selected drive mode when driving off.  
▷
Sport level:  
279  
Driving comfort  
CONTROLS  
Lowest vehicle level, for driving at higher  
speeds.  
Rocker button for level control.  
▷
▷
Normal level:  
Standard level for normal roads and  
speeds.  
High level 1:  
Button on lower tailgate  
Raised vehicle level for easy terrain at re-  
duced speed.  
If necessary, the vehicle will be lowered at  
higher speeds.  
▷
High level 2:  
Highest vehicle level, for terrains with major  
uneven surfaces in the lowest speed range.  
If necessary, the vehicle will be lowered at  
higher speeds.  
Button for self-leveling suspension.  
Safety information  
Warning  
Functional requirement  
Adjusting the vehicle height may result in  
trapped body parts or damaged vehicle parts.  
There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to  
property. When adjusting the vehicle height,  
make sure that the areas of movement  
around the vehicle and at the wheel housing  
are free.  
All doors are closed.  
Opening a door while raising or lowering the  
vehicle interrupts the process. The process  
continues after closing the door.  
Activating/deactivating self-leveling  
suspension  
The system can be deactivated, e.g., to  
change a wheel or for towing.  
Overview  
Push the rocker button forward or pull it back-  
ward, then hold for approx. 7 seconds.  
Rocker button in vehicle  
When the rocker button is released, the LED  
indicates the system status.  
▷
LED illuminates: the self-leveling suspen-  
sion is activated.  
▷
LED goes out: the self-leveling suspension  
is deactivated.  
The self-leveling suspension is automatically  
activated after driving off at speeds above ap-  
prox. 6 mph/10 km/h.  
280  
Driving comfort  
CONTROLS  
In the event of a flat tire  
Setting the vehicle level manually  
When a loss of tire inflation pressure is de-  
tected in a wheel, the pressure on this wheel  
is reduced automatically to increase the possi-  
ble distance traveled. In this situation, only the  
normal level is available.  
Adjusting vehicle level using button  
on lower tailgate  
Principle  
Press rocker button forward:  
When the tailgate is open, the button on the  
tailgate can be used to lower the vehicle to en-  
try height and raise it again for easier loading  
and unloading.  
The vehicle is raised to the next highest vehicle  
level.  
Press rocker button backward:  
The vehicle will lower by one level.  
Setting the vehicle level  
LED display on rocker button  
Press the button on the lower tailgate.  
The vehicle is lowered to entry height.  
Press the button again to raise the ve-  
hicle.  
▷
▷
▷
LED illuminates: Current vehicle level dis-  
played.  
LED flashes: adjustment procedure run-  
ning. The vehicle raises or lowers itself.  
The flashing of the LED in the button indicates  
the level change.  
LED flashes rapidly: The selected vehicle  
level is not possible at this time.  
During the raising procedure, the vehicle raises  
itself from the entry height to the level that was  
selected last or the normal level.  
▷
▷
LED off: System is deactivated.  
All LEDs on rocker button flashing: System  
is initializing. The selected vehicle level will  
be adjusted as required after initialization.  
Canceling the adjustment procedure  
Press the button again. The vehicle raises or  
lowers itself back to the starting level.  
Setting the vehicle level  
automatically  
Lowering the vehicle level via the  
My BMW app  
While driving  
The vehicle will lower automatically in the fol-  
lowing situations:  
Principle  
Using the My BMW App and a compatible  
Apple iPhone, the vehicle level can be set  
when stationary, e.g., to make loading or entry  
easier.  
▷
▷
When switching to SPORT drive mode.  
At higher speeds.  
When a set vehicle level is exited due to the  
speed, the vehicle level will be adjusted ac-  
cording to the selected driving mode.  
281  
Driving comfort  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
If the payload is increased, the highest driv-  
ing level may be disabled or automatically  
exited in order to protect the system.  
Setting the vehicle level  
For safety reasons, lowering is only possible  
from the normal level or the Sport level.  
When the trailer power socket is occupied,  
only the normal level is available.  
1. Apply the parking brake and turn off drive-  
ready state using the Start/Stop button.  
2. Closing the doors.  
Malfunction  
A Check Control message is displayed.  
3. In the My BMW app, switch to the entry  
height menu and follow the instructions.  
In case of a malfunction, the vehicle will have  
changed handling characteristics or a noticea-  
bly reduced driving comfort.  
Additional information:  
Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertain-  
ment, and Communication, refer to page 6.  
Have the vehicle checked by an authorized  
service center or another qualified service cen-  
ter or repair shop.  
Canceling the adjustment procedure  
If an adjustment procedure was started with  
the My BMW app, it can be canceled with the  
app.  
xOFFROAD package  
Long stationary periods  
During long stationary periods, the vehicle may  
lower itself. This is not a malfunction.  
Principle  
The xOFFROAD package assists the driver  
when driving on unpaved roads or when there  
is reduced traction.  
When the drive-ready state is switched on with  
the doors closed, the vehicle is raised to the  
normal level automatically.  
General information  
Depending on the condition of the vehicle, rais-  
ing to normal level may take several minutes.  
The system offers four different xOFFROAD  
driving modes for selection. When an xOFF-  
ROAD driving mode is switched on, individual  
systems in the vehicle are set to the best pos-  
sible traction and driving stability.  
System limits  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
It may not possible to change the vehicle  
level during sporty driving.  
xOFFROAD driving modes can be selected  
based on the ground conditions.  
It may not be possible to change the vehicle  
level with articulated axles.  
With two-axle ride level control, the vehicle  
level is set according to the corresponding  
xOFFROAD driving mode.  
It may only be possible to raise the vehicle  
level in the drive-ready state.  
Observe the information in the chapter Driving  
tips for driving on poor roads.  
If the vehicle battery charge is too low, the  
vehicle level cannot be changed.  
Additional information:  
If the vehicle level is frequently changed in  
quick succession, the system switches off  
to prevent overheating and will be tempo-  
rarily unavailable or operate at a delay. Let  
the system cool down, if needed.  
Driving on poor roads, refer to page 328.  
282  
Driving comfort  
CONTROLS  
Overview  
Setting the xOFFROAD driving  
mode  
1
xOFFROAD: button  
xOFFROAD: rocker switch  
Repeatedly push the rocker switch forward or  
pull it back until the desired xOFFROAD driving  
mode is displayed on the instrument cluster.  
2
Activating xOFFROAD driving mode  
Press the button.  
Deactivating xOFFROAD driving  
mode  
or  
Press the button.  
Push the rocker switch forward or pull it back-  
ward.  
The LED in the button goes out.  
The last driving mode that was set  
through the Driving Experience Control will be  
activated.  
The following functions are executed:  
▷
▷
The LED in the button illuminates.  
The following xOFFROAD driving mode is  
set: "xGRAVEL".  
If a driving mode is selected via Driving Expe-  
rience Control, xOFFROAD driving mode is au-  
tomatically deactivated.  
Additional information:  
xOFFROAD driving modes in detail, refer to  
page 283.  
xOFFROAD driving modes in detail  
When xOFFROAD driving modes are switched  
on, the following vehicle settings are applied:  
▷
▷
Auto Start/Stop function is switched off.  
The shift characteristics and response to  
the accelerator pedal are adapted.  
▷
▷
▷
The all-wheel drive system is set for opti-  
mum traction.  
The response characteristics of the Antilock  
Braking System are adapted.  
The response characteristics of Dynamic  
Stability Control are adapted.  
283  
Driving comfort  
CONTROLS  
Additional vehicle settings are applied, de-  
pending on the xOFFROAD driving mode se-  
lected.  
xOFFROAD  
driving mode  
Settings  
"xROCKS"  
Setting for difficult terrain  
with severe ground uneven-  
ness.  
xOFFROAD  
Settings  
driving mode  
"xGRAVEL"  
Setting for easy terrain.  
High level 2 of the two-axle  
self-leveling suspension is  
set.  
High level 1 of the two-axle  
self-leveling suspension is  
set.  
For maximum traction, dis-  
able Dynamic Stability Con-  
trol.  
"xSAND"  
Setting for difficult terrain  
with loose ground.  
Deactivate Forward Collision  
Mitigation as necessary to  
prevent it from automatically  
activating Dynamic Stability  
Control.  
High level 1 of the two-axle  
self-leveling suspension is  
set.  
For maximum traction, dis-  
able Dynamic Stability Con-  
trol.  
"xSNOW"  
Setting for road smoothness.  
The transmission shift char-  
acteristics are set to smooth  
gear changes. The vehicle  
drives off in second gear as  
necessary.  
Deactivate Forward Collision  
Mitigation as necessary to  
prevent it from automatically  
activating Dynamic Stability  
Control.  
The accelerator pedal char-  
acteristics are optimized for  
gentle handling.  
Additional information:  
▷
Two-axle ride level control, refer to  
page 279.  
▷
Forward Collision Mitigation, refer to  
page 183.  
xOFFROAD display  
Enabling an xOFFROAD driving mode auto-  
matically opens the xOFFROAD display in the  
Live Vehicle menu.  
The following information is displayed:  
▷
▷
Distribution of drive torque to the wheels.  
Longitudinal inclination: specified in per-  
cent.  
▷
Transverse inclination: specified in degrees.  
284  
Driving comfort  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
Graph of wheel angle.  
With navigation system: elevation for the  
current position.  
▷
Level adjustment of the two-axle ride level  
control.  
Additional information:  
Live Vehicle, refer to page 146.  
System limits  
At higher speeds, the characteristics of the se-  
lected xOFFROAD driving mode are reduced.  
BMW IconicSounds  
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-  
market version, the vehicle drive sound can be  
adjusted using BMW IconicSounds.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Drivetrain and chassis"  
5. "IconicSounds"  
6. Select the desired setting.  
285  
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
Climate control  
Icon  
Function  
Vehicle features and options  
Fresh air.  
This chapter describes model-specific equip-  
ment, systems, and functions that are currently  
available, or may become available in the fu-  
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.  
Air flow.  
Additional information:  
Air distribution.  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
Climate control  
SYNC program.  
Overview  
Seat and armrest heating.  
Active seat ventilation.  
Steering wheel heating.  
Functions in the Climate menu  
Icon  
Function  
Turn the climate control sys-  
tem on/off.  
Automatic program.  
Temperature.  
Buttons, automatic climate control  
Air conditioning.  
Maximum cooling.  
Air recirculation mode.  
Icon  
Function  
Defrost function.  
Automatic recirculated-air con-  
trol.  
Rear window defroster.  
286  
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
Buttons, rear automatic climate control  
Turning the air conditioning system  
on/off  
The climate control system can be turned on or  
off via iDrive.  
▷
Second-row seating: the control panel for  
the rear climate control is located in the  
rear center console.  
▷
Third-row seating: the control panel for the  
rear climate control is located in the head-  
liner.  
1.  
Tap the icon for the Climate menu  
on the menu bar.  
Icon  
Function  
Automatic program.  
2.  
Tap the power button.  
The entire climate control system is turned on  
or off with the last settings applied.  
Temperature.  
When the air conditioning system is turned  
on, individual climate control functions can be  
turned off.  
Air conditioning.  
Maximum cooling.  
Air flow.  
Settings  
You can configure individual settings for cli-  
mate control functions via iDrive, e.g.:  
▷
▷
Intensity of seat heating.  
Pre-ventilation.  
Air distribution.  
Seat and armrest heating.  
1.  
Tap the icon for the Climate menu  
on the menu bar.  
2. "Individual settings" or "General settings"  
3. Select the desired setting.  
Turning rear automatic climate  
control on/off  
Calling up climate control functions  
The Climate menu can be accessed via iDrive:  
Functional requirements  
Tap the icon for the Climate menu on  
the menu bar.  
▷
Automatic climate control is turned on.  
▷
Defrost function is deactivated.  
Or:  
Via iDrive  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
1.  
Tap the icon for the Climate menu  
on the menu bar.  
3. "Climate control"  
2. "Individual settings"  
3. "Second row of seats"  
287  
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
4. "Rear climate control"  
General information  
5. Select the desired setting.  
Depending on the equipment, the automatic  
program provides the best possible settings  
for climate control functions depending on  
the outside temperature, interior temperature,  
sunlight, seat occupancy and the desired tem-  
perature setting:  
The rear climate control can be activated with  
the default settings for temperature and the  
AUTO program:  
"Activate with default settings"  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Air flow.  
Switching on using the button  
Press one of the following buttons:  
Air distribution.  
Temperature.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Temperature.  
Seat and armrest heating.  
Active seat ventilation.  
Steering wheel heating.  
Maximum cooling.  
Automatic program.  
Upper side of the air flow, manual button.  
Air distribution, manual.  
The automatic program takes seat occupancy  
into account, regulating the climate in an en-  
ergy-efficient manner that is tailored to the oc-  
cupants.  
Switching off using the button  
Second-row seating:  
At the same time, a condensation sensor con-  
trols the automatic program in order to prevent  
window condensation to the extent possible.  
Press and hold the bottom of the but-  
ton.  
Overview  
Locking the rear automatic climate  
control  
1.  
Tap the icon for the Climate menu  
on the menu bar.  
2. "Individual settings"  
3. "Second row of seats"  
4. "Lock rear climate control"  
1
Settings  
Automatic program  
2
3
4
5
Air flow intensity  
Climate control functions bar  
Temperature  
Principle  
The automatic program ensures a comforta-  
ble climate, which can be modified with the  
desired temperature and individual settings.  
Seat heating  
Steering wheel heating  
Active seat ventilation  
The automatic program cools, ventilates or  
heats the vehicle interior automatically.  
288  
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
Each level has a specific control range of the  
intensity.  
Turning the automatic program  
on/off  
The AUTO program can be switched on or off  
via iDrive.  
Based on the stored data models, the intensi-  
ties are dynamically adjusted while driving. It is  
not necessary to manually change the desired  
intensity to lower or higher levels while driving.  
The individually selected settings of the cli-  
mate control functions are stored and auto-  
matically set up again such as after the vehicle  
is started again.  
1.  
Tap the icon for the Climate menu  
on the menu bar.  
2.  
Tap the AUTO program button.  
Display  
Switching the rear climate control  
automatic program on/off  
The indicator on the menu bar provides infor-  
mation about the temperature difference be-  
tween the configured desired temperature and  
current interior temperature.  
Via iDrive  
▷
The red or blue bar next to the temperature  
display indicates the progress of heating or  
cooling.  
1.  
Tap the icon for the Climate menu  
on the menu bar.  
▷
The desired interior temperature is reached  
as soon as the bar is no longer displayed.  
2. "Individual settings"  
3. "Second row of seats"  
4. "Automatic climate"  
5. Select the desired setting.  
Active climate control functions, e.g., seat  
heating, are indicated by the icons on the  
menu bar.  
Using the button  
Temperature  
Press the button.  
The LED of the button is illuminated  
when the automatic program is turned  
Principle  
on.  
The automatic climate control cools or heats  
to the configured temperature and then keeps  
the temperature constant.  
Setting the intensity  
When the automatic program is activated,  
the intensity of individual climate control func-  
tions, e.g., seat heating, is adjusted individu-  
ally.  
General information  
Do not rapidly switch between different tem-  
perature settings. Otherwise, the automatic cli-  
mate control will not have sufficient time to ad-  
just the set temperature.  
1.  
Tap the icon for the Climate menu  
on the menu bar.  
2. "Individual settings"  
3. Select the desired setting.  
289  
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
Adjusting the upper body temperature  
Setting the temperature  
1.  
Tap the icon for the Climate menu  
on the menu bar.  
2. "Individual settings"  
3. "Driver" or "Front passenger"  
4. "Temp. adjustment upper body"  
5. Increase or decrease temperature.  
You can set the desired temperature for driver  
and front passenger individually on the menu  
bar.  
Air flow  
Principle  
The air flow generated by the blower can be  
adjusted as needed.  
▷
▷
Raise the temperature.  
Lower the temperature.  
The air flow may be reduced to preserve the  
vehicle battery.  
Setting the rear automatic climate  
control temperature  
Adjusting the air flow  
The air flow can be set via iDrive.  
Via iDrive  
1.  
Tap the icon for the Climate menu  
on the menu bar.  
1.  
Tap the icon for the Climate menu  
on the menu bar.  
2. "Individual settings"  
3. "Second row of seats"  
4. Set the desired temperature.  
2.  
Select the desired setting.  
Automatic program:  
Using the button  
▷
Tap the large air flow icon to increase the  
air flow.  
Press the upper or lower button side to  
set the desired temperature.  
▷
Tap the small air flow icon to reduce the air  
flow.  
Manual mode:  
Upper body temperature  
▷
▷
Tap up arrow: Increase air flow.  
Tap down arrow: Reduce air flow.  
General information  
The air temperature in the upper body area  
can be adjusted.  
This does not change the set interior tempera-  
ture for the driver and front passenger.  
290  
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
The selected air distribution is displayed.  
Adjusting the air volume of the rear  
climate control  
Via iDrive  
1.  
Tap the icon for the Climate menu  
on the menu bar.  
2. "Individual settings"  
3. "Second row of seats"  
4. "Fan"  
Adjusting the air distribution of the  
rear climate control  
5. Select the desired setting.  
Using the button  
Pressing the upper or lower side of the  
button. Select the desired setting.  
Pressing the upper or lower side of  
The selected air distribution is shown  
on the rear climate control display.  
the button repeatedly: decrease or in-  
crease air flow.  
The selected air flow is shown on the rear cli-  
mate control display.  
Air conditioning  
Air distribution settings  
Principle  
With the climate control function, the air inside  
the vehicle is cooled and dehumidified, then  
warmed again depending on the temperature  
settings.  
Principle  
In manual mode, the air distribution can be  
adjusted as needed.  
Functional requirement  
Standby or drive-ready state is turned on.  
Adjusting the air distribution  
The air distribution can be set via iDrive:  
Switching the cooling function on/off  
The air conditioning can be switched on or off  
via iDrive:  
1.  
Tap the icon for the Climate menu  
on the menu bar.  
2.  
Tap the air distribution icon on the  
climate control functions bar.  
3. Select the desired setting:  
1.  
Tap the icon for the Climate menu  
on the menu bar.  
▷
▷
▷
Aim the air flow downward, arrow 1.  
Aim the air flow upward, arrow 2.  
2.  
Tap the air conditioning button.  
In recirculated-air mode, air conditioning is au-  
tomatically switched on to dry the air and avoid  
window condensation.  
Aim the air flow at the windshield , ar-  
row 3.  
291  
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
Depending on the weather, the windshield and  
the side windows may fog up briefly when  
drive-ready state is switched on.  
Air recirculation mode  
Principle  
When using the cooling mode, condensation  
that will exit below the vehicle.  
You may react to unpleasant odors or pollu-  
tants in the immediate environment by tempo-  
rarily suspending the supply of outside air. The  
system then recirculates the interior air.  
Maximum cooling  
In automatic recirculated-air control mode, out-  
side air is fed in or the interior air recirculated  
depending on the outside air quality.  
Principle  
Maximum cooling lets you cool the vehicle in-  
terior quickly and effectively.  
When the air recirculation is turned off, outside  
air is directed into the interior.  
The lowest temperature and the maximum air  
flow are set automatically.  
General information  
If there is window condensation, turn off the air  
recirculation.  
The function is automatically activated in the  
rear when the SYNC program is turned on.  
The interior filter cleans the incoming fresh  
air or the circulated interior air in recirculation  
mode.  
Functional requirement  
The following functional requirements must be  
met for maximum cooling:  
▷
The outside temperature is higher than ap-  
prox. 32℉ / 0℃.  
Turning air recirculation on/off  
Air recirculation mode can be switched on or  
off via iDrive:  
▷
Drive-ready state is switched on.  
Turning maximum cooling on/off  
Maximum cooling can be turned on or off via  
iDrive:  
1.  
Tap the icon for the Climate menu  
on the menu bar.  
2. The current operating mode is displayed on  
the climate control functions bar. Tap the  
button until the desired operating mode is  
set.  
1.  
Tap the icon for the Climate menu  
on the menu bar.  
2.  
Tap the maximum cooling button.  
▷
▷
▷
Recirculating air.  
Air flows out of the air vents to the upper body  
area. Open the vents.  
Fresh air.  
Rear automatic climate control:  
Press the button.  
Automatic recirculated-air con-  
The button LED illuminates when max-  
imum cooling is turned on.  
trol.  
In recirculated-air mode, the air conditioning  
turns on automatically to dry the air and pre-  
vent condensation.  
292  
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
Depending on vehicle equipment, the air recir-  
culation turns off automatically after some time  
based on the ambient conditions in order to  
prevent condensation.  
Defrost function  
Principle  
With the defrost function, ice and condensation  
are quickly removed from the windshield and  
the front side windows.  
SYNC program  
The air flow and air temperature are automati-  
cally optimized for the removal of ice and con-  
densation.  
Principle  
If SYNC program is activated, the settings on  
the driver's side are transfered to the passeng-  
er's side and to the rear.  
The air distribution is directed toward the  
windshield and front side windows.  
If the SYNC program is deactivated, the follow-  
ing settings are made automatically in the au-  
tomatic program depending on the seat occu-  
pancy:  
If there is window condensation, turn on the  
automatic program to take advantage of the  
condensation sensor.  
When the defrost function is turned on, the rear  
automatic climate control is deactivated to pro-  
vide maximum performance.  
▷
If the front passenger's seat is not occu-  
pied, the settings on the driver's side are  
applied.  
Turning the defrost function on/off  
▷
If the seats in the rear are unoccupied, the  
default settings are applied.  
Press the defrost button on the instru-  
ment panel.  
General information  
The following settings can be transferred:  
The LED of the button is illuminated  
when the system is switched on.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Temperature.  
Air flow.  
Make sure that air is able to flow to the wind-  
shield and front side windows.  
Air distribution.  
Automatic program.  
Rear window defroster  
Turning the SYNC program on/off  
The SYNC program can be switched on or off  
via iDrive:  
Principle  
With the rear window defroster, ice and con-  
densation are quickly removed from the rear  
window.  
1.  
Tap the icon for the Climate menu  
on the menu bar.  
Functional requirement  
Standby or drive-ready state is turned on.  
2.  
Tap the SYNC program button.  
If the settings on the front passenger side or in  
the rear are changed, the program is automati-  
cally switched off.  
293  
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
Turning the rear window defroster  
on/off  
Press the rear window heating button  
on the instrument panel.  
The LED in the button illuminates  
when the rear window heating is turned on.  
The rear window defroster switches off auto-  
matically after a certain period of time.  
1. Tap the icon for seat climate control on the  
menu bar, arrow 1.  
Seat and armrest heating  
2.  
Press the seat heating button re-  
peatedly until the desired level is selected,  
arrow 2.  
Principle  
The system heats seats and armrests as  
needed.  
If a consumption-optimized drive mode is se-  
lected, the heater output is reduced.  
General information  
Seat heating can also be used without arm-  
rest heating. Deactivate the armrest heating as  
needed.  
Turning the armrest heating on/off  
1.  
Tap the icon for the Climate menu  
on the menu bar.  
If the trip is continued within approx. 15 mi-  
nutes after an intermediate stop, the functions  
are turned on automatically with the tempera-  
ture that was last set.  
2. "Individual settings"  
3. Select desired seat.  
4. "Heat armrests and seat"  
Adjusting seat heating  
Turning the rear automatic climate  
control seat heating on/off  
Automatic program  
When the automatic program is activated, the  
intensity of seat heating can be adjusted: As  
you drive, the heater output is automatically  
adjusted according to your set intensity.  
Press the button once for each temper-  
ature level.  
The maximum temperature is reached  
when three LEDs are illuminated.  
Adjusting seat heating manually  
The heater output level can be adjusted man-  
ually:  
Active seat ventilation  
Principle  
The system cools the seat and backrest sur-  
faces as necessary, ensuring a pleasant seat  
temperature.  
294  
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
Adjusting steering wheel heating  
manually  
The heater output level can be adjusted man-  
ually:  
Adjusting active seat ventilation  
Automatic program  
When the AUTO program is on, the intensity  
of seat ventilation can be adjusted. As you  
drive, the ventilation is automatically adjusted  
according to the set intensity.  
Adjusting the active seat ventilation  
manually  
The ventilation level can be adjusted manually:  
1. Tap the icon for seat climate control on the  
menu bar, arrow 1.  
2.  
Press the steering wheel heating  
button repeatedly until the desired level is  
selected, arrow 2.  
If a consumption-optimized drive mode is se-  
lected, the heater output is reduced.  
1. Tap the seat climate control icon on the  
menu bar, arrow 1.  
Ventilation  
2.  
Press the seat ventilation button re-  
peatedly until the desired level is selected,  
arrow 2.  
Principle  
The ventilation system offers individual adjust-  
ment ranges for direct/indirect ventilation in or-  
der to optimize the flow of air within the vehi-  
cle.  
Steering wheel heating  
Principle  
General information  
Open the air vents and position them to ensure  
effective air conditioning.  
The system heats the steering wheel as nec-  
essary.  
Adjusting steering wheel heating  
The air flow heats or cools noticeably, depend-  
ing on the set desired temperature.  
Automatic program  
When the automatic program is activated, the  
intensity of steering wheel heating can be ad-  
justed. As you drive, the heater output is auto-  
matically adjusted according to your set inten-  
sity.  
295  
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
Front ventilation  
Ventilation in the rear, on the side  
Setting the air flow direction and air volume at  
the vent.  
▷
▷
Lever for changing the airflow direction, ar-  
row 1.  
▷
Changing the air flow direction: press the  
button in the desired air flow direction.  
Knurled wheel for variable opening and  
closing of the air vents, arrow 2.  
▷
Changing the air volume:  
▷
Turn the knob clockwise: increase the  
air volume.  
Setting the ventilation  
Depending on the desired ventilation, align the  
air flow directly or indirectly toward the pas-  
sengers.  
▷
Turn the knob counterclockwise to de-  
crease the air volume.  
Ventilation, third row of seats  
Ventilation in the rear  
▷
▷
Lever for changing the airflow direction, ar-  
row 1.  
▷
▷
Lever for changing the airflow direction, ar-  
rows 1.  
Knurled wheel for variable opening and  
closing of the air vents, arrow 2.  
Knurled wheel for variable opening and  
closing of the air vents, arrows 2.  
Air quality  
General information  
The air quality in the interior is improved by the  
following components:  
296  
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
▷
Emission tested passenger compartment.  
Interior filter.  
▷
▷
Time of day and season.  
Physical condition of the vehicle occupants,  
for instance fatigue.  
Air conditioning system to control the  
temperature, air flow and recirculated-air  
mode.  
BMW recommends the use of genuine BMW  
fragrance cartridges.  
▷
▷
▷
Pre-ventilation.  
Ionizer.  
The genuine BMW fragrance cartridges are not  
suitable for refilling. When a cartridge is empty,  
replace it with a new fragrance cartridge.  
Fragrancing.  
Safety information  
Interior filter  
The interior filter cleans the incoming fresh  
air or the circulated interior air in recirculation  
mode.  
Warning  
Refilled genuine BMW fragrance cartridges  
can cause the emission of harmful substan-  
ces, malfunctions, and damage to the sys-  
tem. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage  
to property. Do not refill genuine fragrance  
cartridges. When a cartridge is empty, re-  
place it with a new fragrance cartridge.  
Depending on the equipment:  
▷
Dust and pollen is filtered out from the in-  
flowing air.  
▷
▷
▷
Nano-particle emissions are reduced.  
Gaseous pollutants are filtered.  
Microbial particles, viruses and allergens  
are filtered.  
Ionizer  
The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends  
having the interior filter changed during vehicle  
maintenance.  
Principle  
The ionizer cleans the car's interior air of sus-  
pended particles and improves the air quality.  
Ambient air package  
Switching the ionizer on/off  
Principle  
The Ambient Air Package cleans and scents  
the interior air with selected fragrances.  
1.  
Tap the icon for the Climate menu  
on the menu bar.  
2. "General settings"  
3. "Air quality"  
General information  
Two different fragrances can be selected in the  
vehicle. A variety of other fragrances is possi-  
ble by exchanging the fragrance cartridges.  
4. "Ionization"  
Fragrancing  
The following criteria can influence the percep-  
tion of scents in the vehicle interior:  
General information  
Fragrancing is done at intervals in order to  
avoid a habituation effect.  
▷
▷
Automatic climate control settings.  
Temperature and moisture.  
Two fragrance cartridges in the vehicle allow  
switching between the fragrances.  
297  
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
The fragrance cartridges are located in the  
glove compartment.  
Display  
The illustrations on the control display show  
the actual fill level of the fragrance cartridges.  
To ensure a pleasant fragrance inside of the  
vehicle when starting the trip, fragrancing can  
occur prior to the trip. The system is automati-  
cally switched on with the pre-ventilation if fra-  
grancing was switched on at the completion of  
the last trip.  
1.  
Tap the icon for the Climate menu  
on the menu bar.  
2. "General settings"  
3. "Air quality"  
Functional requirements  
When an empty fragrance cartridge is indi-  
cated, the cartridge still contains a fluid carry-  
ing the fragrance. However, it is not sufficient  
for fragrancing.  
▷
▷
▷
The fragrance cartridges are sufficiently fil-  
led.  
The interior temperature is be-  
tween 41 ℉/+5 ℃ and 104 ℉/+40 ℃.  
When the fragrance cartridges are empty, a  
Check Control message is displayed once.  
Open the air vents to allow the fragrance to  
flow out.  
Inserting fragrance cartridges  
The fragrance cartridges are located in the  
glove compartment.  
Selecting the fragrance  
The car's interior is fragranced depending on  
the selected fragrance.  
1. Open the glove compartment.  
Two different fragrances can be selected in the  
vehicle.  
Front passenger side glove compartment,  
refer to page 312.  
2. Press on the bottom of the cartridge holder.  
The cartridge holder slides down.  
1.  
Tap the icon for the Climate menu  
on the menu bar.  
2. "General settings"  
3. "Air quality"  
4. "Fragrance"  
5. Select the desired fragrance.  
Switching fragrancing on/off, adjusting  
intensity  
1.  
Tap the icon for the Climate menu  
on the menu bar.  
2. "General settings"  
3. "Air quality"  
4. "Fragrance"  
5. "Intensity"  
6. Select the desired setting.  
298  
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
3. Remove the cover of the new fragrance  
cartridge. Hold the cover on the top to slide  
it from the fragrance cartridge.  
is correctly positioned when the cartridge  
holder can be closed.  
7. Push the cartridge holder up, until it en-  
gages.  
4. Insert the removed cover on the rear of the  
fragrance cartridge.  
Make sure that no objects press against the  
cartridge holder from below, otherwise the  
function of the ambient air package could  
be impacted.  
8. Close the glove compartment.  
Removing fragrance cartridges  
The fragrance cartridges are located in the  
glove compartment.  
1. Open the glove compartment.  
5. Position fragrance cartridge such that the  
chip faces away from the cartridge holder.  
Front passenger side glove compartment,  
refer to page 312.  
2. Press on the bottom of the cartridge holder.  
The cartridge holder slides down.  
6. Slide the fragrance cartridge into the car-  
tridge holder at a slight angle without ap-  
plying pressure. The fragrance cartridge  
3. Pull desired fragrance cartridge from the  
holder.  
Fragrance cartridge, arrow 1: first fragrance  
indicated on the control display.  
299  
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
Fragrance cartridge, arrow 2: second fra-  
grance indicated on the control display.  
The activation time is determined based on  
the outside temperature. The system promptly  
switches on before the selected departure  
time.  
The system switches off automatically after a  
certain period of time. The system continues to  
run for some time after being switched off.  
Functional requirements  
▷
The vehicle is in idle state or standby state.  
▷
The vehicle battery is sufficiently charged.  
4. Pull desired fragrance cartridge from the  
holder.  
If pre-ventilation is switched on, the vehicle  
battery will be discharged. Thus, limit the  
maximum activation time to save the vehi-  
cle battery. The system will be available  
again after the engine is started or after a  
short trip.  
▷
▷
Time and date are set correctly.  
The ventilation air vents are open.  
Switching pre-ventilation on/off  
Recycling  
1.  
Tap the icon for the Climate menu  
on the menu bar.  
Empty fragrance cartridges can be  
taken to an authorized service center  
or another qualified service center or  
repair shop for recycling.  
2. "General settings"  
3. "Pre-ventilation"  
4. Select the desired setting.  
Departure time  
Pre-ventilation  
General information  
Principle  
Different departure times can be set to ensure  
a comfortable interior temperature in the vehi-  
cle at the time of departure.  
The car's interior can be cooled or heated  
before driving off with the pre-ventilation. De-  
pending on set temperature and ambient tem-  
perature, the car's interior is ventilated or pos-  
sibly heated using the residual engine heat.  
▷
One-time departure time: the time can be  
set.  
The system is switched on once.  
▷
Departure time with weekday: time and day  
of the week can be set.  
General information  
The system can be switched on and off directly  
or via a preset departure time.  
300  
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
On the desired weekdays, the system will  
be switched on before the set departure  
time.  
Activating with My BMW App  
Depending on vehicle equipment, the My BMW  
App with remote functionality can be used to  
turn on precooling at a preset departure time  
or immediately.  
The departure time is preselected in two steps:  
▷
▷
Set departure times.  
Activate departure times.  
A minimum of 10 minutes should pass be-  
tween setting and activating the departure  
time and the planned departure time to allow a  
sufficient period of time for the air conditioning.  
Pre-conditioning through  
Remote Engine Start  
Principle  
Setting the departure time  
Pre-conditioning cools or heats the car's inte-  
rior prior to start of the trip to a comfortable  
temperature. The system automatically cools,  
vents, and heats depending on the interior, ex-  
ternal, and set temperature. Snow and ice may  
be removed more easily.  
1.  
Tap the icon for the Climate menu  
on the menu bar.  
2. "General settings"  
3. "Pre-ventilation"  
The system starts the engine automatically  
and allows it to run for a limited period of time.  
4. "Departure plan"  
5. Select the desired departure time.  
6. Set the desired departure time.  
7. Select day of the week, if needed.  
Safety information  
DANGER  
Activating the departure time  
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventilation  
is insufficient, harmful exhaust gases can pol-  
lute the area in and around the vehicle or  
penetrate the vehicle. The exhaust gases  
contain pollutants which are colorless and  
odorless. In enclosed areas or areas with in-  
sufficient ventilation, exhaust gases can also  
accumulate outside of the vehicle. There is a  
danger to life. Keep the exhaust pipe free and  
ensure sufficient ventilation. Do not switch on  
pre-conditioning in enclosed areas or areas  
with insufficient ventilation, e.g. in enclosed  
garages.  
1.  
Tap the icon for the Climate menu  
on the menu bar.  
2. "General settings"  
3. "Pre-ventilation"  
4. "Departure plan"  
5. Activate the desired departure time.  
Display on the instrument cluster  
Icon  
Description  
Icon illuminates: a depar-  
ture time is activated.  
Warning  
Icon flashes: pre-ventila-  
tion is switched on.  
When stationary climate control is in opera-  
tion, high temperatures can occur underneath  
the body, for instance caused by the exhaust  
system. If combustible materials such as  
301  
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
leaves or grass come in contact with hot  
parts of the exhaust system, these materi-  
als can ignite. There is a risk of fire. Make  
sure that no combustible materials can come  
in contact with hot vehicle parts during sta-  
tionary climate control operation, e.g. leaves,  
grass, gas, gasoline, oil or other combustible  
objects.  
The system can be switched on a maximum of  
two times in a row.  
The system will be available again as soon  
as the drive-ready state is activated and deac-  
tivated again.  
Switching on via iDrive  
1.  
Tap the icon for the Climate menu  
on the menu bar.  
Functional requirements  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
The vehicle is in idle state or standby state.  
Battery is sufficiently charged.  
The fuel tank capacity is sufficient.  
Hood is closed.  
2. "General settings"  
3. "Pre-conditioning"  
4. "Start now"  
Switching on/off via vehicle key  
The system can be switched on and off using  
the vehicle key.  
Make sure that the vehicle's date and time  
are set correctly.  
▷
Air vents are opened.  
Press the button on the vehicle key  
three times within 1 second.  
Enabling the automatic engine start  
function  
The automatic engine start must be enabled  
before using the system. Otherwise, the en-  
gine cannot switch on automatically to clima-  
tize the car's interior.  
After operating the vehicle key, it takes  
approx. 3 seconds for the engine to switch on.  
To switch off the system, press the button  
again three times.  
Turning off with the Start/Stop button  
This system can be turned off directly by push-  
ing the Start/Stop button without depressing  
the brake pedal.  
1.  
Tap the icon for the Climate menu  
on the menu bar.  
2. "General settings"  
3. "Pre-conditioning"  
Air conditioning for departure time  
4. "Remote Engine Start"  
5. "Start engine for climate cont."  
6. Confirm the disclaimer.  
General information  
Scheduled departure times can be set up in  
the system to ensure a comfortable interior  
temperature in the vehicle at the time of depar-  
ture.  
Turning on/turning off the pre-  
conditioning  
▷
One-time departure time: the time of the  
scheduled departure can be set.  
General information  
The system switches off automatically after  
max. 15 minutes for safety reasons.  
302  
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
The system is switched on once.  
Display  
▷
Departure time with weekday: time and day  
of the week of the scheduled departure can  
be set.  
In the instrument cluster:  
The engine runs for the purpose  
of operating the pre-condition-  
ing. The vehicle is not ready to  
drive.  
The departure time is preselected in two steps:  
▷
▷
Set departure times.  
Activate departure times.  
Icon  
Description  
The system is activated automatically a few  
minutes before the set departure time. The  
system remains switched on for a short time  
after the set departure time.  
Icon on the instrument  
panel.  
Icon illuminates: a depar-  
ture time is activated.  
For safety reasons, the air conditioning can  
only be activated once for the departure time.  
Icon flashes: pre-condition-  
ing is switched on.  
The system will be available again as soon  
as the drive-ready state is activated and deac-  
tivated again.  
Confirmation signals from the  
vehicle  
The activation of the system is confirmed by  
flashing twice.  
Observe the information about the intended  
use of the vehicle.  
Additional information:  
For Your Own Safety, refer to page 8.  
The parking lights are switched on as long as  
the system is switched on.  
Setting the departure time  
1.  
Tap the icon for the Climate menu  
on the menu bar.  
2. "General settings"  
3. "Pre-conditioning"  
4. "Departure plan"  
5. Set the departure time.  
6. Select day of the week, if needed.  
Activating the departure time  
1.  
Tap the icon for the Climate menu  
on the menu bar.  
2. "General settings"  
3. "Pre-conditioning"  
4. "Departure plan"  
5. Activate the desired departure time.  
303  
Interior equipment  
CONTROLS  
Interior equipment  
of damage to property. Make sure that the  
travel path of the respective system is clear  
during programming and operation. Also fol-  
low the safety information for the hand-held  
transmitter.  
Vehicle features and options  
This chapter describes model-specific equip-  
ment, systems, and functions that are currently  
available, or may become available in the fu-  
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.  
Additional information:  
Compatibility  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
If this icon is printed on the packaging  
or in the operating instructions of the  
remote-controlled system, the system  
is generally compatible with the integrated uni-  
versal remote control.  
Integrated universal remote  
control  
Additional questions are answered by:  
Principle  
▷
An authorized service center or another  
qualified service center or repair shop.  
The integrated universal remote control in the  
interior mirror can operate remote-controlled  
systems such as garage door openers, alarm  
systems or locking systems.  
▷
on the Internet.  
HomeLink is a registered trademark of Gentex  
Corporation.  
For any additional questions, contact an au-  
thorized service center or another qualified  
service center or repair shop.  
General information  
The integrated universal remote control re-  
places up to three different hand-held trans-  
mitters. To operate the remote control, the  
buttons on the interior mirror must be pro-  
grammed with the desired functions.  
Operating elements on the interior  
mirror  
Before selling the vehicle, delete the stored  
functions for the sake of security.  
If possible, do not install the antenna of the  
remote-controlled system near metal objects  
to ensure the best possible operation.  
Safety information  
Warning  
▷
▷
▷
Buttons, arrow 1.  
LED, arrow 2.  
The operation of remote-controlled systems  
with the integrated universal remote control  
such as the garage door may result in injury,  
for example, body parts becoming jammed in  
a garage door. There is a risk of injury or risk  
Hand-held transmitter of the remote-con-  
trolled system, arrow 3.  
304  
Interior equipment  
CONTROLS  
Press and hold the button on the interior  
mirror for approx. 2 seconds. Perform  
this procedure three times.  
Programming the integrated  
universal remote control  
If the integrated universal remote con-  
trol remains nonoperational, continue  
with the special features for rolling code  
radio systems.  
Functional requirement  
The battery of the hand-held transmitter must  
be fully charged at the time of programming  
to ensure an optimal range of the integrated  
universal remote control.  
▷
LED does not illuminate green after  
60 seconds: programming not com-  
pleted.  
Programming individual buttons  
1. Park the vehicle within range of the remote-  
controlled system.  
Repeat steps 3 to 5.  
Special feature of the rolling code  
wireless system  
For systems with a rolling code radio system,  
the integrated universal remote control and the  
system also have to be synchronized.  
2. Turn on standby state.  
3. Select desired button on the interior mirror:  
▷
Program available button:  
Press the button.  
▷
Program already assigned button:  
Refer to information on synchronization in the  
operating instructions of the remote-controlled  
system.  
Press and hold the button for approx.  
20 seconds.  
The LED on the interior mirror will slowly  
begin flashing orange.  
1. Program the desired button on the interior  
mirror.  
4. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the  
remote-controlled system approx. 1 to  
12 in/2.5 to 30 cm away from the buttons  
on the interior mirror.  
2. Locate and press the synchronizing button  
on the remote-controlled system such as  
on the garage door.  
You have approx. 30 seconds for the next  
step.  
The required distance depends on the  
hand-held transmitter.  
Synchronizing is easier with the aid of a  
second person.  
5. Press and hold the button on the hand-held  
transmitter.  
3. Press and hold the programmed button on  
the interior mirror for approx. 3 seconds.  
Canada: if programming with the hand-held  
transmitter was interrupted, hold down the  
interior mirror button and repeatedly press  
and release the hand-held transmitter but-  
ton for 2 seconds.  
If necessary, repeat this step up to three  
times in order to end synchronization. Once  
synchronization is complete, the program-  
med function will be carried out.  
6. The LED can illuminate in different ways:  
Operation  
After programming, the remote-controlled sys-  
tem can be operated with the button on the  
interior mirror.  
▷
The LED illuminates green: program-  
ming completed.  
Release button.  
▷
The LED flashes green rapidly: the  
hand-held transmitter was detected but  
programming is not complete.  
305  
Interior equipment  
CONTROLS  
Press and hold the desired button of the re-  
mote-controlled system within range until the  
function is triggered.  
Sockets  
Principle  
The socket can be used for electronic devi-  
ces when the standby or drive-ready state is  
switched on.  
The LED on the interior mirror is continuously  
illuminated green during the transmission of  
the radio signal.  
Deleting a button assignment  
The button assignment cannot be deleted indi-  
vidually.  
General information  
The total load of all sockets must not exceed  
140 watts at 12 volts.  
Press and hold the two outer buttons on  
the interior mirror simultaneously for approxi-  
mately 10 seconds until the LED flashes green  
rapidly.  
Do not damage the socket by using unsuitable  
connectors.  
Safety information  
All stored button assignments will be deleted.  
Warning  
Sun visor  
Devices and cables in the unfolding area of  
the airbags such as portable navigation devi-  
ces can hinder the unfolding of the airbag or  
be thrown around in the car's interior while  
unfolding. There is a risk of injury and risk  
of property damage. Make sure that devices  
and cables are not in the airbag's area of  
unfolding.  
Glare shield  
Fold the sun visor down or up.  
Glare shield from the side  
Folding the sun visor out  
1. Fold the sun visor down.  
2. Detach it from the holder and swing it to-  
ward the side window.  
Warning  
Battery chargers that charge the vehicle bat-  
tery via sockets or cigarette lighters in the ve-  
hicle may overload or damage the 12 V elec-  
trical system. There is a risk of injury or risk  
of damage to property. Only connect battery  
chargers for the vehicle battery to the jump-  
start terminals in the engine compartment.  
3. Shift it back to the desired position.  
Folding the sun visor in  
Proceed in the reverse order to close the sun  
visor.  
Vanity mirror  
A vanity mirror is located in the sun visor be-  
hind a cover.  
Warning  
If metal objects fall or are plugged into elec-  
tronic interfaces, e.g., sockets or USB ports,  
these objects can cause a short circuit and  
destroy the interface. There is a risk of injury  
and risk of property damage. Make sure to  
306  
Interior equipment  
CONTROLS  
prevent metal objects from falling or being  
plugged into electronic interfaces. Insert the  
cigarette lighter or socket cover again after  
using the socket.  
In the cargo area  
Front center console  
A socket is located on the right side in the  
cargo area. Unfold the cover.  
USB port  
Press on the cover.  
General information  
Follow the information regarding the connec-  
tion of mobile devices to the USB port in the  
section on USB connections.  
Additional information:  
USB connection, see Owner's Manual for Nav-  
igation, Entertainment, Communication;  
Safety information  
A socket is located between the cup holders in  
one of the marked positions. Detach the cover.  
Warning  
If metal objects fall or are plugged into elec-  
tronic interfaces, e.g., sockets or USB ports,  
these objects can cause a short circuit and  
destroy the interface. There is a risk of injury  
and risk of property damage. Make sure to  
prevent metal objects from falling or being  
plugged into electronic interfaces. Insert the  
cigarette lighter or socket cover again after  
using the socket.  
Rear center console  
A socket is located in the center console at one  
of the marked positions.  
Detach the cover.  
307  
Interior equipment  
CONTROLS  
In the center armrest  
A USB port is located in the center console at  
one of the marked positions.  
A USB port is located in the center armrest.  
Properties:  
Properties:  
▷
▷
USB port Type A.  
▷
▷
▷
USB port Type C.  
For charging mobile devices and for data  
transfer.  
For charging mobile devices.  
Charge current: max. 3 A.  
▷
Charge current: max. 1.5 A.  
In the center console  
Second row of seats  
NOTICE  
Objects in the storage compartment, e.g.,  
large USB connectors, may block or damage  
the cover when it is being opened or closed.  
There is a risk of property damage. Make  
sure that the area of movement of the cover  
is clear while opening and closing it.  
Two USB ports are located in the center con-  
sole in the rear at one of the marked positions.  
Properties:  
▷
▷
▷
USB port Type C.  
For charging mobile devices.  
Charge current: max. 3 A.  
Press on the cover.  
308  
Interior equipment  
CONTROLS  
Third row of seats  
Overview  
One USB port each is located in the side trim  
panel in the rear. Unfold the cover.  
The mounts for attaching optional accessories  
are located behind the marked covers, as are  
the USB ports.  
Properties:  
▷
▷
▷
USB port Type C.  
Attaching optional accessories  
1. Slide the cover all the way to the side.  
For charging mobile devices.  
Charge current: max. 3 A.  
Travel & Comfort system  
General information  
The front seat backrests have mounts and var-  
ious connection options:  
▷
Mounts for attaching optional accessories,  
e.g., universal holders for tablets or coat  
hangers.  
2. Mount the optional accessories, refer to As-  
sembly Instructions.  
▷
USB ports.  
Properties of the USB ports:  
Wireless charging tray  
▷
▷
▷
USB port Type C.  
For charging mobile devices.  
Principle  
Charge current: maximum 3 A / 45 W per  
seat.  
The wireless charging tray is used to wirelessly  
charge Qi-certified smartphones.  
For more information, contact an authorized  
service center or another qualified service cen-  
ter or repair shop.  
General information  
When inserting the smartphone to be charged,  
make sure that there is nothing between the  
smartphone to be charged and the wireless  
charging tray.  
The charging process is shown by the  
charge indicator on the control display.  
309  
Interior equipment  
CONTROLS  
Safety information  
Functional requirements  
▷
The smartphone to be charged must be Qi-  
certified.  
Warning  
▷
▷
Standby state is switched on.  
When charging a Qi-compatible device in the  
wireless charging tray, any metal objects on  
the tray together with the device can become  
very hot. Storage media or electronic cards,  
e.g., chip cards, cards with magnetic strips, or  
cards for transmitting signals, may not func-  
tion correctly when placed together on the  
tray with the device. There is a risk of injury  
and risk of property damage. When charging  
mobile devices, make sure there are no ob-  
jects on the tray together with the device.  
Smartphone must not exceed maximum di-  
mensions of approx. 6.0 x 3.1 x 0.7 in/154.5  
x 80 x 18 mm.  
▷
▷
Protective sleeves and covers must be suit-  
able for wireless charging.  
The smartphone to be charged is located  
in the center of the tray. The smartphone  
display is facing up.  
Inserting a smartphone  
1. Open the tray cover.  
Overview  
Tray across in the center console:  
2. Place the smartphone in the middle of the  
tray, with the display facing up.  
3. Close the tray cover.  
LED displays  
Color Meaning  
Blue  
Smartphone is charging.  
The blue LED continues to illumi-  
nate when the Qi-capable smart-  
phone is fully charged.  
1
LED  
Or-  
ange  
Smartphone is not charging.  
2
Storage area  
Temperature on the smartphone  
may be too high, or foreign object  
may be in charging tray.  
Tray on the left in the center console:  
Red  
Smartphone is not charging.  
Contact an authorized service center  
or another qualified service center or  
repair shop.  
1
LED  
2
Storage area  
310  
Interior equipment  
CONTROLS  
Forgotten warning  
General information  
A warning may be issued if a Qi-certified  
smartphone was forgotten in the wireless  
charging tray when leaving the vehicle.  
The forgotten warning is displayed in the in-  
strument cluster.  
Enable/Disable Forgotten Warning  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "System settings"  
4. "Wireless charging tray"  
5. "Mobile phone reminder"  
System limits  
The charge current may be reduced or charg-  
ing may be temporarily interrupted in the wire-  
less charging tray in the following situations:  
▷
▷
▷
Due to excessive temperatures on the tray  
and smartphone.  
If there are objects between the smart-  
phone and wireless charging tray.  
If storage media or electronic cards,  
e.g., chip cards, cards with magnetic  
stripes, or cards for signal transmission, are  
located between the smartphone and wire-  
less charging tray.  
▷
▷
Due to protective sleeves and covers that  
exceed a thickness of 0.07 in/2 mm  
Due to protective sleeves and covers made  
of unsuitable material, e.g., with magnetic  
parts.  
▷
▷
Due to add-on parts for the smartphone,  
e.g., holders.  
By configuring the smartphone settings,  
e.g., for charging. Follow the instructions  
given on the control display and smart-  
phone, as applicable.  
311  
Storage compartments  
CONTROLS  
Storage compartments  
Vehicle features and options  
Warning  
Anti-slip pads such as anti-slip mats can  
damage the dashboard. Attached objects  
could come loose. There is a risk of injury  
or risk of damage to property. Do not use  
anti-slip pads.  
This chapter describes model-specific equip-  
ment, systems, and functions that are currently  
available, or may become available in the fu-  
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.  
Additional information:  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
Glove compartment  
Safety information  
Opening the glove compartment  
Warning  
When driving, loose items or devices con-  
nected to the vehicle with a cable, i.e., mobile  
phones, may be thrown around the vehicle,  
e.g., in the event of an accident or when brak-  
ing or performing evasive maneuvers. There  
is a risk of injury and risk of property damage.  
Secure loose objects or devices that are con-  
nected to the vehicle via a cable.  
Pull the handle.  
Warning  
Closing the glove compartment  
Open flaps of the storage compartments,  
e.g., glove compartment or center armrest,  
protrude into the interior when folded open  
and may be in the way of an airbag that  
deploys. In addition, objects in the open stor-  
age compartment can be thrown into the ve-  
hicle interior during the trip, for instance, in  
the event of an accident or when braking or  
making an evasive maneuver. There is a risk  
of injury. Always close storage compartments  
immediately after use.  
Fold the lid closed.  
Locking the glove compartment  
The glove compartment can be locked with  
an integrated key. This prevents access to the  
glove compartment.  
After the glove compartment has been locked,  
the vehicle key can be given to someone with-  
out the integrated key, for example, when the  
car is being parked by a parking attendant.  
Additional information:  
Integrated key, refer to page 73.  
312  
Storage compartments  
CONTROLS  
Fold-out compartment  
Storage tray in center  
console  
Opening the fold-out compartment  
Opening the storage compartment  
Press the button and open the cover.  
Press on the cover.  
Storage compartments in  
the doors  
Closing the storage compartment  
Pull the cover on the handle back.  
General information  
There are storage compartments in the doors.  
Front center armrest  
Safety information  
General information  
A storage compartment is located in the center  
armrest between the seats.  
Warning  
Breakable objects such as glass bottles or  
glasses can break in the event of an acci-  
dent, braking or an evasive maneuver. Bro-  
ken glass can be scattered in the car's in-  
terior. There is a risk of injury and risk of  
property damage. Do not use any breakable  
objects while driving. Only stow breakable  
objects in closed storage compartments.  
Opening the center armrest  
Press the button.  
Closing the center armrest  
Press both lids down until they engage.  
313  
Storage compartments  
CONTROLS  
Rear center armrest  
Front cup holder  
General information  
Safety information  
A storage compartment is located in the center  
armrest between the seats.  
Warning  
Unsuitable containers in the cup holders may  
damage the cup holders or be thrown about  
the car’s interior in the event of an accident,  
an evasive maneuver, or forceful braking.  
Spilled liquids can distract from the surround-  
ing traffic conditions, lead to an accident and  
damage vehicle components. Hot drinks can  
damage the cup holder or lead to scalding.  
There is a risk of injury or risk of damage  
to property. Do not force objects into the  
cup holder. Make sure that drink containers  
are secured firmly in the cup holder. Use  
lightweight, shatterproof, and sealable con-  
tainers. Clean up spilled liquids immediately.  
Do not transport hot beverages.  
Folding down the center armrest  
Fold the center armrest forward.  
Opening the center armrest  
Opening the cup holder  
Press the button, arrow 1, and fold the lid up,  
arrow 2.  
Press on the cover.  
Closing the center armrest  
Press the lid down until it engages.  
314  
Storage compartments  
CONTROLS  
NOTICE  
Temperature sensitive items may be dam-  
aged by the hot metal insert of the thermo-  
electric cooling and heating system for a cup  
holder. There is a risk of property damage.  
Use suitable containers only.  
Switching on the thermal cup holder  
Two cup holders are located in the center con-  
sole.  
Press the button for keeping cool or  
warm once each.  
Closing the cup holder  
Pull the cover on the handle back.  
▷
▷
Blue LED illuminates: keep drinks cool.  
Red LED illuminates: keep drinks warm.  
Maintaining the drink temperature  
Switching off the thermoelectric  
cooling and heating system for a cup  
holder  
General information  
Depending on vehicle equipment, drinks can  
be kept cool or warm.  
Press the button repeatedly until the  
LEDs turn off.  
Safety information  
Rear cup holder  
Safety information  
Warning  
Warning  
Contact with the hot metal insert of the ther-  
moelectric cooling and heating system for a  
cup holder can cause burn injuries. There is  
a risk of injury. Do not touch the metal insert  
when the thermoelectric cooling and heating  
system for a cup holder is switched on.  
Unsuitable containers in the cup holders may  
damage the cup holders or be thrown about  
the car’s interior in the event of an accident,  
an evasive maneuver, or forceful braking.  
Spilled liquids can distract from the surround-  
ing traffic conditions, lead to an accident and  
damage vehicle components. Hot drinks can  
damage the cup holder or lead to scalding.  
There is a risk of injury or risk of damage  
to property. Do not force objects into the  
cup holder. Make sure that drink containers  
are secured firmly in the cup holder. Use  
lightweight, shatterproof, and sealable con-  
NOTICE  
When the thermoelectric cooling and heating  
system for a cup holder is switched on and  
the cover is closed, the thermoelectric cool-  
ing and heating system for a cup holder can  
overheat. There is a risk of property damage.  
Switch the thermoelectric cooling and heating  
system for a cup holder off before closing the  
cover.  
315  
Storage compartments  
CONTROLS  
tainers. Clean up spilled liquids immediately.  
Do not transport hot beverages.  
With six seats  
NOTICE  
With an open cup holder, the center armrest  
cannot be folded back up. There is a risk of  
property damage. Press back the covers be-  
fore the center armrest is folded up.  
Two cup holders are located in the center con-  
sole.  
Second row of seats  
General information  
The cup holder can be adjusted for three dif-  
ferent container sizes.  
Third row of seats  
Opening the cup holder  
1. Fold down the center armrest.  
2. Press the button and fold out the cup  
holder fully.  
The cup holders are located in the left and  
right side trim panels in the rear.  
Coat hooks  
General information  
The coat hooks are located in the grab handles  
and on the door pillar in the rear.  
Downsizing the cup holder  
To make it smaller, the cup holder can be  
folded at 2 levels.  
Safety information  
Enlarging the cup holder  
To make a smaller cup holder bigger, first fold  
it in completely. Then fold the cup holder out  
again fully.  
Warning  
Clothing articles on the coat hooks can ob-  
struct the view while driving. There is a risk of  
accident. When suspending clothing articles  
from the coat hooks, ensure that they will not  
obstruct the driver's view.  
Closing the cup holder  
Fold in the cup holder fully, until it engages.  
316  
Storage compartments  
CONTROLS  
Warning  
Improper use of the coat hooks can lead to a  
risk of objects flying about during braking and  
evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injury  
and risk of property damage. Only hang light-  
weight objects, for instance clothing articles,  
from the coat hooks.  
317  
Cargo area  
CONTROLS  
Cargo area  
Vehicle features and options  
Warning  
Improperly stowed objects can slip and be  
thrown into the car's interior, for instance in  
the event of an accident, braking or an eva-  
sive maneuver. Vehicle occupants can be hit  
and injured. There is a risk of injury and risk  
of property damage. Stow and secure objects  
and cargo properly.  
This chapter describes model-specific equip-  
ment, systems, and functions that are currently  
available, or may become available in the fu-  
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.  
Additional information:  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
Loading  
NOTICE  
Fluids in the cargo area can cause damage.  
There is a risk of property damage. Make  
sure that no fluids leak in the cargo area.  
Safety information  
Warning  
High gross vehicle weight can overheat the  
tires, damage them internally and cause  
a sudden tire pressure loss. Driving char-  
acteristics may be negatively impacted, re-  
ducing directional stability, lengthening the  
braking distances and changing the steering  
response. There is a risk of accident, injury,  
and property damage. Pay attention to the  
permitted load-carrying capacity of the tires  
and never exceed the permitted gross vehicle  
weight.  
Steps for determining correct load  
limit  
1. Locate the statement “The combined  
weight of occupants and cargo should  
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on the  
vehicle’s placard.  
2. Determine the combined weight of the  
driver and passengers that will be riding in  
the vehicle.  
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver  
and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.  
4. The resulting figure equals the available  
amount of cargo and luggage load ca-  
pacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount  
equals 1,400 lbs and there will be five  
150 lbs passengers in the vehicle, the  
amount of available cargo and luggage  
load capacity is 650 lbs (1,400 - 750 (5 x  
150) = 650 lbs).  
Warning  
When driving, loose items or devices con-  
nected to the vehicle with a cable, i.e., mobile  
phones, may be thrown around the vehicle,  
e.g., in the event of an accident or when brak-  
ing or performing evasive maneuvers. There  
is a risk of injury and risk of property damage.  
Secure loose objects or devices that are con-  
nected to the vehicle via a cable.  
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage  
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle.  
That weight may not safely exceed the  
318  
Cargo area  
CONTROLS  
available cargo and luggage load capacity  
calculated in Step 4.  
▷
▷
Heavy cargo: stow as far forward as possi-  
ble, directly behind and at the bottom of the  
rear seat backrests.  
6. If the vehicle will be towing a trailer, load  
from your trailer will be transferred to the  
vehicle. Consult this manual to determine  
how this reduces the available cargo and  
luggage load capacity of the vehicle.  
Very heavy cargo: stow as far forward as  
possible, directly behind and at the bottom  
of the rear seat backrests. When the rear  
seat is not occupied, secure each of the  
outer seat belts in the opposite buckle.  
Payload  
Lashing eyes in the cargo  
area  
General information  
Attach auxiliary materials to secure the cargo  
such as lashing straps, tensioning straps, draw  
straps, or cargo nets to the lashing eyes.  
The maximum payload is the sum of the  
weight of the occupants and the cargo.  
Overview  
The greater the weight of the occupants, the  
less cargo that can be transported.  
Stowing and securing cargo  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Cover sharp edges and corners on the  
cargo.  
Do not stack cargo above the upper edge of  
the backrests.  
The lashing eyes are located in the cargo area.  
If necessary, fold down the rear backrests  
to stow large cargo.  
The front lashing eyes are located under cov-  
ers. Fold down the seats in the third row to use  
the front lashing eyes.  
Fasten the aids for securing the load to the  
lashing eyes in the cargo area.  
Depending on vehicle equipment, use the  
cargo area partition net to protect occu-  
pants. Make sure that objects cannot pene-  
trate the cargo area partition net.  
Net  
Smaller objects can be stowed in the net on  
the left or right side.  
▷
▷
Small and light cargo: secure with tension-  
ing straps or tension bands or with a lug-  
gage compartment net.  
Larger and heavy cargo: secure with cargo  
straps.  
319  
Cargo area  
CONTROLS  
Storage compartment on  
the right side  
Cargo floor panel  
General information  
There are storage compartments beneath the  
cargo floor panel.  
General information  
A storage compartment is available on the  
right side of the cargo area.  
Opening the storage compartment  
Opening the storage compartment  
Fold up the cargo floor panel.  
Unlock the cover of the right side trim panel,  
arrow 1, and fold open, arrow 2.  
Enlarging the cargo area  
Storage compartment on  
the left side  
Principle  
The cargo area can be enlarged by folding  
down the rear seat backrests.  
General information  
A storage compartment is located on the left  
side in the cargo area.  
General information  
With seven seats:  
The rear seat backrest of the second seat row  
is divided at a ratio of 40–20–40. The side  
rear seat backrests and the center section can  
be folded down separately.  
Opening the storage compartment  
With six seats:  
The second row of seats consists of two div-  
ided seats. The rear seat backrests can be  
folded down separately.  
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the rear  
seat backrests can be folded down from the  
rear or from the cargo area.  
Unlock the cover of the left side trim panel,  
arrow 1, and fold open, arrow 2.  
320  
Cargo area  
CONTROLS  
Safety information  
Folding down the rear seat backrest  
From the rear  
Warning  
Vehicle parts can be damaged or body parts  
jammed when folding down the rear seat  
backrest. There is a risk of injury or risk of  
property damage. Make sure that the area of  
movement of the rear seat backrest including  
head restraint is clear when folding down.  
Warning  
Pull the switch and fold the rear seat backrest  
forward.  
If a rear seat backrest is not locked, unse-  
cured cargo can be thrown about the car’s  
interior; for instance, in the event of an acci-  
dent, braking or an evasive maneuver. There  
is a risk of injury. Make sure that the rear seat  
backrest is locked after folding it back.  
From the cargo area  
Overview  
Warning  
The stability of the child restraint system is  
limited or compromised with incorrect seat  
setting or improper installation of the child  
seat. There is a risk of injury or danger to life.  
Make sure that the child restraint system fits  
securely against the backrest. If possible, ad-  
just the backrest tilt for all affected backrests  
and correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that  
seats and backrests are securely engaged or  
locked. If possible and necessary, adjust the  
height of the head restraints or remove them.  
Switch in the cargo area  
Switch  
Function  
Fold down the rear seat back-  
rest.  
Maximum comfort.  
Maximum space.  
321  
Cargo area  
CONTROLS  
Folding down the rear seat backrest  
The rear seat backrests of the third seat row  
are folded down.  
▷
Press the switch. The rear seat  
backrest automatically moves to the  
respective end position. Pressing  
Folding back the rear seat backrest  
again stops the motion.  
From the rear  
Press the corresponding switch. The rear seat  
backrest sets itself upright.  
▷
Push the switch and hold it. The  
rear seat backrest moves as long as  
the switch is held down.  
Switch  
Function  
From the cargo area  
Pull the corresponding switch. The rear seat  
backrest sets itself upright.  
Top, front.  
The left and middle rear seat  
backrests fold forward.  
In the case of equipment with  
six seats:  
Folding down middle section  
The left seat backrest folds for-  
ward.  
Bottom,  
front.  
The right seat backrest folds  
forward.  
Top, rear.  
The left seat backrest in the  
third row of seats folds for-  
ward.  
Bottom,  
rear.  
The right seat backrest in the  
third row of seats folds for-  
ward.  
Fold down the center armrest and pull on the  
loop.  
Maximum comfort  
Press the switch.  
Cargo cover  
Safety information  
Warning  
All rear seat backrests move into upright po-  
sition. The seats of the second seat row are  
brought into the base position.  
When driving, loose items or devices con-  
nected to the vehicle with a cable, i.e., mobile  
phones, may be thrown around the vehicle,  
e.g., in the event of an accident or when brak-  
ing or performing evasive maneuvers. There  
is a risk of injury and risk of property damage.  
Secure loose objects or devices that are con-  
nected to the vehicle via a cable.  
Maximum space  
Press the switch.  
The rear seat backrests of the second and  
third seat row are folded down.  
In the case of equipment with six seats:  
The seats and rear seat backrests of the sec-  
ond seat row move into the rearmost position.  
322  
Cargo area  
CONTROLS  
Inserting the roller cover for luggage  
compartment  
Warning  
Body parts can become trapped when the  
folding cargo cover is operated. There is a  
risk of injury. When operating the folding  
cargo cover, make sure that the travel path  
of the cover is clear.  
1. Fold the rear seat backrest of the third row  
of seats forward.  
Fold the rear seat backrest forward, refer to  
page 112.  
2. If necessary, remove the cargo cover be-  
hind the third row of seats.  
3. Closing the lower tailgate.  
Warning  
4. Remove covers from brackets.  
A cargo cover that snaps back quickly can  
jam body parts or cause damage. There is a  
risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Do  
not let the cargo cover snap back into place.  
Warning  
An incorrectly inserted cargo cover can be  
thrown about the car's interior such as in the  
event of an accident or a braking or evasive  
maneuver. There is a risk of injury and risk of  
property damage. Make sure the cargo cover  
is securely engaged in the brackets.  
5. Remove the roller cover for the luggage  
compartment from the recess under the  
cargo area floor.  
6. Insert the roller cover for the luggage com-  
partment into the brackets from the top, ar-  
rows.  
Roller cover for the luggage  
compartment behind the second  
row of seats  
Make sure that the roller cover for the lug-  
gage compartment is positioned correctly in  
the brackets and that the clasps click into  
the locked position.  
Remove from the storage under the  
cargo area floor  
1. Remove side covers.  
Side covers, refer to page 320.  
2. Fold up the cargo area floor.  
3. Raise the roller cover for the luggage com-  
partment slightly.  
4. Slide the roller cover for the luggage com-  
partment as far to the right as possible.  
The roller cover for the luggage compartment  
was inserted correctly when a green color cod-  
ing is visible on the release buttons. If a green  
color coding is not visible, proceed as follows:  
5. Raise the left roller cover for the luggage  
compartment and guide it past the trim  
panel.  
323  
Cargo area  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
Remove the roller cover for the luggage  
compartment and insert it again.  
3. Stow the roller cover for the luggage com-  
partment as far to the right as possible and  
lower it on the left side.  
Push the release button back until the  
green color coding is visible.  
Closing the roller cover for luggage  
compartment  
4. Close the cargo area floor.  
5. Closing the side covers.  
Cargo cover behind third seat row  
Pull out the roller cover for the luggage com-  
partment, arrow 1, and hook both sides into the  
brackets, arrows 2.  
Inserting the cargo cover  
1. Remove the cargo cover from the recess  
under the cargo area floor.  
Removing the roller cover for luggage  
compartment  
1. Press the release button, arrow 1, on both  
sides and pull the roller cover for the lug-  
gage compartment out to the top, arrow 2.  
2. Slide the cargo cover forward in the side  
guides, arrow. Make sure that the cargo  
cover is positioned correctly in the brackets  
and that the clasps click into the locked po-  
sition.  
2. Insert the covers on the brackets.  
Closing the cargo cover  
Fold cargo cover back.  
Stowing the roller cover for luggage  
compartment  
1. Remove side covers.  
Side covers, refer to page 320.  
2. Fold up the cargo area floor.  
324  
Cargo area  
CONTROLS  
Removing the cargo cover  
With the rear seat backrest folded  
down  
When the rear seat backrest is folded down,  
install the cargo area partition net behind the  
front seats.  
1. Fold down the rear seat backrests.  
Enlarging the cargo area, refer to page 320.  
2. Open the front cover caps up on the roof  
frame until they engage.  
Pull the cargo cover out toward the rear, arrow.  
Stowing the cargo cover  
1. Remove the side cover on the left or right.  
Side covers, refer to page 320.  
2. Fold up the cargo area floor.  
3. Fold the rear part of the cargo cover for-  
ward.  
3. Insert each of the two top retaining pins of  
the cargo area partition net into the recep-  
tacles until they reach the stop, arrow 1, and  
push them forward.  
4. Turn the cargo cover and stow it in the re-  
cess.  
Make sure that the lower hooks with the  
opening point toward the rear of the vehi-  
cle.  
5. Close the cargo area floor completely.  
6. Close the side cover.  
Cargo area partition net  
4. Using the two bottom hooks, attach the  
partition net to the two front loops on the  
folded down rear seat backrest, arrows 2.  
Loosen both tensioning belts on the bottom  
of the partition net as necessary.  
General information  
The cargo area partition net can be installed in  
two different positions in the vehicle.  
5. After loading, pull both partition net ten-  
sioning belts tight.  
325  
Cargo area  
CONTROLS  
With the rear seat backrest upright  
When the rear seat backrest is upright, install  
the cargo area partition net behind the 2nd row  
of seats.  
Stowing the partition net  
The cargo area partition net can be stowed  
under the cargo floor panel.  
1. Remove the cargo area partition net.  
1. Remove the cargo cover.  
2. Roll up the cargo area partition net and  
pack it with the hook and loop tape.  
2. Open the rear cover caps up on the roof  
frame until they engage.  
3. Fold up the cargo area floor.  
4. Stow the cargo area partition net in the re-  
cess.  
3. Insert each of the two top retaining pins of  
the cargo area partition net into the recep-  
tacles until they reach the stop, arrow 1, and  
push them forward.  
5. Push the cargo floor panel downward.  
Make sure that the lower hooks with the  
opening point toward the rear of the vehi-  
cle.  
4. Hook the cargo area partition net with the  
lower two hooks into the two loops on the  
rear seat backrest, arrows 2.  
5. Pull both tensioning belts tight on the bot-  
tom of the partition net.  
326  
Cargo area  
CONTROLS  
327  

Related Topics

Dashboard
Sensors of the vehicle
Operating state of the vehicle
BMW iDrive
BMW Remote Software Upgrade
Personal settings
Opening and closing
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
Transporting children safely
Driving
Displays
Light and view
Safety
Driving stability control systems
Driver assistance systems
Parking
Driving comfort
Climate control
Interior equipment
Storage compartments
Cargo area

Popular Owner Manuals

Audi
BMW
Citroen
Ford
Honda
Peugeot

Latest Owner Manuals

Fourth Generation (2021-2026) Skoda Fabia 4 Door Fourth Generation (2021-2026) Skoda Fabia 4 Door
Second Generation (2013-2019) Hyundai I10 4 Door Second Generation (2013-2019) Hyundai I10 4 Door
First Generation (2007-2012) Hyundai I10 4 Door First Generation (2007-2012) Hyundai I10 4 Door
Second Generation (2022-2026) Volvo XC40 SUV Second Generation (2022-2026) Volvo XC40 SUV
Fifth Generation (2023-2026) Toyota Prius 4 Door Fifth Generation (2023-2026) Toyota Prius 4 Door
Fourth Generation (2016-2022) Toyota Prius 4 Door Fourth Generation (2016-2022) Toyota Prius 4 Door
→